Part Number TWIOI 1

1\11oTotco-

1A Varco Company

USER’S MANUAL

DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM

SPECTRUM 1000

Manufacturers of Precision Instruments

Printed in U.S.A. September 1989

 Manual TWl 011 contains 306 pages as follows:

Cover.. ............................ March1998

A thru B ............................. March 1998
i thru v. ......................... September 1989
l-l thru 6-10. .................... September 1989

All product, brand, or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or registered trade-
marks of their respective owners.

Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE

Proper service and repair is important to the safe, reliable operation of all M/D TOTCO equipment.
The service procedures recommended by M/D TOTCO and described in the technical manuals are
recommended methods of performing service operations. When these service operations require
the use of tools specially designed for the purpose, those special tools should be used as recom-
mended. Warnings against the use of specific service methods that can damage equipment or
render it unsafe are stated in the manuals. These warnings are not exclusive, as M/D TOTCO
could not possibly know, evaluate and advise service people of all conceivable ways in which ser-
vice might be done or of all possible associated hazardous consequences. Accordingly, anyone
who uses service procedures or tools which are not recommended by M/D TOTCO must first sat-
isfy themselves thoroughly that neither personnel safety nor equipment safety will be jeopardized
by the method selected.

A Sepetember 1989
M/D TOTCO
 LIMITED PRODUCT WARRANTY

THE FOLLOWING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER
EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT BY WAY OF LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Martin-Decker TOTCO (“Company”) warrants to Buyer (“Purchaser”) of new products manufactured or

supplied by the Company that such products are, at the time of delivery to the Purchaser, free of material and
workmanship defects, subject to the following exceptions:

A. Any product which has been repaired or altered in such a way, in the Company’s judgement, as to affect
the product adversely, including any repairs, rebuilding, welding or heat treating outside of Company
authorized facility.

B. Any product which has, in the Company’s judgement, been subject to negligence, accident, or improper
storage.

C. Any product which has not been installed, operated and maintained in accordance with normal practice
and within the recommendations of the Company.

D. For all items of special order by Buyer which are not manufactured by Company, Buyer should submit
warranty claims directly to the manufacturer thereof.

The Company’s obligation under this warranty is limited to repairing, or at its option, replacing any products
which in its judgement proved not to be as warranted within the applicable warranty period. All costs of
transportation of products claimed not to be as warranted to authorized Company service facility shall be
borne by Buyer. Costs of return transportation to Buyer of products accepted for repair or replacement by
Company under the warranty provisions of the Sales Agreement shall be borne by the Company. Company
may, at its sole option elect to refund the purchase price of the products, and Company shall have no further
obligation under the Sales Agreement.

The cost of labor for installing a repaired or replacement part shall be borne by Buyer. Replacement parts
provided under the terms of this warranty are warranted for the remainder of the warranty period of the
product upon which installed to the same extent as if such parts were original components thereof.

The warranty periods for various products are:

A. Hydraulic, Mechanical, Electronic Equipment: one (1) year from date of installation or fifteen (15) months
from date of shipment from Company, whichever occurs first.

B. All Elastomer Diaphragms: six (6) months from date of shipment from Company.

No deviations from the Company’s standard warranty terms or period as stated herein will be honored unless
agreed to in writing by an authorized Company representative prior to acceptance of the order.

EXCLUSIVITY OF REMEDY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. THE REMEDIES PROVIDED FOR IN THIS
WARRANTY SHALL CONSTITUTE THE SOLE RECOURSE OF BUYER AGAINST COMPANY FOR
BREACH OF ANY OF COMPANY’S OBLIGATIONS UNDER THE SALES AGREEMENT WITH BUYER,
WHETHER THE CLAIM IS MADE IN TORT OR IN CONTRACT, INCLUDING CLAIMS BASED ON
WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR OTHERWISE.

IN NO EVENT SHALL COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY OR IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), NOR FOR LOST PROFITS.

B September 1989
hi/D TOTCO
 -
i MARTII+DBCKBRTBCHtUCAL.HAHUAL 1 SPBCTRDH 1000 SYSTm 1 m1011i
+ -- -B-M -I-- --------+

TABLEOPUNTBNTS
SECTION PAGB
1.00 GENERAL I~TI~........................l- 1
1.01 Introduction ............................... l-l
2.00 DESCRIPTIOBJ ................................ 2-l
2.01 Purpose .................................... 2-l
2.02 System Description.........................2- 1
3.00 THHORY OF OPwATIoN........................3- 1
3.01 General Information ...................... ..3- 1
3.02 Theory of Operation........................3- 1
3.03 AC/DC Power Modules........................3- 3
3.04 Analog Sensor Input Modules................3-2 4
3.05 Pulse Sensor Input Modules.................3-3 2
3.06 Computing Modules .......................... 3-39
3.07 Communication Output Modules...............3-5 4
3.08 Relay/Alarm Output Modules.................3-7 3
3.09 Analog Output Modules......................3-7 6
4.00 mIffi ............................ 4-l
4.01 General Information........................4- 1
4.02 Operational Check-out................*.....4- 2
4.03 Visual and Power Check.....................4- 3
4.04 Overall Performance Check..................4- 4
4.05 Display Panel Check........................4- 5
4.06 Sensor Calibration.........................4- 6
4.07 Self-testing and Error Codes...............4- 8
4.08 Optional Equipment Check...................4-13
4.09 Location of Failure........................4-14
4.10 Reset Procedures ........................... 4-15
4.11 Troubleshooting Flow Charts................4-18
4.12 AC/DC Power Modules........................4-2 0
4.13 AC/DC Test Procedures......................4-3 5
4.14 Test Signal Conditioner Power Supply.......4-3 7
4.15 Test Display Panel Power...................4-4 2
4.16 Analog Input Modules.......................4-4 5
4.17 Pulse Input Modules........................4-5 1
4.18 Computing Modules .......................... 4-54
4.19 Communication Modules......................4-6 4
4.20 ,Relay/Alarm Output Modules.................4-7 4
4.21 Analog Output Modules......................4-7 6

TABLEOF- i PBBLIHINARY RELEASE 9/89

+~----------------- ----------m---- -------------------+

1 H A R T I N - D E C K E R T E C E N I C A L M A N U A L 1 S P E T R U H 1 0 0 0 S Y S T r n 1 TwlO ll~
+ ---------------------------------------------------------------+

5 .0 0 R E P A IR ..................................... 5-l
5 .0 1 G E N E R A L INFO R M A T IO N..................... ...5- 1
5 .0 2 G E N E R A LM O D U L ER E P L A C E M E N TP R O C E D U R E .......S - 5
5 .0 3 S P E C IFIC M O D U L ER E P L A C E M E N TP R O C E D U R E S .....5- 8
5 .0 3 .0 1 G e n e r a l In fo r m a tio n ........................ 5-8
5 .0 3 .0 2 Recalibration, S ystem C o l d S tarts a n d
B o a r d level C o l d S tarts....................5- 9
5 .0 3 .0 3 H 1 0 5 7 8 B ; A C L i n e R e g u l a tor.................5 - 1 1
5 .0 3 .0 4 H 1 1 0 5 9 A ; A C P o w e r P a n e l .................. ..5 - 1 4
5 .0 3 .0 5 H 1 1 0 7 0 A - 0 1 ; D C P o w e r S u p p l y ................5 - 1 7
5 .0 3 .0 6 P C B 2 9 3 A ; S e n s o r P o w e r S u p p l y ...............5 - 2 1
5 .0 3 .0 7 P C B 2 9 1 A - S E R IE S ; S e n s o r T R P M o d u l e ....... ..5 - 2 3
5 .0 3 .0 8 P C B 2 9 6 A - S E R IE S ; T R P P o w e r M o d u l e ...........5 - 2 4
5 .0 3 .0 9 H 1 2 0 5 4 A - S E R IE S ; In trinsically S a fe P w r S u p .5 - 2 6
5 .0 3 .1 0 P C B 2 9 1 A - S E R IE S ; S e n s o r T R P M o d u l e A n a l o g ...S -3 0
5 .0 3 .1 1 P C B 2 7 5 A ; A M P /M U X B O A R D................... ..5 - 3 2
5 .0 3 .1 2 P C B 2 8 2 A ; A /D C O N V E R T E RB O A R D ...............S -3 5
5 .0 3 .1 3 P C B 2 9 1 A - S E R IE S ; S e n s o r T R P M o d u l e P u lse....5-3 8
5 .0 3 .1 4 P C B 2 7 0 A ; P u lse In p u t B o a r d .................5 - 4 0
5 .0 3 .1 5 P C B 3 3 8 A - S E R IE S ; E n c o d e r In terfa c e B o a r d ....S -4 4
5 .0 3 .1 6 P C B 3 2 7 A - 0 2 ; C P U B o a r d .................... ..5 - 4 6
5 .0 3 .1 7 P C B 3 2 6 A ; C P I B o a r d ....................... ..5 - 4 8
5 .0 3 .1 8 H 1 0 9 8 0 A ; H H T M a intenance Terminal..........5 - 5 0
5 .0 3 .1 9 P C B 3 0 9 A ; M A T S B o a r d ...................... ..5 - 5 3
5 .0 3 .2 0 P C B 3 2 8 A - 0 2 ; R e a l Tim e Clock B o a r d ..........5 - 5 5
5 .0 3 .2 1 P C B 3 4 1 A - 0 2 ; D u a l Serial I/O B o a r d ..........5 - 5 7
5 .0 3 .2 2 P C B 3 1 3 A ; C u r r e n t L o o p C o n trol T R P B o a r d ....5 - 5 9
5 .0 3 .2 3 P C B 3 4 0 A - 0 1 ; R S 2 3 2 T R P B o a r d ................5 - 6 0
5 .0 3 .2 4 P C B 2 9 0 A ; C u r r e n t L o o p T R P B o a r d ............5 - 6 1
5 .0 3 .2 5 H 1 2 0 1 0 A ; IS M I M a s ter M o d u l e ................5 - 6 3
5 .0 3 .2 6 H 1 2 0 0 9 A ; IS M I S lave M o d u l e .................5 - 6 5
5 .0 3 .2 7 P C B 2 9 5 A ; Display C o n troller B o a r d ..........5 - 6 7
5 .0 3 .2 8 P C B 2 8 7 A ; Display B o a r d - V e r tical..........S -6 9
5 .0 3 .2 9 P C B 2 8 8 A - 0 2 ; Display B o a r d - Horizontal.....S -7 1
5 .0 3 .3 0 P C B 2 8 9 A ; Display B o a r d - Circular M e ter..5 - 7 3
5 .0 3 .3 1 H 1 1 0 6 2 A ; K e y p a d M o d u l e .....................5 - 7 5
5 .0 3 .3 2 P C B 2 6 6 A ; Relay B o a r d .......................5 - 7 7
5 .0 3 .3 3 H 1 2 1 2 0 A - 0 3 ; R a i l m o u n t Relay................5 - 7 9
5 .0 3 .3 4 P C B 3 4 3 A - S E R IE S ; D /A C o n v e r ter B o a r d ........S -8 2
5 .0 3 .3 5 P C B 3 4 4 A ; A n a l o g O u tp u t T e r m i n a tio n B o a r d ...5 - 8 5
5 .0 4 G E N E R A LM O D U L ER E P A IR P R O C E D U R E ............5 - 8 8
5 .0 5 S P E C IFIC M O D U L ER E P A IR P R O C E D U R E S ..........5 - 8 9
5 .0 5 .0 1 G e n e r a l In fo r m a tio n ...................... ..5 - 8 9
5 .0 5 .0 2 H 1 1 0 5 9 A ; A C P o w e r P a n e l ....................5 4 0
5 .0 5 .0 3 P C B 2 8 7 A ; Display B o a r d - V e r tical..........5 - 9 5
5 .0 5 .0 4 P C B 2 8 8 A - 0 2 ; Display B o a r d - Horiz..........S -9 7
5 .0 5 .0 5 P C B 2 8 9 A ; Display B o a r d - M e ter.............S -9 8
5 .0 6 S O F T W A R EO N L Y R E P L A C E M E N TP R O C E D U R E S .......S -9 9
5 .0 6 .0 1 G e n e r a l In fo r m a tio n ...................... ..5 - 9 9
5 .0 6 .0 2 Device R e p l a c e m e n t P r o c e d u r e ...............5 - 1 0 1
5 .0 6 .0 3 S o ftw a r e U p g r a d e s .......................... 5-102
6 .0 0 L X U 4 W ING SA N D P A R T S L IS T S ...................6 - 1

P R E L ININARY R E L E A S E 9 /8 9 ii TABLEOPCONTNNTS
+------------------------------------ --a-------------we-+

1 H A R T I N - D g c E [ E R T K Z H N ICALLlANllAc I S P Z C T R U H 1 0 0 0 S Y S T T # I TwlO llI

+ ---------------------'--------------------------------------------+

L IS T O F IL L U S T R A T IO N S
FIG U R E TITLE PAGE
----------------------------------------------------------~ -
3 .1 S ystem P o w e r - B lock D i a g r a m ...................... ..3- 4
3 .2 A C L i g h tin g P rotectio n S ystem - B lock D i a g r a m .......3- 6
3 .3 A C L i g h tin g P rotectio n S ystem .......................3- 6
3 .4 L i n e V o lta g e R e g u l a tor - S c h e m a tic ................ ..3- 7
3 .5 L i n e V o lta g e R e g u l a tor .............................. 3-8
3 .6 A C P o w e r P a n e l - E xternal V iew .................... ..3- 8
3 .7 A C P o w e r P a n e l - In ternal V iew ...................... 3-9
3 .8 A C P o w e r P a n e l - W iring D i a g r a m ..................... 3-9
3 .9 D C P o w e r S u p p l y ..................................... 3-12
3 .1 0 S e n s o r P o w e r S u p p l y ................................. 3-15
3 .1 1 S e n s o r P o w e r S u p p l y - S c h e m a tic ..................... 3-16
3 .1 2 Transient P rotector ( T R P ) - B lock D i a g r a m ...........3 - 1 7
3 .1 3 Transient P rotector ( T R P ) ........................... 3-18
3 .1 4 T R P P o w e r M o d u l e - B lock D i a g r a m .................. ..3 - 2 1
3 .1 5 T R P P o w e r M o d u l e .................................... 3-21
3 .1 6 IS P S V o lta g e /Current Curve .......................... 3-22
3 .1 7 In trinsically S a fe P o w e r S u p p l y .....................3 - 2 3
3 .1 8 In trinsically S a fe P o w e r S u p p l y - B lock D i a g r a m .....3 - 2 3
3 .1 9 A M P /M U X B o a r d A ssembly .............................. 3-26
3 .2 0 A M P /M U X B o a r d B lock D i a g r a m .........................3 - 2 6
3 .2 1 A D C B o a r d A ssembly .................................. 3-29
3 .2 2 A D C B o a r d B lock D i a g r a m ............................. 3-29
3 .2 3 P IB B o a r d A ssembly .................................. 3-35
3 .2 4 P IB B o a r d B lock D i a g r a m ............................. 3-35
3 .2 5 E n c o d e r In terfa c e ................................... 3-37
3 .2 6 E n c o d e r In terfa c e - B lock D i a g r a m ...................3 - 3 8
3 .2 7 C e n tral P rocessing Unit ............................. 3-40
3 .2 8 C e n tral P rocessing Unit - B lock D i a g r a m .............3 - 4 0
3 .2 9 C e n tral P rocessor In terfa c e .........................3 - 4 3
3 .3 0 C e n tral P rocessor In terfa c e - B lock D i a g r a m .........3 - 4 3
3 .3 1 H a n d H e l d Terminal .................................. 3-45
3 .3 2 H a n d H e l d Terminal - B lock D i a g r a m ..................3 - 4 6
3 .3 3 M a th a n d A ctive T e r m i n a tio n .........................3 - 4 9
3 .3 4 M a th a n d A ctive T e r m i n a tio n - B lock D i a g r a m .........3 - 4 9
3 .3 5 R e a l Tim e Clock ..................................... 3-51
3 .3 6 R e a l Tim e Clock - B lock D i a g r a m .....................3 - 5 2
3 .3 7 C o m m u n i c a tio n s B lock D i a g r a m ........................3 - 5 5
3 .3 8 D u a l Serial In p u t/O u tp u t ............................ 3-56
3 .3 9 D u a l Serial In p u t/O u tp u t - B lock D i a g r a m ............3 - 5 7
3 .4 0 C u r r e n t L o o p C o n trol ................................ 3-58
3 .4 1 C u r r e n t L o o p C o n trol - B lock D i a g r a m ................3 - 5 9
3 .4 2 R S 2 3 2 T R P ........................................... 3-60
3 .4 3 R S 2 3 2 T R P - B lock D i a g r a m ........................... 3-60
3 .4 4 C u r r e n t L o o p T R P .................................... 3-62
3 .4 5 C u r r e n t L o o p T R P - B l o c k D i a g r a m ....................3 - 6 3
3 .4 6 In trinsicaly S a fe M o d u l a r In terfaces................3 - 6 4
3.47 IS M I M a s ter M o d u l e - B lock D i a g r a m ..................3 - 6 5
3 .4 8 IS M I S lave M o d u l e - B lock D i a g r a m ...................3 - 6 6
3 .4 9 M icro Display C o n troller ............................ 3-67

T A B L E O I? ~ ~ iii P R E L ININARY R E L E A S E 9 /8 9
+--------------------~--~~--~~ -------------------------+
I
.
HUtTIN-DECKERTECENICALWWDAL I SPEcTRrn 1000 SYsTlm I RJlOllI

FIGURE TITLE PAGE

3.50 Micro Display Controller - Block Diagram ............ 3-68
3.51 Display Board - Block Diagram ..................... ..3-6 9
3.52 Vertical Display Board .............................. 3-70
3.53 Horizontal Display Board ............................ 3-71
3.54 Circular Meter Display Board........................3-7 1
3.55 Keypad .............................................. 3-72
3.56 Relay Card .......................................... 3-73
3.57 Relay Card - Block Diagram .......................... 3-74
3.58 Railmount Relay ..................................... 3-75
3.59 Digital to Analog Converter.........................3-7 6
3.60 Digital to Analog Converter - Block Diagram.........3-7 7
3.61 Analog Output Termination Module....................3-7 8

LIST OF TABLES
TABLE TITLE PAGE
_------------------------ ---------a---
3.1 Field Replacement Module List.......................3- 2
3.2 Common Field Replacement Parts List.................3- 3
3.3 DC Power Supply Output Voltages.....................3-11
3.4 Sensor Power Supply Test Points.....................3-15
3.5 Sensor TRP Excitation Voltages......................3-17
3.6 TRP Voltage Regulator Test Points...................3-19
3.7 TRP Power Module Test Points........................3-2 0
3.8 ADC TRP Sensor Input Test Points....................3-2 5
3.9 PIB TRP Sensor Input Test Points....................3-3 3
4.1 MATS Error Codes .................................... 4-10
4.2 HHT Error Codes ..................................... 4-12
4.3 ADC Raw Counts vs. AMP/MUX Voltage..................4-4 9
4.4A MATS Error Codes with Flow Chart Action.............4-5 6
4.4B HHT Error Codes with Flow Chart Action..............4-5 6
4.5A HHT Keypad Test ..................................... 4-63
4.5B HHT Display Character Test .......................... 4-63
5.1 Field Replacement Module List.......................5- 2
5.2 Common Field Replacement Parts List.................5- 3
5.3 Field Repairable Module List........................5- 4
5.4 Channel Number to Amp/Mux Board Assigment...........5-3 3

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 iv TABLE OF CONTENTS

i MARTIN-D- TECHNIICAL HANUAL 1 SPECTRUH 1000 SYSTEH 1 TUlOllI
+- ---------------------------------------------~-------------+

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

TABLEOF- V PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

+---a------- ---e-s-- -I__-------- -I-- ---------+

1 HARTIN-DEKERTECENICALWWDAL I S P E C T R D H1 0 0 0 S Y s T m 4 I TulO llI

+ ------------------------~ ------------------------------------+

S E C T IO N 1 .0
G E N ? S A L INFO R M A T IO N

1 .0 INTRO D D C T IO N This m a n u a l c o n tains a description a n d theory of

o p e r a tio n for th e M a r tin-Decker S P E C T R U M 1 0 0 0 D a ta A cquisition
S ystem . A lso included a r e troubleshooting charts a n d illustrated
p a r ts lists to assist in locating a n d isolating p r o b l e m s th a t m a y
occur.
1 .0 1 .0 1 P R E C A U T IO N A R Y INFO R M A T IO N T w o types o f p r e c a u tionary
inform a tio n a r e included in M a r tin-Decker m a n u a l s , w h e r e applica-
ble, for aid in o p e r a tio n , p r o tectio n o f th e e q u i p m e n t a n d safe ty
to p e r s o n n e l .
Applicatio n o f e a c h as follows:
W A R N ING : U s e d w h e r e m a lfu n c tio n of equipment or d a m a g e to
e q u i p m e n t could result in serious or fa tal injury to p e r s o n n e l or
m a jor p r o p e r ty loss. *.

C A U T IO N U s e d w h e r e m a lfu n c tio n of equipment or damage to

equipment m a y c a u s e interruption o f service.
E n s u r e all p e r s o n n e l w h o will b e p e r fo r m i n g th e procedures in
this m a n u a l h a v e r e a d th e Im p o r ta n t S a fe ty N o tice o n p a g e B .
1 .0 1 .0 2 P E R S O N N E LQ U A L IFICA T IO N S Installation, o p e r a tio n , m a inte-
n a n c e , troubleshooting, a n d repair o f th e S P E C T R U M 1 0 0 0 D a ta
A cquisition S ystem should b e accomplished only by p e r s o n n e l who
a r e fully qualified to work with th e e q u i p m e n t. E n s u r e th a t
personnel w h o will b e o p e r a tin g th e S P E C T R U M1 0 0 0 D a ta A cquisi-
tio n S ystem a r e qualified to p e r fo r m th e procedures described in
this m a n u a l a n d in T W lO ll-IO . S o m e special training is required.
P e r s o n s using th e S P E C T R U M 1 0 0 0 D a ta A cquisition S ystem should
th o u r o u g h l y fa m iliarize th e m s e l v e s qith th e e q u i p m e n t b e fo r e
a tte m p tin g to o p e r a te it.
1 .0 1 .0 3 RELATED PUBLICATIONS
T W lO ll-IO S P E C T R U M1 0 0 0 U S E R 'S M A N U A L

P R E L ININZ4RY R E L E A S E 9 /8 9 l-l G E N m m L I N m R H A !rIO N

+I----------------------------------------------+

1 MARTIN-DE!CER TECBHICAL HANDAL I SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTml I TulOllI

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

l-2 PRELININARY RELE&SE 9/89

 -ws---------------m -----------------------+

N A N U A L 1 S P E C T R U H1 0 0 0 S Y s T E n I TwlO llI

s E c T Io N 2 .0

2 .0 1 PURPOSE
2 .0 1 .0 1 P U R P O S E T h e p u r p o s e o f th e S P E C T R U M1 0 0 0 D a ta A cquisi-
tio n S ystem is to c o n tinuously query various types o f a n a l o g a n d
pulse sensors, scale this inform a tio n against preset calibration
values, th e n pass th e E n g i n e e r i n g Unit inform a tio n o n to L C D type
displays or o th e r o u tp u t devices. It also m u s t check th e p r e s e n t
value o f a n y sensor against o p e r a tor set a l a r m setp o i n ts and
activate a n a l a r m if th e s e a r e e x c e e d e d .
2 .0 2 S Y S T m D E S C R IP T IO N
2 .0 2 .0 1 S Y s T E ) I B u K lg D IA G R A M A S ystem block d i a g r a m is s h o w n in
Figure 2 .1 . T h e r e a r e currently eleven m a in c o m p o n e n ts th a t m a k e
u p a typical S P E C T R U M1 0 0 0 D a ta A cquisition S ystem :
A. Analog Sensors
B. P u lse S e n s o r s
C. In trinsic S a fe ty Barrier A ssembly ( o p tional)
D L i n e R e g u l a tor ( o p tional)
E. S ignal C o n d i tio n e r
F. Display P a n e l
G. In trinsically S a fe Display P a n e l P o w e r S u p p l y
H. Junctio n Box
I. A larms
J. R e m o te C o m p u ter ( o p tional)
K. A n a l o g R e c o r d e r ( o p tional)
A . Analog Sensors: V a r i o u s types o f sensors convert physical
p r o p e r ties to electrical signals, either voltage or m illiam p
levels. T h e s e c a n b e M /D sensors or a n y device th a t provides a
voltage or m illiam p signal, although M /D sensors a r e r e c o m m e n d e d
to e n s u r e g r e a test c o m p a tibility a n d service.
B . P u lse S e n s o r s : V a r i o u s types o f sensors d e tect m o v e m e n t or
actio n s a n d convert th e s e e v e n ts into electrical pulses. These
c a n b e a switch closure, transistor, or voltage pulse o u tp u ts.
M /D sensors a r e r e c o m m e n d e d to e n s u r e g r e a test c o m p a tibility and
service.
C . In trinsic S a fe ty Barrier A ssembly ( o p tional): This assembly
c o n tains all th e intrinsic safe ty barriers n e e d e d for th e system .
A n y sensor th a t n e e d s barrier p r o tectio n is c o n n e c te d to th e
S ignal C o n d i tio n e r th r o u g h a safe ty barrier in this b o x . T h e
cables th a t carry signals b e tween th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r a n d th e
Display P a n e l m u s t also b e r o u te d th r o u g h th e s e barriers, to
comply with intrinsic safe ty r e q u i r e m e n ts.

P R E L IM I N A R Y R E L E A S E 9 /8 9 2-l D ~ IP T IO N
+------------------ P-B-- ------ ------------+

IHARTIN-DBC.KBRTXZHNICUWWAL 1 S P E clcRull l o o o - s Y s T E H I IwlO llI

+ -------------------------------- ---------------+

D . L i n e R e g u l a tor ( o p tional): T h e line regulator is u s e d to

provide stable A C p o w e r to th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r , In trinsically
S a fe P o w e r S u p p l y , a n d o th e r accessories. It also provides some
p r o tectio n against h i g h voltage spikes such as lightning.
E . S ignal C o n d i tio n e r : T h e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r receives signals
from th e sensors a n d converts th e m to digital n u m b e r s . T h e m icro-
c o m p u ter processes th e s e n u m b e r s , a l o n g with c o m m a n d s from th e
user, to create usable inform a tio n a n d c o n trol th e alarms. T h e
d a ta is th e n transmitted to th e Display P a n e l to b e displayed.
F. Display P a n e l : T h e Display P a n e l is a n intrinsically safe
i n p u t/o u tp u t terminal th a t receives d a ta from th e S ignal Condi-
tio n e r a n d displays it to th e user. Digital r e a d - o u ts a n d bar-
g r a p h displays a r e c o m b i n e d to p r e s e n t inform a tio n in b o th abso-
lute a n d relative fo r m a ts. A k e y b o a r d allows th e user to view a n d
set alarms, tu r n fu n c tio n s o n a n d o ff, a n d c h a n g e various parame-
ters.
G . In trinsically S a fe P o w e r S u p p l y : T h e In trinsically S a fe
P o w e r S u p p l y is th e source o f p o w e r for th e Display P a n e l . This '
p o w e r supply in conjunctio n with th e In trinsic S a fe ty In terfa c e
M o d u l e s (IS M I) in th e Display P a n e l , allow th e Display S ystem to
b e a p p r o v e d as intrinsically safe .
H . Junctio n Box: This junction b o x c o m b i n e s th e p o w e r from th e
In trinsically S a fe P o w e r S u p p l y a n d th e c o m m u n i c a tio n signals
from th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r into two s e p a r a te cables g o i n g to th e
Display P a n e l . T h e s e duplicate cables provide b a c k u p in case o n e
cable is d a m a g e d .
I. A larms: V a r i o u s types o f alarms c a n b e u s e d to w a r n person-
nel w h e n a n a l a r m lim it is e x c e e d e d . T h e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r
provides relay c o n tact o u tp u ts th a t c a n b e c o n n e c te d to external
relays or drivers which th e n c o n n e c t to appropriate alarms. T h e
a l a r m devices c a n b e located a n y w h e r e o n th e site, provided th a t
p r o p e r e q u i p m e n t is u s e d in h a z a r d o u s areas.
J. R e m o te C o m p u ter ( o p tional): A r e m o te c o m p u ter c a n b e con-
n e c te d to th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r to acquire th e d a ta b e i n g g e n e r -
a te d . If P R IS M 1 0 0 0 is r u n n i n g o n th e r e m o te c o m p u ter, this d a ta
c a n b e displayed a n d printed. T h e r e m o te c o m p u ter could also b e
th e rig c o m p u ter system .
K . A n a l o g R e c o r d e r ( o p tional): 'If th e a n a l o g o u tp u t o p tio n is
installed, th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r c a n provide a n a l o g current or
voltage o u tp u ts to a n a n a l o g recorder or a n o th e r d a ta acquisition
system .

D E S C R IP T I~ 2-2 P R E L ININARY R E L E A S E 9 /8 9
1 HUtTIN-DEICER TECHNICAL HANDAL I SPEcTRtJn 1000 SY!sTm I TwlOllI
+-------------------------------------------------- ----- +

/I
SIGNAL COMPUTER 1
CONDlllONER

Figure 2.1: Typical SPECTRUM 1000 System Block Diagram

PRELInIbuBp -E 9/89 2-3 DESCRIPTIORI

 ----------------- -------------------------------------+
i -TIN-DEICER TECEBIICAL HANUAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTEn 1 TwlOllI

\ 4
ANALOG ANALOG / ANALOG ANALOG
SENSORS - INPUT ’ OUTPUT - DEVICES
1
w
AC AC/DC COMPUTING RELAY ALARM
INPUT ’ POWER - MODULES - OUTPUT - DEVICES
4 \
. 4
PULSE PULSE . COMM. COMM.
SENSORS * INPUT ’ OUTPUT - DEVICES
l

Figure 2.2: Simplified SPECTRUM 1000 System Block Diagram

DBSCRIPTIoIs 2-4 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

+--------------------.----- ---m------v ---~-----------+

I H A R T I N - D I Z C X E R T E C H IUICAL~ 1 S P E C T R U N1 0 0 0 S Y S T r n I lwlO llI

2 .0 2 .0 2 S Y S T I# O V E R V IE W Figure 2 .2 is a sim p lified block dia-

g r a m o f th e S P E C T R U M1 0 0 0 D a ta A cquisition S ystem . T h e twelve
blocks s h o w n , generally represent th e twelve subsystems a n d h o w
th e y a r e interconnected. A ll i n p u ts a r e o n th e left a n d o u tp u ts
o n th e right. This m a n u a l will b e c o n c e r n e d with th e s e v e n sub-
system s in th e c e n ter, highlighted by th e b o l d o u tline. However,
th e i n p u ts a n d o u tp u ts (lighter blocks) a r e significant aids to
u n d e r s ta n d i n g overall o p e r a tio n s a n d m u s t b e considered when
troubleshooting. E a c h o f th e s e will b e discussed in g r e a ter
d e tail w h e r e appropriate . T h e r e m a i n d e r o f this S e c tio n 2 .0 0
discusses e a c h o f th e subsystems in increasing d e tail. Each
subsystem is described as a w h o l e , e m p h a s i z i n g th e individual
m o d u l e s th a t m a k e u p th e subsystem a n d h o w th e y a r e interconnect-
e d . A ll significant i n p u ts a n d o u tp u ts a r e r e p r e s e n te d by th e
lighter block o u tlines a n d th e individual m o d u l e s a r e in th e b o l d
blocks. T h e p a r t n u m b e r for e a c h block is also included. T h e flo w
o f d a ta b e tween th e blocks is generally r e p r e s e n te d by th e direc-
tio n o f th e arrow. In s o m e cases h o w e v e r , m inor bidirectional
c o m m u n i c a tio n s occur a n d this is n o t s h o w n , b u t will b e discussed
in th e text. S e c tio n 3 .0 0 discusses e a c h o f th e individual mod-
ules in g r e a ter d e tail a n d p r e s e n ts th e theory o f o p e r a tio n and :
fu n c tio n s on each module.
2 .0 2 .0 3 S IHPLIPIRD S Y S T m B L O C R D IA G R A M T h e s e v e n m a jor subsys-
te m s in Figure 2 .2 a r e required to m o v e th e d a ta from th e two
types o f i n p u t sensors to th e various o u tp u t devices. The SPEC-
T R U M 1 0 0 0 D a ta A cquisition S ystem is d e s i g n e d to acquire d a ta
from various sensor i n p u ts, p e r fo r m calculations o n this d a ta ,
c o m p a r e it against user specified a l a r m set p o i n ts, th e n transmit
th e d a ta to a r e m o te L C D Display P a n e l or o th e r o p tio n a l o u tp u t
devices. T h e s e v e n m a jor subsystems s h o w n in Figure 2 .2 a r e :

1. A C /DC P O W E RM O D U L E S
2. A N A L O G S E N S O RI N P U T M O D U L E S
3. P U L S E S E N S O RI N P U T M O D U L E S
4. C O M P U T INGM O D U L E S
5. C O M M U N ICATIONO U T P U T M O D U L E S
6. R E L A Y /A L A R M O U T P U T M O D U L E S
7. A N A L O GO U T P U T M O D U L E S

P R E L IHINARY R E L E A S E 9 /8 9 2-5 D B S C E U P T IO R I
+------ --------a---------------ew--------
-a---
---------+

1 H A R T I N - D E C K E R T E C E N I C A L H A N D A L 1 S P E C T R D H1 0 0 0 S Y S T E X I TwlO llI

1 1

TRP SENSOR PULSE

B h .lO D ~ ~ - SENSORS
,

/
TRP POWER A NA L O G
4 Ma= - OUTPUT
1
d I
SENSOR RELAY
PwRS&PLY ’ OUTPUT
z
t
I
OTHER DC P O W E R C O M P U T ING
E Q U IP M E N T SUPPLY - MODULES
Ul1070*--

AC A C L INE AC POWER EXTERNAL

INPUT - R E G ; U L A & T O- R PAN&L - BATTERY
/
I

I ’
I.S . P O W E R
SUPPLY -
HlZO W A - -
D IS P L A Y
PANEL

Figure 2 .3 : A C /DC P o w e r M o d u l e s B lock Diagram

D E S C R IP T IO N 2-6 P R E L ININARY R E L E A S E 9 /8 9
+----------------------------------------- ---s-----------+
1 HARTIN-DECKERTECENICALHAMUAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTPU I TwlOll~

2.02.04 AC/DC POWER NODULES Each of the seven subsystems in

Figure 2.2 can be considered as separate systems without much
interaction. The only subsystem that affects all the others is
obviously the AC/DC POWER MODULES. All the other subsystems in
the SPECTRUM 1000 Data Acquisition System require DC power of
some kind and the AC/DC POWER MODULES supply this power. Refer to
Figure 2.3 for a block diagram of the modules that make up the
AC/DC POWER MODULES subsystem.
The major function of the AC/DC POWER MODULES subsystem is to
convert the AC power available at the site into a usable form of
DC power for all the other subsystems. It also provides a very
strong defense against damaging voltages occurring outside the
Signal Conditioner. It does this by providing multiple levels of
isolation between the circuits inside and outside the Signal
Conditioner enclosure.
All AC input to the SPECTRUM 1000 Data Acquisition System normal-
ly is connected to the AC LINE REGULATOR (H10578B). This regula-
tor, in conjunction with a surge suppressor, provides a stable AC
output that is protected from significant overvoltage spikes or ;
surges. The stable protected AC voltage is then connected to the
Signal Conditioner AC POWER PANEL (H11059A) and the INTRINSICALLY
SAFE (I.S.) POWER SUPPLY (H12054A-series). Depending on the
installation, the AC power from the LINE REGULATOR may also be
connected to other equipment.
The I.S. POWER SUPPLY converts the AC voltage from the AC LINE
REGULATOR into DC power for use by the Display Panel and its
associated circuits. Use of this DC power is discussed in more
detail in the COMMUNICATION MODULES section 2.02.08.
The Signal Conditioner AC POWER PANEL does not convert AC to DC,
but is a secondary line of defense against AC voltage spikes and
surges and also provides filtering against radio frequency (RF)
noise and interference on the AC line. The AC POWER PANEL also
contains the AC ON/OFF switch and AC line fuse. If the optional
external battery backup is connected, the AC POWER PANEL provides
the termination socket, battery ON/OFF switch, and battery fuse.
If battery back-up is not installed, this part of the AC POWER
PANEL is not used.
The AC POWER PANEL output is connected to the MAIN DC POWER
SUPPLY (H11070A-series). This power supply is the primary source
of DC power inside the Signal Conditioner. The MAIN DC POWER
SUPPLY can accept either AC or battery (DC) input from the AC
POWER PANEL. Normally it runs on AC line voltage, but if this
fails, an external battery can provide temporary backup. The
switch-over is automatic if the battery is connected and switched
ON.

PRRLIHINARY RELEASE 9/89 2-3 DESCRIPTICM3

+----------------------------- ------------------+
1 MARTIN-DS!KERTBCHNICALMANlJAL 1 SPEcTRtJn 1000 SYsTEn I TulOllI

The MAIN DC POWER SUPPLY has four outputs. Three are regulated
and one is unregulated. The major difference being the amount of
electrical noise and ripple allowed. These four outputs provide
DC power at three different voltage levels. The regulated outputs
are +5VDCR, +lZVDCR, -lZVDCR, and the fourth output is an unregu-
lated +12VDCU. These four output voltages are distributed
throughout the Signal Conditioner and drive various circuits. The
three regulated outputs are generally independent of each other,
but there is some interaction if the load on any one output is
suddenly changed. The +lZVDCU output however is much more depend-
ent on the load of the +SVDCR.
The three regulated outputs from the MAIN DC POWER SUPPLY pri-
marily supply DC power to the COMPUTING MODULES and in turn, some
of the COMMUNICATION MODULES and the TRansient Protection (TRP)
system, but these outputs are isolated from the external world by
other circuits. The regulated outputs are used exclusively inside
the Signal Conditioner and are not available to any circuits
outside the enclosure. This is to prevent external noise from ~
entering the circuits inside the Signal Conditioner.
The single unregulated output from the MAIN DC POWER SUPPLY is
used exclusively by the SENSOR POWER SUPPLY (PCB293A). This power-
supply provides isolation between the COMPUTING MODULES and the
circuits exiting the Signal Conditioner enclosure. The SENSOR
POWER SUPPLY only provides one regulated output voltage level
(+30VDCR). As shown in Figure 2.3, the +30VDCR from the SENSOR
POWER SUPPLY supplies power to the analog and pulse SENSOR TRP
MODULES and any TRP POWER MODULES installed in the TRP system.
The TRP system is part of all these other systems. It prevents
most transient voltages, spikes, surges, and noise present out-
side the Signal Conditioner from entering on wires other than the
AC power line.
The SENSOR TRP MODULES are connected between external sensors and
the Signal Conditioner. The SENSOR TRP MODULES contain two sepa-
rate circuits. One circuit provides up to 60mA of regulated
EXCITATION power to a sensor and the other circuit filters and
protects the returning SIGNAL. The AC/DC POWER MODULE subsystem
is concerned only with the EXCITATION circuit. SENSOR TRP MODULES
are available to provide four different levels of EXCITATION
voltage and numerous styles of SIGNAL inputs. Refer to Table 2.1
for the part number of the different styles of SENSOR TRP MOD-
ULES.

DESCBIPTION 2-8 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

+----------------------- -------------------------------------+
1 HARTIN-DECKEEiTECHNICAL- 1 sPEcTRIm 1000 SYsTEn I !mno11~
+- ---_------------------~- -B---------------+

+---------------------------
M/D Part EXCITATION SIGNAL
Number voltage type
----------.---------__I______
PCB291A-1 +24VDC ANALOG
---------..------------------
PCB291A-2 +12VDC ANALOG
---------.-----------..------
PCB291A-3 +lOVDC ANALOG
----------.---------_I_______
PCB291A-4 +SVDC ANALOG
----------.----------..------
PCB291A-5 +lZVDC NPN
---------..---------_I_______
PCB291A-6 none SWITCH
---------.I----------..------
PCB291A-7 none NPN
---------..----------..------
PCB291A-8 +lZVDC PNP
+--------------------------~

TABLE 2.1 - SENSOR TRP MODULES

The TRP POWER MODULES as shown in Figure 2.3 supply power to the
ANALOG OUTPUT MODULES and the RELAY/ALARM OUTPUT MODULES. It is
not shown in Figure 2.3, but a TRP POWER MODULE can also supply
up to 250mA of EXCITATION power to an external sensor if 60mA
from the SENSOR TRP MODULE is insufficient. A TRP POWER MODULE
cannot accept the returning SIGNAL however. A separate SENSOR TRP
MODULE is required for that. TRP POWER MODULES are available in
two output voltage levels (+lZVDC and +24VDC) as shown in Table
2.2. TRP POWER MODULES are used anytime the current required by
an outside source is greater than could normally be supplied by a
SENSOR TRP MODULE. Refer to Sections 2.02.05, 2.02.06, 2.02.09,
2.02.10 and Section 3.0 for more information on the SENSOR TRP
and TRP POWER MODULES.
+--------------------+
I M/D Part
Number
EXCITATION
I voltage I
PCB296A-1 +lZVDC
--------- ----------
PCB296A-2 t +24VDC

TABLE 2.2 - TRP POWER MODULES

PRELIHINARY RELEA!SR 9/89 2-9 DESCRIPTIOIJ

1 MARTIN-DECKER TECENICAG MANUAL 1 SPEC3!RUH 1000 SYSTEM I RnOlli
+-------------------- B---c ---- ---- .~.----~-------+

ANALOG AMP/MUX ANALOG TO COMPUTING

SENSORS - BOaS - DIG.CZ(&NV. - MODULES

Figure 2.4: Analog Sensor Input Modules Block Diagram

DESCRIPTIOBl 2-10 PNELIHINANY RELEASE 9/89

i MARTIN-DECKERTECRRICALHARUAL
+---.-------- p----p -----my
I SPs!TRDH 1000 SYSTlm I !m1011~
-a- ----------~+

2.02.05 ANAIAX SENSOR INPU!l!HODDLES One of the major input sub-

systems in the SPECTRUM 1000 Data Acquisition System is shown in
Figure 2.4. This is the ANALOG SENSOR INPUT MODULE subsystem.
This subsystem provides the means for connecting all analog
sensors to the SPECTRUM 1000 Data Acquisition System. It receives
the voltage SIGNALS from the analog sensors, converts them into
Engineering Units (EU) according to calibration values, then
supplies this information to the COMPUTING MODULES.
As indicated in Figure 2.4, all analog sensors are connected to
SENSOR TRP MODULES (PCB291A-series). Up to 32 SENSOR TRP MODULES
are plugged into the TRP Motherboard (PCB345A). They provide
EXCITATION voltage and receive the SIGNAL from the sensor. This
is the first stage of Signal Conditioning for the sensor SIGNALS.
Refer to Table 2.1 for a list of available SENSOR TRP MODULES.
Refer to the SPECTRUM 1000 Operators Manual (TWlOll-IO) for the
type of TRP to use with a particular sensor.
The TRP Motherboard provides connectors for the wires from the
sensors, card slots for plugging in the SENSOR TRP MODULES and ~
TRP POWER MODULES, and the circuitry to connect all the sensor I
SIGNALS to the AMPlifier/MUltipleXer (AMP/MUX) BOARDS (PCB275A).
The 32 sensor SIGNALS are connected to two AMP/MUX boards (six-
teen sensors per AMP/MUX). Refer to TWlOll-IO for more informa-
tion on the TRP Motherboard layout and sensor connection.
The AMP/MUX boards, installed in the STD bus inside the Signal
Conditioner, provide a "front-end" instrumentation amplifier for
each sensor, low-pass filtering, and addressable sixteen-to-one
multiplexing. The AMP/MUX board serves two functions. It provides
the second stage of SIGNAL Conditioning and an addressable Single
Pole 16 Throw (SP16T) switch. This switch is controlled by the
Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) board (PCB282A). The ADC se-
lects one position on the SP16T switch and the AMP/MUX board
applies that single sensor SIGNAL to the ADC board. This allows
the ADC to select any one of the 32 (2 x 16) analog sensor SIG-
NALS on either of the AMP/MUX boards. If a second TRP Motherboard
is installed, an additional 32 analog sensors can be connected to
two more AMP/MUX boards and these can be connected to the origi-
nal ADC. This allows the SPECTRUM 1000 Data Acquisition System to
monitor a maximum of 64 analog sensors.
The ADC board is also installed in the STD bus. It has only one
input, but as discussed above, can select which sensor SIGNAL is
applied to that input. The ADC CONVERTS the ANALOG voltage from a
sensor to a DIGITAL number (EU), thus the name "Analog to Digital
Converter". The ADC provides the third and final stage of Signal
Conditioning.

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 2-11

 -------a------------- ------------ -----v ----me-------+

i
XARTIN-DEKERTECHBJICALHANUAL 1 S P B C T R U N1 0 0 0 S Y S T E L l 1 lO l 1 ~

T h e A D C is a stand a l o n e c o m p u ter system in itself. T h e "conver-

sion" is c o n trolled by a n i n d e p e n d e n t m icroprocessor. This m icro-
processor is also responsible for th e calibration o f a sensor,
a n d storing th e n u m b e r a fter conversion. T h e A D C m icroprocessor
c o m m u n i c a tes with th e H o s t c o m p u ter in th e C O M P U T INGM O D U L E S
subsystem. T h e H o s t asks for th e value o f a p a r ticular sensor a n d
th e A D C m icroprocessor r e s p o n d s with th e stored digital number
for th a t sensor. T h e A D C c o n tinuously converts a n d stores th e
values for every sensor c o n n e c te d a n d periodically gives th e s e
n u m b e r s to th e H o s t c o m p u ter.

D E S C R IP T Iolbl 2-12 P R E L ININARY R E L E B S X 9 /8 9

i HARTIN-DEKER
+~---------------
TECENICAL HANDA& 1 SP-~
--------------------_________I______
1000 SYSTBI~ I -lolli
-----+

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

PRELIHI~Y REXSASS 9/89 2-13 DBCRIPTION

+-----------------------------------------------------------
1 HARTIN-DEQCERTECHBJICAL~ 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYsTEn I !rulOll~
+--------------------------- ---------------__---- --- +

PULSE INPT COMPUTING

BOA&D - MODULES

SENSOR
,PwR SUPPLY

Figure 2.5: Pulse Sensor Input Modules Block Diagram

DESCRIPTIOH 2-14 PRELININhRY - 9/89

+------------------------------------- --------~---------+
1 HARTIN-DEKER~ICALWWJAL 1 SPECTRDN 1000 SYSTT# 1 ?KtlOllI

2.02.06 PULSE SENSOR IBlPDT HDDDLES The second major input sub-
system in the SPECTRUM 1000 Data Acquisition System is the PULSE
SENSOR INPUT MODULE subsystem shown in Figure 2.5. This subsystem
provides the means for connecting all pulse sensors to the SPEC-
TRUM 1000 Data Acquisition System. It receives the pulse SIGNALS
from the pulse sensors, converts the pulses into Engineering
Units (EU) according to calibration values, then supplies this
information to the COMPUTING MODULES. The pulses are converted
into two types of EU. The first is a COUNT of the pulses that
occurred and the second is the RATE at which they are occurring.
As with the analog sensors above, up to 8 pulse sensors are
connected to SENSOR TRP MODULES plugged into the TRP Motherboard.
At least one SENSOR TRP MODULE is required for each sensor, but
some sensors require more since they provide more than one pulse
SIGNAL. This is the case with the Drawworks Encoder shown in
Figure 2.5. This special type of sensor connects to the ENCODER
INTERFACE which in turn puts out two pulse SIGNALS. One SIGNAL
pulses when the encoder is rotating in the UP direction and the
other when moving in the DOWN direction. Two or even three SENSOR
TRP MODULES are required to receive the SIGNALS from this sensor;
(the third is for ROP). This sensor also requires a separate TRP
POWER MODULE because it requires more than 60mA of current to
operate.
After the first stage of SIGNAL Conditioning on the SENSOR TRP
MODULES, the TRP Motherboard connects the eight SIGNALS directly
into the Pulse Input Board (PIB) in the STD bus. No secondary
amplifier or multiplexer is required for the pulse SIGNALS be-
cause the PIB utilizes an opto-isolator for each incoming pulse
sensor. As with the ADC however, the PIB is a stand alone comput-
er system. The PIB microprocessor "counts" the incoming pulses
and converts them, according to calibration, to a digital number
(EU). The PIB then stores these numbers until the Host computer
asks for them. Two basic types of numbers can be calculated and
stored, the COUNT of pulses and the RATE of pulses. The PIB
microprocessor keeps track of which type to store for each sen-
sor.

PRELININiJRY RXLEMB 9/89 2-15

i HAR!PIN-DEiCKR !l'ECHNICAL HANCJAL I SPECTRDH 1000 SYs!l!En I !mlOllI
+-------------------------- I--------------_---- -----------+

STD BUS

AMP/MUX
BOARD r -
rosnh-oa --....- Jt
I I I
1ANALOG TO jA MATS
60&D

AMP/MUX RTC
BOARD BOARD I

DC POWER
SUPPLY

Figure 2.6: Computing Modules Block Diagram

DESCRIP!lTON 2-16 PRELINIMY RELEASE 9/89

 T
i HARTIN-DEKERTECENIcAGHANDAL
+-----------------------------
1 SPBCTRDH 1000 SYsTml
-----------------------+
I mvlo11I

2.02.07 COHFIJTING HODDLES As shown above, all inputs from the

analog and pulse sensors are stored in their respective systems,
but these numbers for the sensors are useless unless intelligent
calculations can be performed using them and the results dis-
played to the user. This is the major function of the COMPUTING
MODULES subsystem shown in Figure 2.6. The COMPUTING MODULES
subsystem lies between the input modules and output devices. All
data moving through the system passes through the COMPUTING
MODULES.
The major component of the COMPUTING MODULES subsystem is the
Central Processor Unit (CPU). The CPU BOARD (PCB327A-02), in-
stalled in the STD bus, contains the Host computer. The Host
controls all the other peripherals in the system. It requests and
gets EU numbers from the ANALOG and PULSE INPUT MODULES, uses its
own support modules to act on these numbers, then sends the
results out to the COMMUNICATION, RELAY/ALARM, and ANALOG OUTPUT
MODULES (refer to Figure 2.2).
The CPU BOARD is so critical to the operation of the whole SPEC-
TRUM 1000 Data Acquisition System, it is duplicated. Two CPU ':
BOARDS are installed in the STD BUS. Only one CPU BOARD is oper--
ating at any time, while the other is on standby waiting for a
failure to occur. If it does, the standby CPU BOARD is switched
in and assumes control of the peripherals while the other is shut
down until repaired. The CPU Interface (CPI) (PCB326A), installed
between the two CPU BOARDS controls this switch between them. It
will only allow one CPU BOARD or Host to operate at a time.
The Host has three other modules to help it move data through.
The Real Time Clock (RTC) board (PCB328A-02), Math and Active
Termination (MATS) board (PCB309A), and the Hand Held Terminal
(HHT) (H10980A). Each of these peripheral modules is directly
under the control of the Host and communicates with it via the
STD bus or other cabling.
Once the Host has completed calculations for a particular sensor,
it must store this information for retrieval by other peripher-
als. It stores this in Non-Volatile Random Access Memory (NVRAM).
This memory is located on the RTC BOARD. If power is lost for any
reason, the data stored in NVRAM is not lost. The NVRAM devices
have a 10 year battery life.

PRXLININARY RELEASE 9/89 2-17 DESCRIPTION

+------------------------------ -----------------------------+
1 HARTIN-DEKER TECENICAL HANDAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SY!rrml I lwlo11I
+ ------------em-- ------------------------------------+

The RTC board also contains a clock. This is a clock very similar
to a small wrist watch, but it has no display. The Host can set
and read this clock to determine the time of day and the date. It
also has 10 year battery back-up to prevent the loss of time
during a system power interruption. The RTC BOARD also has brown
out protection. If the main power on the STD BUS dips below a
preset limit but doesn't go completely away, the brown out cir-
cuit will generate a reset. This prevents operation when the STD
BUS voltage is below specification.
The Host has much information coming in from various sensors in
the form of floating point numbers. The time involved in perform-
ing simple addition, subtraction, multiplication and division on
these numbers would be enormous. The Host however has a support-
ing slave math processor located on the MATS BOARD. This math
processor is designed to do the math calculations as fast as
possible then return the result to the Host.
The MATS board also has circuits on it for several other periph-
eral functions. One is to terminate the STD BUS. This is required
to reduce noise that might be present on the bus. Another func-
tion is the Watch-Dog Timer (WDT). It acts like a continuous
count down timer that is always trying to get to zero. The Host
must periodically reset this timer to its full count. If the Host
fails to reset this timer, it will reach zero and generate a
reset of the system. This will allow the CPI board to switch to
the backup Host computer. The MATS board also provides external
switches and LED type displays for use in resetting the system
and indicating error conditions.
The HHT is normally connected to the CPI board on the STD bus.
Its function is to allow the installation and maintenance techni-
cian to communicate with the active Host computer. This may be to
calibrate a sensor, view system errors, or take corrective action
in the event of a failure. It is used primarily for calibrating
sensors or input channels, but it also allows field technicians
to run diagnostic functions. This device has a numeric keyboard
and alphanumeric display. Simple English prompt messages lead the
user through the different functions.
The HHT has two modes of operation, HOST mode and ADC mode. The
active mode is determined by where the HHT is installed. If it is
plugged into the CPI BOARD, it is in HOST mode and communicates
with the Host computer. If plugged into the ADC, it is in ADC
mode and communicates directly with the ADC computer. The opera-
tion of the HHT is different depending on the selected mode.
Refer to the-SPECTRUM 1000 Operators Manual (TWlOll-IO) for more
information on operation of the HHT in HOST mode.

DESCRIPTION 2-18 PRELININhRY RKLEASR 9/89

. -~~~~~ r

I
+
H A R T I N - D X K E R T E C H N I C A L H A N U A L 1 S P m z r R u N 1 0 0 0 S Y s T m a I TwlO llI
w-----------------sP -----------------------+

T H IS P A G E I N T E N T I O N A L L Y L E F T B L A N K

P R E L ININARY R E L E A S E 9 /8 9 2-19 D E S C R IP T IO N
r-----
1 MARTIN-DEKERTECENICALHABKIAL 1 SP-~ 1000 SY~T= 1 m0lli
+----------------------- -------- --I-- ----- ----- +

\ 1
3 DISPLAY 3 DISPLAY 3 DISPLAY 3 DISPLAY
MOEES MO&ES MODSS

L /
KEYPAD 3 DISPLAY 3 DISPLAY 3 DISPLAY 3 DISPLAY
MO,plE - CNT&RS CNTRLL&?S CNTRARS CNTFU-&S
/

r
SENSOR CL TRP CL TRP SENSOR
PWR SUPPLY- Ll&l 4 \ ) LINK& WPWR SUPPLY

I f 4
COMPUTlNG DSIO TRP CNTRL RS232 TRP PERSONAL
MODULES - BOARD BOARD - COMPUTER
/

Figure 2.7: Communication Output Modules Block Diagram

DESCRIPTION 2-20 PRBLININARY RELEASE 9/89

 r
i MARTIN-DlZ5ERTEHBUCALMANDAL
+------ ------ ------mm-
1 SPBCTRDH 1000 SYsTml
---------------+
1 TwlOllI

2.02.08 CChHBDNICATIONODTPDTlUXXLBS After all the data from

the input subsystems has been acquired and calculated, it must be
transmitted to the Display Panel or other display devices. This
is done through another peripheral, the Dual Serial Input Output
(DSIO) board (PCB341A-02). Refer to Figure 2.7.
The DSIO, installed in the STD bus, takes the data as instructed
by the Host and outputs it in a protocol the display devices can
understand. This output is serial 9600 baud. The DSIO output is
sent to the TRP subsystem, then out to the different types of
display devices. The DSIO also receives input from the TRP sub-
system and this is sent back to the Host computer.
To communicate with the various display devices, the serial data
must be converted to different voltage levels depending on the
type of device. The data and protocol to all the devices is the
same, but the type of data pulses are different. The TRP CONTROL
board (PCB313A) handles this interface. It receives the data from
the DSIO and "controlsl' up to four secondary COMMUNICATION TRP
boards. ?
Two types of secondary COMMUNICATION TRP boards are available.
The first is the RS232 TRP board (PCB340A-01). This board is
normally used to communicate with devices less than 200 feet (60.
meters) away. The pulse voltage levels are +12 and -12 VDC. The
most common use of the RS232 TRP is PRISM communication to a
personal computer as shown in Figure 2.7. Refer to the PRISM 1000
Operators Manual (TW1026) for more information about the PRISM
1000 system.
The second type of secondary COMMUNICATION TRP board is for
longer distance communications. This is the Current Loop (CL) TRP
board (PCB290A). It sends and receives data pulses in the form of
opto-isolated 0 to 20mA current pulses rather than voltage. This
type of communication is more immune to noise and is easier to
isolate. It is normally used to communicate at up to 1000 feet
(300 meters). The most common use of the CL TRP is communication
to the SPECTRUM 1000 Display Panel.

PRELIMItMARY IUCLEASE 9/89 2-21

+------------------------ -------a--- ---------------------+

l
M A R T I N - D E C K .lZRTE c H b l I C A L H A M J A L 1 S P E C T R D H1 0 0 0 S Y s T E n I TulO llI

In a typical S P E C T R U M1 0 0 0 C O M M U N ICATIONsubsystem as s h o w n in
Figure 2 .7 , two C L T R P b o a r d s a r e u s e d to c o m m u n i c a te with th e
Display P a n e l . O n e side is called L INK 1 a n d th e o th e r L INK 2 .
B o th L I N K S a r e bidirectional (transmit a n d receive) and are under
th e c o n trol o f th e T R P C O N T R O Lb o a r d . E a c h o f th e s e C L T R P b o a r d s
carries th e s a m e inform a tio n , so th e y a r e r e d u n d a n t. O n ly o n e
L INK is u s e d a t a tim e , b u t if th e cable for o n e L INK should g e t
d a m a g e d or cut, th e o th e r is already c o n n e c te d a n d c o m m u n i c a tio n
with th e Display P a n e l is n o t lost. T h e r e d u n d a n t L INK cables c a n
also duplicate th e p o w e r to th e Display P a n e l from th e I.S . P o w e r
S u P P lY * A junction b o x as s h o w n in Figure 2 .1 is required to
s e p a r a te this wiring.
A ll c o m m u n i c a tio n with th e S P E C T R U M1 0 0 0 Display P a n e l is h a n d l e d
a t th e fo u r In trinsic S a fe ty M o d u l e In terfaces (IS M I) m o u n te d
inside th e Display P a n e l . T h e first o f th e s e IS M Is is th e 1 3 4 1
M A S T E R m o d u l e ( H 1 2 0 1 0 A ) . It receives th e two 0 - 2 0 m A current loop
L I N K S from th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r a n d provides o p to-isolation and
signal conditio n i n g o n this e n d . T h e IS M I M A S T E R th e n s e n d s b o th
c o m m u n i c a tio n links a n d th e p o w e r d o w n to a m a x i m u m o f th r e e IS M I
S L A V E M O D U L E S( H 1 2 0 0 9 A ) .
T h e fu n c tio n o f th e IS M I M O D U L E S , o th e r th a n th e M A S T E R fu n c tio n s
discussed a b o v e , is to provide c o m m u n i c a tio n a n d lim ite d p o w e r to
th e individual D IS P L A Y C O N T R O L L E R S( P C B 2 9 5 A ) . T h e IS M I M O D U L E S ,
w h e n u s e d in conjunctio n with th e I.S . P o w e r S u p p l y a n d fo u r
safe ty barrier, allow th e S P E C T R U M1 0 0 0 Display P a n e l to b e
certified as intrinsically safe a p p a r a tus. This m e a n s th e e n tire
Display P a n e l subsystem is " i n h e r e n tly" safe a n d o th e r te c h n i q u e s
such as p u r g i n g a r e n o t required. R e fer to th e S P E C T R U M1 0 0 0
O p e r a tors M a n u a l (TW lO ll-IO ) for m o r e inform a tio n o n th e intrin-
sic safe ty Display P a n e l subsystem.
E a c h IS M I M O D U L Ec a n s u p p o r t a m a x i m u m o f th r e e D IS P L A Y C O N T R O L -
L E R S as s h o w n in Figure 2 .7 . T h e D IS P L A Y C O N T R O L L E Ris also a
stand a l o n e c o m p u ter system . T h e D IS P L A Y C O N T R O L L E Rm icroproces-
sor receives th e i n c o m i n g d a ta from th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r ,
decides which link to "listen" to , d e c o d e s th e c h a n n e l n u m b e r a n d
E U n u m b e r , th e n d e te r m i n e s which s e g m e n t o n which L C D to tu r n O N
to display th a t E U n u m b e r . B e c a u s e a c o m m o n p r o tocol is u s e d to
c o m m u n i c a te to all th e o u tp u t devices, e a c h D IS P L A Y C O N T R O L L E R
M O D U L Em u s t b e a b l e to recognize th e d a ta for th e D IS P L A Y M O D U L E
it is c o n n e c te d to . This selection is d e te r m i n e d by th e switch
settin g o n th e D IS P L A Y C O N T R O L L E Rb o a r d .

D E S C R IP T IO N 2-22 P R E L IHIW h R Y R E L E A S E 9 /8 9
 -------I_-- ---- -a-------+

i
H A R T I N - D E K E R T E 'E N I C A L H A H U A L I S P E C T R D H1 0 0 0 S Y sTrn I !lm O ll~

A ll c o m m u n i c a tio n in th e S P E C T R U M1 0 0 0 C O M M U N ICATIONsubsystem is
d o n e in th e fo r m o f "packets". E a c h p a c k e t c o n tains a p r e d e fin e d
c h a n n e l n u m b e r a n d th e E U n u m b e r for th a t c h a n n e l . Devices such
as th e D IS P L A Y C O N T R O L L E RM O D U L E S , a r e p r o g r a m m e d to recognize
this c h a n n e l n u m b e r a n d d e c o d e th e E U n u m b e r to b e displayed.
S ince th e p r o g r a m E P R O M s installed in th e D IS P L A Y C O N T R O L L E R
M O D U L E Sfor a p a r ticular system a r e all alike, th e switch settin g
o n a p a r ticular D IS P L A Y C O N T R O L L E Rb o a r d d e te r m i n e s th e personal-
ity o f th a t b o a r d a n d th e r e fo r e th e n u m b e r s displayed. R e fer to
S e c tio n 2 .0 2 .1 1 for a n overview o f th e c o m m u n i c a tio n s p r o tocol.
T h e first D IS P L A Y C O N T R O L L E RM O D U L Ec o n n e c te d to th e IS M I M A S T E R
M O D U L E is special. It is c o n n e c te d to th e o p e r a tors K E Y P A DM O D U L E
( H 1 1 0 6 2 A ) a n d c a n transmit d a ta back to th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r .
It is th e only D IS P L A Y C O N T R O L L E RM O D U L Eth a t c a n d o this. A ll
th e o th e r c o n trollers a r e "receive only". This first D IS P L A Y
C O N T R O L L E RM O D U L Ec o n trols th e bidirectional c o m m u n i c a tio n be-
tween th e o p e r a tors k e y p a d a n d th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r , p e r fo r m s
periodic h a n d s h a k i n g a n d error checking with th e S ignal Condi-
tio n e r , scans th e o p e r a tors k e y p a d a n d e n c o d e s th e key presses,
th e n s e n d s this inform a tio n to th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r for actio n :
It also returns a n error to th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r if either of
th e c o m m u n i c a tio n L I N K S fails.
A s s h o w n in Figure 2 .7 , e a c h o f th e D IS P L A Y C O N T R O L L E RM O D U L E Sis
m o u n te d o n a single D IS P L A Y M O D U L E . T h e D IS P L A Y M O D U L E Sc o n tain
th e Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD) for th e Display P a n e l a n d th e
necessary L C D driver circuits. T h e s e m o d u l e s h a v e n o ability to
c o m m u n i c a te or d e tect errors. T h e y a r e u n d e r th e c o m p l e te c o n trol
o f th e D IS P L A Y C O N T R O L L E RM O D U L Ewhich d e te r m i n e s h o w m a n y seg-
m e n ts o n which L C D to tu r n O N , a n d fo r m s all th e digits and
b a r g r a p h s using th e n u m b e r s s e n t from th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r .
T h r e e types o f D IS P L A Y M O D U L E Sa r e available. T h e th r e e D IS P L A Y
M O D U L E S ( P C B 2 8 7 A , P C B 2 8 8 A - 0 2 , a n d P C B 2 8 9 A ) all o p e r a te basically
alike, b u t th e L C D s a r e a r r a n g e d differently. T h e differences are
s h o w n in T W lO ll-IO .

P R E L IHIE A R Y R E L E B S E 9 /8 9 2-23 D E S C R IP ¶ !IO N

+-------------- ----------------_-_------------__ -a----+

1 L u R T I# - D E K E R T E c B b l I C A L M A N U A L 1 s P E c T R Im 1 0 0 0 S Y s T m I !m lO llI

OTHER
’ CONTROLS
I
4 ,
C O M P U T ING RELAY R A IL M O U N T ALARM
MODULES - BOAF&D - RELAYS - DEVICES
nlal*IAI ,
?

Figure 2 .8 : Relay/A l a r m O u tp u t M o d u l e s B lock Diagram

D ~ IP !l!IO N 2-24 P R E L IHIX A R Y R E L E A S E 9 /8 9

*------------a-------- -p--s- ------w..--------+
1 HARTIBEDEiCERT~ICALHAUDAL I SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTEn 1 RnOllI

2.02.09 RELAY/ALARM ODTPDT EoDuLEs One of the more important

and yet most understandable subsystems is the RELAY/ALARM OUTPUT
MODULES subsystem shown in Figure 2.8. This subsystem is basical-
ly an array of sixteen small reed type relays mounted on the
RELAY BOARD (PCB266A) which are then connected to larger external
relays. These larger relays switch other devices or controls. The
SPECTRUM 1000 Data Acquisition System uses the first eight relays
on the RELAY BOARD as alarm controls. If an alarm condition
occurs, the Host computer will close these eight relays.
In a typical system, a larger RAILMOUNT RELAY (HlZlZOA-series) is
connected between the first relay on the RELAY BOARD and an ALARM
HORN. Thus when an alarm condition occurs, the ALARM HORN sounds.
The coil on this RAILMOUNT RELAY is energized by a TRP POWER
MODULE as indicated in Figure 2.8. Additional RAILMOUNT RELAYS
can be connected to the other seven alarm relays to switch remote
horns or lights. The remaining eight non-alarming relays on the
RELAY BOARD can be custom programmed according to the users
requirements. Contact Martin-Decker for more information. Refer
to TWlOll-IO for more information on setting and operating the -
alarm.

PRELIHIBmEY RELEASE 9/89 2-25 DIBCRIFTI<MI

r------
~HAR!HbFDECKBR!l!BCHHICALMANUAL 1 SPE~~~IM 1000 SYSTI# 1 ~nolli
+p----------------W-------- ----------------------+

A \

COMPUTING DIGITAL TO ANLG OUT AN ALOG

MODULES - ANWFJ - MO&E - DE’.‘tCES
A
t

Figure 2.9: Analog Output Modules Block Diagram

DWp!l!IOU 2-26 PBELIH~U~Y RELEASE 9/89

 1
i XARTIN-DEICER TECHNICAL HANDAL I SPECTRDH 1000 SYsTpI( I Tw1011~
+ --------------------------y---Mp --a-a-----em--+

2.02.10 ANALtxoDTPtJTNoDuLEs The last output subsystem is the

ANALOG OUTPUT MODULES subsystem shown in Figure 2.9. This is an
optional addition that may not be present on all systems. It is
primarily used to communicate to other ANALOG DEVICES such as pen
recorders or other data acquisition systems. The analog output
system consists of the Digital to Analog Converter (DAC) board
(PCB343A-series) and the ANALOG OUTPUT TERMINATION MODULE
(PCB344A).
The DAC board is installed on the STD bus and communicates to the
Host computer in the COMPUTING MODULES subsystem. Unlike the ADC
and PIB boards discussed above however, the DAC board is not a
stand alone computer system. It does not have a separate micro-
computer to control the output, but the output can be scaled
electronically. The DAC board "converts" the numbers given to it
by the Host computer into an appropriate output voltage or cur-
rent. Therefore, the Host computer controls the output scaling of
the DAC board. This scaling is also user definable. A single DAC
has eight O-10 volt DC or 4-20 mA outputs and a SPECTRUM 1000
Data Acquisition System can support up to two DACs. The ANALOG
OUTPUT TERMINATION MODULE provides transient protection and ?
termination for the external recorders or system. In a typical
system, a TRP POWER MODULE is used to source the 4-2OmA current
loops to the ANALOG DEVICES as shown in Figure 2.9.

PRELININhRY RELEASE 9/89 2-27 D~IPTION

 ---I---m-------- m------- --------~-~---------~--------+

W 4 R T I H - D E K B R T E c B # I C A L H A B l D A L I s P E c T R u u 1 0 0 0 S Y sTrn I !LwlO ll~

+ -----------------------------------------------~ -----~ --*
i

2 .0 2 .1 1 ~ IcA T IO B lS O V E R V IE W : D a ta is transmitted from th e

S ignal C o n d i tio n e r C O M M U N I C A T I O N SM O D U L E Sto th e Display Panel
IS M I M O D U L E Sover a 2 wire twisted pair cable 0 to 2 0 m A C u r r e n t
L o o p using a serial c o m m u n i c a tio n p r o tocol a t 9 6 0 0 b a u d . Like-
wise, d a ta is transmitted from th e K E Y B O A R DD IS P L A Y C O N T R O L L E R
M O D U L E to th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r C O M M U N I C A T I O N SM O D U L E Salso via
a twisted pair a n d using this s a m e p r o tocol. This allows a m ini-
m u m a m o u n t o f cabling, reducing installation costs a n d wiring
clutter. O p tically isolated current l o o p circuits a r e u s e d for
intrinsic safe ty a n d to r e d u c e g r o u n d l o o p p r o b l e m s . For r e d u n -
d a n c y , fo u r twisted pair cables a r e u s e d instead o f two.
T h e serial c o m m u n i c a tio n p r o tocol is b a s e d o n a n addressing
s c h e m e using p r e d e fin e d d a ta "packets". A ll th e inform a tio n
transferred b e tween th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r , th e Display P a n e l , or
a n y o th e r external devices m u s t b e fo r m u l a te d into a p a c k e t
b e fo r e it c a n b e s e n t. A p a c k e t, in its m o s t c o m m o n fo r m c a n b e
th o u g h t o f as th e d a ta from a single sensor a fter it h a s b e e n
scaled a n d checked for a l a r m lim its. T h e serial c o m m u n i c a tio n s
p r o tocol d e fin e s th e a r r a n g e m e n t o f th e " d a ta words" th a t a r e T.
c o n ta i n e d inside th e p a c k e t. This p r o tocol helps d e fin e a stand-'
a r d for i m p l e m e n ta tio n o f current r e q u i r e m e n ts a n d fu tu r e m o d i fi-
catio n s or a d d i tio n s to th e system . E a c h p a c k e t s e n t o u t c o n tains
a preassigned "system c h a n n e l n u m b e r " . T h e system c h a n n e l n u m b e r
tells th e receiving device w h a t th e inform a tio n c o n ta i n e d in th e
p a c k e t is a n d w h e r e it c a m e from . T h e receiving device will th e n
d e c o d e this p a c k e t a n d u s e th e d a ta appropriately. In th e case o f
th e Display P a n e l , th e D IS P L A Y C O N T R O L L E RM O D U L Ewill receive th e
p a c k e t, d e c o d e it, a n d p r e p a r e th e d a ta for a p a r ticular LCD.
T h e following section c o n tains a m o r e d e tailed description o f th e
serial c o m m u n i c a tio n p r o tocol. It also gives m o r e inform a tio n on:

A) c h a n n e l types
B) serial d a ta w o r d fo r m a t
Cl typical c h a n n e l a s s i g n m e n ts

D E S C R IP T IO N 2-28 P R E L ININlUlY R E L E A S E 9 /8 9
 --- --+
i MARTIN-DEXEEtTECENICALHMUAL 1 SPG 1000 SYm I TulOllI
--a -- --- +

2-02.12 cE&NNEL TYPES Four types of channels are defined for

use in the SPECTRUM 1000 Data Acquisition System. Each type of
channel has a specific purpose. The four basic types of data
channels are:

1) RAW DATA: Calibrated sensor value in Engineering Units.

Raw data is generated by the Signal Conditioner.
Examples: Tank #l Level, Total Weight, Pressure

2) KEYBOARD DATA: A number entered by the operator on the

keyboard, typically alarm settings.
Examples: High alarm limit for Total Weight, Lines Strung

3) CALCULATED DATA: Calculated from raw data and keyboard data.

Examples: Net Weight, Total Volume, Gain/Loss Deviation :

4) SYSTEM CHANNELS: Used by the system for maintenance,

control, etc.
Example: System Status display

2.02.13 SERIAL DATA A data word is a set of data bytes that

tells everything there is to know about a data channel. The
serial data word format shows the information that makes up a
particular channel. Included are the channel number,
status/control bits, and the floating point EU value of the
channel. The channel number is what the system uses to identify
the channel.

PRELIHIHARY RELEASE 9/89 2-29 DBCRIPTION

+-------------------------------------------, v---------+

1 M A R T Ib F D X X E R T E C E b l I C A L H A N D A L 1 S P E C T R D H1 0 0 0 S Y sTrn I TwlO llI

*-----------------------~ --------------------------+

2 .0 2 .1 4 C H A N N E L N D M B E R S T h e r e a r e actually two types o f c h a n n e l

n u m b e r s ; S Y S T E M a n d S E N S O R . T h e m a intenance technician is usually
only c o n c e r n e d with th e S Y S T E M c h a n n e l n u m b e r , which h a s already
b e e n discussed. In s o m e cases h o w e v e r , th e technician must deal
with th e S E N S O Rc h a n n e l n u m b e r . T h e S E N S O Rc h a n n e l n u m b e r exists
only in th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r . It is d e te r m i n e d by actual
sensor wiring c o n n e c tio n s to th e A N A L O G I N P U T M O D U L E Ssubsystem.
A ll th e devices th a t receive d a ta , u s e S Y S T E M channels to i d e n ti-
fy th e d a ta . S Y S T E M channels a r e p r e d e fin e d for a p a r ticular
system a n d a r e s o m e w h a t universal b e tween system s. For e x a m p l e ,
in th e c h a n n e l a s s i g n m e n ts o n th e following p a g e s , C h a n n e l 1 is
th e level p r o b e o u tp u t o f M u d T a n k #l, C h a n n e l 3 8 is h o o k l o a d ,
C h a n n e l 9 3 is R O P . This will b e true for m o s t S P E C T R U M1 0 0 0 D a ta
A cquisition S ystem s, regardless o f h o w th e associated sensors a r e
c o n n e c te d to th e system . S o m e differences a r e assigned from tim e
to tim e d u e to th e lim ite d n u m b e r o f c h a n n e l n u m b e r s . R e fer to
th e c h a n n e l list for th e specific system to g e t th e m o s t correct
listing.
T h e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r m a k e s th e conversion from S E N S O Rc h a n n e l I
to S Y S T E M c h a n n e l b a s e d o n d e fault c o n fig u r a tio n inform a tio n
p r o g r a m m e d in by M a r tin-Decker a t th e tim e o f m a n u factu r e .
T h e r e fo r e , a t th e tim e o f calibration, th e S E N S O Rto S Y S T E M
c h a n n e l a s s i g n m e n ts a r e already d o n e . T h e r e a r e several b e n e fits
to this a p p r o a c h :

1) S p e c trum 1 0 0 0 Display Panels a r e interchangeable.

2) S o ftw a r e is sim p lified.

3) If a S E N S O Rc h a n n e l b e c o m e s d e fective, th e sensor wire c a n b e

c o n n e c te d to a n u n u s e d S E N S O Rc h a n n e l a n d th e reconfig u r a tio n is
d o n e within th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r virtually transparent to th e
Display Panel.

D E S C R IP T IO N 2-30 P R E L IJIIN A R Y R E L E A S E 9 /8 9
+--- --- - ------ --------------+
1 MARTIN-DZKESRTECHIUCALHANDAL I sPEcTRIm 1000 SYSTEn I TulOllI

2.02.15 SERIAL DATA P0RHAT Data is transmitted asynchronously

at 9600 baud, with one stop bit, 8 bits per byte, no parity. The
data is sent as packets, one packet per channel. Martin-Decker
can supply more details regarding the serial data format if
required. In general, a packet consists of the following:
Sync character - OFF hexadecimal ( 1 byte)
Channel number - O-254, (1 byte)
Channel attributes - (2 bytes)
Channel data - (32 bit floating point number or a 7
character ASCII string)
Checksum - (1 byte)
The sync character is used to denote the beginning of a packet.
It "synchronizes" the sender and receiver. The channel number is
the SYSTEM channel number that has been assigned. The attributes
contain information regarding alarm status, keyboard status, data
validity, error codes, etc. The checksum is the numerical *'sum'*
of all the bytes in the packet. It is used for error checking.
The complete specification may be provided for use by customers :
in attaching the SPECTRUM 1000 Data Acquisition System to other
computing equipment.

B- RELEASE 9/89 2-32 PEEL-Y RIalmmm~eN

+------------------------------- --------------------------+
1 XARTIN-DECKER TECENICAL HANDAL 1 SPETRDH 1000 SYSTR! I TwlOllI
+----------------------------------------- -------+

SECTION 3.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
3.01 GENEEtAL INEQRHATION
3.01.01 IRFFRODDCTION This section describes the theory of opera-
tion of the SPECTRUM 1000 Data Acquisition System. It gives
detailed information about the operation of each module in the
system, and how data flows from beginning to end. This informa-
tion is arranged by subsystem as described in Section 2.0. Each
field replaceable module in the seven subsystems is discussed
individually. The normal mode of operation is presented for each
module, as well as typical input and output parameters and avail-
able test points. All the information presented is the latest
available at the time of this printing. Contact Martin-Decker for
the latest information about a particular module if the details
shown here do not agree.
3.01.02 BMKGROCJND This section is very specialized and it de- Yt
scribes each module in great detail. It is intended for the -
technician that has a background of experience with electronic
systems and theory. To master this section, a working knowledge
of the SPECTRUM 1000 Data Acquisition System and its components,
along with a thorough understanding of overall system operation
is required.

Any uuqualified attempt to repair the system can result

in damage to the equimnt. An understanding of this
section is not required to troubleshoot and repair rest
field failures. This section is presented only as an
aid in advanced troubleshooting and solving uncoIy)n
problems. For norm1 troubleshooting procedures and
repairs, refer to Section 4.0.
3.02 TBEOQY OF OPmm!rIOH
3.02.01 SUBSYSTRlS There are seven major subsystems contained in
a typical SPECTRUM 1000 Data Acquisition System and each of
these subsystems is made up of several interconnected modules or
boards. Table 3.1 lists the modules and Martin-Decker part
numbers in each subsystem. Refer to this list when ordering
replacement or spare parts for the SPECTRUM 1000 Data Acquisi-
tion System. Table 3.2 lists miscellaneous parts that are not
specifically modules, but are common field replacement parts.

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 3-l Y!EmRYoPoPmA!l!IoH

+-------------------------------------------------------------------*
1 HARTIN-DECKERTECEIdICALHiWDAL I SPZTRDH 1000 SYST= 1 RJlOllI

+ --------------------------------------------------------------+
SUBSYSTEM PART NUMBER PART NAME
-m----------e --------w---w- ---------------------------------
AC/DC POWER H10578B AC LINE REGULATOR
MODULES H11059A AC POWER PANEL
H11070A-SERIES DC POWER SUPPLY
PCB293A SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
PCB291A-SERIES SENSOR TRP MODULE
PCB296A-SERIES TRP POWER MODULE
H12054A-SERIES INTRINSICALLY SAFE POWER SUPPLY
------------- -------------- ---------------------------------
ANALOG SENSOR PCB291A-SERIES SENSOR TRP MODULE
INPUT MODULES PCB275A AMPLIFYING/MULTIPLEXING BOARD
PCB282A ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER BOARD
--------e-m-- ---w--w------- ---------------------------------
PULSE SENSOR PCB291A-SERIES SENSOR TRP MODULE
INPUT MODULES PCB270A PULSE INPUT BOARD
PCB338A-SERIES ENCODER INTERFACE BOARD
------------- mma----------- ---------------------------------
COMPUTING PCB327A-02 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT BOARD
MODULES PCB326A CENTRAL PROCESSOR INTERFACE BOARD
H10980A HAND HELD MAINTENANCE TERMINAL
PCB309A MATH AND ACTIVE TERMINATION BOARD
PCB328A-02 REAL TIME CLOCK BOARD
------------- ---s--w------- ---------------------------------
COMMUNICATION PCB341A-02 DUAL SERIAL INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD
OUTPUT PCB313A CURRENT LOOP CONTROL TRP BOARD
MODULES PCB340A-01 RS232 TRP BOARD
PCB290A CURRENT LOOP TRP BOARD
H12010A ISMI MASTER MODULE
H12009A ISMI SLAVE MODULE
PCB295A DISPLAY CONTROLLER BOARD
PCB287A DISPLAY BOARD - VERTICAL
PCB288A-02 DISPLAY BOARD - HORIZONTAL
PCB289A DISPLAY BOARD - CIRCULAR METER
H11062A KEYPAD MODULE
------------- -------------- ---------------------------------
RELAY/ALARM PCB266A RELAY BOARD
OUTPUT MODULE HlZlZOA-SERIES RAILMOUNT RELAY
B-B---------- -------------- ---------------------------------
ANALOG OUTPUT PCB343A-SERIES DIGITAL TO ANALOG CONVERTER BOARD
MODULES PCB344A ANALOG OUTPUT TERMINATION BOARD
Table 3.1: Field Replacement Module List
.

-Y OF OPELuTIohI 3-2 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

+---------------------------------------------------------------+
1 HARTIN-DECKER TECENICAL MiNDAL I SPEcTRrn 1000 SYsTm I TmOllI

PART NUMBER PART NAME PART OF

-------------- ------------------------------------- .---------
A11247A HEATSINK, POWER SUPPLY H12056A
A11377A HEATSINK, TOP H12056A
H10555A JUMPER, 0.1" SPACING H12056A
H10955A-SERIES EPROM SET, ADC PCB282A
H11061A-SERIES EPROM SET, SIGNAL CONDITIONER CPU H12056A
HllOgOA-SERIES EPROM SET, DISPLAY CONTROLLER H12055A
H12037A-SERIES EPROM SET, PIB PCB270A
H12072A-01 TRANSIENT PROTECTOR, AC INPUT, 125VAC H11059A
H12082A FAN, 12VDC H12056A
H12083A-06 FLAT CABLE TERMINATION MODULE, 34 PIN H12056A
H12085A SWITCH, 15A, 125VAC H11059A
H12120A-03 RELAY, RAILMOUNT, 24VDC, DPDT H12056A
H12284A-01 FUSE, 2 AMP SPECIAL FOR H12054A-02115 H12054A
H1507A-25 FUSE, 3 AMP SLO-BLOW, 3AG H11059A
KT1098A HAND HELD TERMINAL KIT H12056A
KT1121A-01 W IRE HARNESS AND CABLE KIT, SCU H12056A
KT1122A-01 GASKET KIT, SCU H12056A
KT1123A-01 GASKET KIT, DISPLAY PANEL H12055A
PCB345A TRP MOTHERBOARDASSEMBLY H12056A
PCB353A CARD RACK, STD BUS, 16 SLOT H12056A
Table 3.2: Common Field Replacement Parts List
3.03 AC/DC Pmm NODULES The AC/DC POWER MODULES subsystem
supplies regulated filtered surge protected DC power to all the
other subsystems within the Spectrum 1000 data acquisition sys-
tem. The power subsystem is composed of seven sections. They
are:
t AC Line Regulator (Optional)
t AC Power Panel
1
DC Power Supply
t Sensor Power Supply
t Sensor TRP Module
1
TRP Power Module
b
Intrinsically Safe Power Supply
Figure 3.1 depicts the power structure within the Spectrum 1000.

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 3-3 TUEORY OF OP=TICMJ

+----------------------------------- ---------------------+
1 HARTIN-DEcIcERTECHNICALWWUAL 1 sPEcTRlJn 1000 SYsTml I !mOllI
+------------------------------------ B-S-----------------+

TRP SENSOF PULSE

4 SENSORS
!ziii%E

ANALOG
SENSIIRS
PCB291kSERfES 4

\
TRP POWER ANALOG
MODULES OUTPUT
PCB296A-SERIES

I
\

SENSOR
PWRx>gJPLY
I I

AC
INPUT DC POWER CARD RACK
SUPPLY POWER
Hllo7oA-SERIES

1 w

AC LINE AC PUWER EXTERNAL

REG;UL&TOR 4 PkikL * BATTERY

\ t
IS, PDWER DISPLAY
SUPPLY
klZOS4kSERIES
PANEL

Figure 3.1: System Power - Block Diagram

THKXZY OF OPERATION 3-4 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

+-------------------------------------------------------------+
1 MARTIN-DEKERTECRRICALHARUAL 1 SPETRtJH 1000 SYSTRI I TulOll~
. .

3.03.01 AC LINE REGULA!l!C#R The AC LINE REGULATOR ASSEMBLY pro-

vides protection from voltage transients and AC line fluctua-
tions. also provides
It isolation from the AC generating
source. The LINE REGULATOR is divided into two sections. They
are the LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM (H10800A) and the LINE
VOLTAGE REGULATOR (H10664A). These modules are not field re-
pairable.
3.03.01.01 AC LIGRTNING PROTECTION SY- The lighting protec-
tion system provides multistage transient voltage surge suppres-
sion. It has a maximum surge current rating of 10,000 amps and
can handle up to 2,000 joules of energy. The protection system
has multiple stages. Figure 3.2 displays a block diagram of
those stages. In addition to the transient suppression, the AC
protection system also provides EM/RF1 filtering. It provides
70 db of normal mode noise rejection from 10 Khz to 100 Mhz. It
also provides 70 db of common mode noise rejection from 50 Khz
to 100 Mhz. The system will handle a maximum of 15 Amps steady
state AC current at 120 Volts.

1 SERIES I

w qu CONTROL

ELEMENT

-7
7

HIGH TRANSIENT
NETWORK NETWORK

ENERGY ENERGY
f ILTER
FILTER

DISSIPATOR PROTECTOR
1 I

TRANSIENT
1
ENERGY

PROTECTOR

/ SERIES
/ 1 1 A
t Nl
CONTROL
\

1 ELEMENT ] -

Figure 3.2: AC Lighting Protection System - Block Diagram

PRELxnImRY RELEASE 9/89 3-5 TRBORY OF OPlwATION

+------------------------------------------------------------+
1 HARTIN-DEXER TECENICAL HANDAL 1 SPECTRDX 1000 SYST= 1 TUlOllI

Figure 3.3: AC Lighting Protection System

3.03.01.02 LINE VOLTAGE mm The LINE VOLTAGE REGULATOR
provides instantaneous voltage regulation and isolation from
both normal and common mode noise. It also provides transient
protection and overvoltage/undervoltage protection. The line
regulator will maintain the nominal output voltage (120 VAC or
220 VAC) within 3% with an input variation of up to +-15%. The
output waveform is sinusoidal and contains less than 3% harmonic
distortion. It provides 120 db of common mode noise rejection
and 60 db of normal mode noise rejection. The unit can supply a
maximum of 1 KVA of power (8.34 amps at 120 V).

TEBORY OF OPERATION 3-6 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

+---------------------------------------------------------------*
1 HARTIN-DW TECHNICAL MANUAL 1 SPECTRUH 1000 SYSTEn 1 TUlOllI

AC CAPACITOR

BLACK

RED

RECEPTACLES

Figure 3.4: Line Voltage Regulator - Schematic

Figure 3.5: Line Voltage Regulator

PRELININhRY RELEASE 9/89 3-7 TEXIRYOPOP~TION

+---------------------------------------------------------------+
1 -TIN-DECKER TECENICAL MANDAL I SPECTRUH 1000 SYSTRI I lwlOllI
+--------------------------------------------------------------+

3.03.02 AC POWER PANEL The AC POWER PANEL provides control of

the AC Power for the system. It also provides the means for
connection to the optional external battery system. Included on
the Power Panel is a RF1 filter and a transient voltage surge
suppressor. Figure 3.6 shows the external face of the AC Power
Panel and Figure 3.7 show the internal configuration.
AC Power is brought into the system through connector Jl (H1696-
4P). Reference Figure 3.6. The mating connector for Jl is
Martin-Decker part # H1689-8s. From Jl AC power is routed to
Terminal Block 1 (TBl). See Figure 3.7 for location of TBl.
The AC Line is routed from TBl-1 to the AC Power Switch SWl.
Switch 1 (H12085A) provides on/off power control for the system.
It is a single pole single throw (SPST) switch rated at 15 amps
115 VAC. The other side of the power switch is connected to the
system fuse Fl. Fl provides protection for the system from
excessive current draw. The fuse is a 3 Amp 250 volt slow-blow
type 3AG.

0 0

a
01
0
1
02
3. 0

0
Jl

Figure 3.6: AC Power Panel - External View

=Y OF OPERATIC 3-8 PRRLININARY RELXMB 9/89

+-------------------------,,,,,,------------,
--------------a-+

I H A R T I N - D E C K E R T IS C E N I C A L ~ I S P E C T R U H1 0 0 0 S Y sTml 1 TulO llI

+ --------------------------------------------------------------+

0 0 0 0

0
TB2

TIP/ ’ +
0

Figure 3 .7 : A C P o w e r P a n e l - In ternal V iew

BAT+

BAT-

GND

AC

ACC

GND

1
POWER SUPPLY
GND

Figure 3 .8 : A C P o w e r P a n e l - W iring Diagram

The A C Line c o n d u c tor rejoins th e A C C o m m o n a n d chassis ground

P R E L IHINARY R E L E A S E 9 /8 9 3-9 T E E O R Y O F O P E R A T IO N
+-------------------------------------------------------------+
1 HARTIN-DEKBR TEZENICAL HANDAL 1 SPEZTRUBI 1000 SYSTEH 1 TUlOllI
+----------------------------------------~ ------------------r------+

conductors and are routed to the transient protector (TPl). TPl

will handle voltage transients with peaks up to 6000 Volts and
3000 Amps. The transient protector is rated at 5 Amps of con-
stant line current. The output of the transient protector is
directed to the RF1 filter (LFl). The RF1 filter stops conduct-
ed radio frequency emissions from the switching power supply
from leaving the system. The filter is rated at 6 Amps at 120
VAC or 4 Amps at 250 VAC with a peak current rating of 18 Amps.
The output of the RF1 filter along with the ground conductor is
routed to the switching power supply terminal strip PSl.
The power panel also provides termination for the optional 24
VDC battery backup. Battery power is brought in on 52 (H1696-
5P) using the connector H1689-9s. Chassis ground (earth) is
provided at connector 52 for a convenient method of grounding a
metal battery box. The conductors from 52 are routed to termi-
nal block 2 (TB2). From TB2-3, the battery ground conductor is
routed to the grounding lug on the power panel. The positive
battery conductor (TB2-1) is routed to the battery on/off switch
(SW2). From SW2 and TB2-2, the battery conductors are routed
with the AC conductors to the power supply terminal block PSl. ‘-
3.03.03 DC POWER SUPPLY The Spectrum 1000 power supply
(H11070A) is a switching supply that provides a maximum of 220
watts of power distributed across four output voltages. The
supply has the following features:
1 Input voltage of 115 or 230 VAC (90-130 or 180-264)
t 50 or 60 Hz.
Overvoltage protection on main output
Fully Regulated Outputs Current Limited and Short
Circuit Protected.
Fully Regulated outputs adjustable
? Semi Regulated Output Total power current limit
t Power Supply Control Interface on Battery Backup board
t Battery Backup (When optional batteries installed)
9
Soft Starting
t All Outputs Isolated and Fully Floating

TEEDRY OF OPELUTION 3-10 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

+---------------------------------------------------------------*
1 HARTIN-DECKER TECHNICAL HANDAL I SPEcTRDn 1000 SYsTlm I TulOllI
.

There is one main output and 3 auxiliaries. Table 3.3 describes

the different output voltages.
OUTPUT VOLTAGES CURRENT REGULATION WHERE USED
MAIN +5 VDC 25 AMPS FR All Modules
AUXl +12 VDC 6 AMPS SR TRPS
AUX2 +12 VDC 4 AMPS FR ALL Modules
AUX3 -12 VDC 1AMP FR comm.

Table 3.3: DC Power Supply Output Voltages

The power supply receives AC power at TB2 as shown in Figure
3.9. The AC Line is connected to TB2-1 and AC common is con-
nected to TB2-2. Chassis ground comes in on Pin 3. The conduc-
tors for the optional batteries are connected to the power
supply at pins TB2-4 and TB2-5. Next to TB2 is the Line voltage:
select jumper. The input voltage can be set to 115 VAC or 220 .
VAC by rotating the jumper tab 180 degrees. The voltage setting
that can be read on the jumper tab after it is inserted in its
slot is the current setting for the power supply. TB2-1 AC Line
input is protected by a 5 Amp 250 Volt fuse (Fl). The AC volt-
age is fed to a full wave bridge rectifier. The DC output of
the rectifier is routed to the switching section of the power
supply which converts high voltage DC to multiple low voltage DC
outputs. These outputs are filtered and regulated. From the
regulators, the DC voltages are routed to the output terminal
block TBl. Reference Figure 3.9 for the configuration of the
terminal block.

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 3-11 -Y OF OPERATION

1 MARTIN-DEKERTECENIcAI;HANDAL I SPBCTRDH 1000 SYsTrn 1 TulOlli
+ --------------m -------------------------------------+
TBl DC RUTPUT

uu~~xxxxxxi5
~=>>323333\
>>mmaaaaaaz
u-lm++ I + I +-I,+0

HEADER J3
R25 R VIEW CC
AUX3 ‘A 13x2 ENLARGED
ADJ, A 1J,

R47
‘BATTERY FLOAT ADJ,
(DO NOT ADJUST>
Rll +SV ADJ,

SETTINGS gg

JUMPER BLOCKS
VIEW BB
FUSE Fl
-5A 250V
SLOWBLDW

AC VOLTAGE
SELECT TAB
\ mpv
L AC VOLTAGE Y VIEW AA
SELECT TAB TB2
BATTERY/AC
INPUT

Figure 3.9: DC Power Supply

TExmYoPoPmtATIm 3-12 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

+------------------------------------------~-----------------+
1 HARTIN-DECKWTECENICALMANDU 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYsTrn I TwlOllI
+-----------------------r--------------------------~------------+

The main output for the power supply is +5 VDC at 25 Amps maxi-
mum. This output is fully regulated (FR) and filtered. The 5
volt DC return is the DC ground reference for the power supply.
There are three auxiliary 12 volt outputs with different current
ratings. These are full floating outputs and their output
polarity is determined by which one of the positive/negative
conductors is tied to the 5 Volt ground terminal. Table 3.3
shows the configuration used by the Spectrum 1000. AUX2 and
AUX3 are fully regulated and will maintain their output voltage
to .5%. AUXl is semi regulated. This means that its output
voltage is referenced to the +5 main output. Its output voltage
will vary up to +/- 5% with the load on itself as well as the
load on the 5 volt main output. The three full regulated out-
puts are adjustable. Reference Figure 3.9 for the locations of
potentiometers Rll, R13, and R25.
With 24 Volt (nominal) batteries, the Spectrum 1000 power supply
provides protection against brownouts and total power loss. The
power supply has specialized transition logic that draws power
from the batteries after the AC line voltage drops below the
minimum voltage necessary to operate the supply. The lower the :
line voltage, the more power taken from the batteries. The
power supply will continue to run until the battery voltage
drops below 20 volts if J5 (see Figure 3.9) on the power supply
is set to the battery low position. The length of time the
power supply will run is dependent on the size of the batteries
and the load on the outputs. If J5 is set in the AC Low posi-
tion, the power supply will continue to run on batteries until
the selected time out period (60 seconds) expires. Then, the
control logic will turn of the power supply.
Installation of the batteries requires that Jumper J5 be placed
in the battery low position. An inline 20 Amp fuse is required
on the battery cables to prevent excessive current draw for an
extended period if the battery connections are accidentally
reversed. The battery back up logic board has a built in bat-
tery charger. With AC line voltage present, the charger
outputs .22 Amps of current until the battery reaches the bat-
tery float voltage of 27.6 volts. The float voltage level is
set at the factory and should not be changed. The minimum
battery size is 2 Amp/hours. The recommended size is 6
Amp/hours. Larger batteries can be installed, but it is recom-
mended that they have their own charging system.
The outputs of the power supply feed the sensor power supply and
the card cage for the STD bus boards. The power supply is not
field repairable.

PRELIMINARY RELEASE 9/89 3-13 TEEORY OF OP=TION

+--------------------------------------------------------------+
1 MARTIN-DECKERTEENICALHUUAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTRI 1 !mlOll~
+-----------------------------------------------------------------+

3.03.04 SENSOR v SUPPLY The sensor power supply (PCB293A)

generates DC Power to drive the SENSOR TRP modules and the TRP
POWER modules. It supplies 30 VDC at up to 1 Amp of current.
It has output short circuit protection and it provides isolation
from the rest of the power system.
Power from the switching power supply arrives on the Sensor
Power Supply PCB at connector 54 (See Figure 3.10 and 3.11).
All the pins at 54 are routed to 55. J5 provides power to the
optional chassis expansion trp motherboard. The regulated +12
and -12 voltages are routed directly from 54-7 and 54-9 to the
TRP motherboard output connector Jl. Semi regulated +12 volts
and ground are routed from 51-3 and Jl-5 to an input power
filter consisting of L2, C5, and C6. These components filter
the input power to the DC/DC converter. Circuit breaker BRKl is
in series with the +12 volt input to the DC/DC converter. It
provides protection to the switching power supply from excessive
current draw from the DC/DC converter. It is rated at 6 Amps 32
VDC. The circuit breaker has a set of contacts that are closed
when the circuit breaker has been tripped. LED CR2 is connected
to the fault side of the circuit breaker. When the breaker has -:
tripped, CR2 indicates a system fault.
Filtered power is fed into a DC/DC converter PSl (See Figure
3.11). The PSl inputs semi-regulated +12 VDC and outputs regu-
lated 30 VDC. The 30 volt output is used to supply the voltages
necessary to drive a wide assortment of sensor assemblies. PSl
also provides isolation of the sensor power from the rest of the
system power. The 30 volt output of PSl passes through a sec-
ondary filter composed of C7, C3, C4, Ll, C2, and Cl. Sensor
power leaves the circuit board via connector Jl. Jl is connect-
ed to the TRP motherboard.
LED CR1 is tied in parallel with the 30 volt output and provides
indication that power is available.
The semi-regulated +12 volts and ground are also routed from J4
to 52 on the sensor power supply circuit board. 52 provides
power to the fan assembly. There are six test points incorpo-
rated on the sensor power supply board. Table 3.4 lists the
test points and the voltages for each point.

THEORY OF OPHtATIOU 3-14 PRELIHIlilMY RELEASE 9/89

+---------------------------------------------------------------*
1 MARTIN-DEICER TECHNICAL HANDAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTm 1 TUlOllI
+--------------------------------------------------------------*

TEST POINT COLOR OUTPUT

TPl BLACK GROUND
TP2 RED +30 VOLTS
TP3 YELLOW -12 VOLTS
TP4 ORANGE +12 VOLTS (SR)
TP5 BLACK +30 VOLTS RETURN
TP6 ORANGE +12 VOLTS (SR PROTECTED)
Table 3.4: Sensor Power Supply Test Points

PSl

Figure 3.10: Sensor Power Supply

PRELInINARY NELEASE 9/89 3-15

 i MARTIN-DEKER TECHNICAL HANDAL 1 SPECTRUM 1000 SYSTEM I m0lli
+----------S-----------W ----------------------------+

J2

J3

-12v

Cii
CUP! Jl
+12v
-12v
+12v
+12 VSR +3ov
con
GND
30V RET.

TBl

Figure 3.11: Sensor Power Supply - Schematic

TEEORY OF OPmTION 3-16 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

+------------------------------------------------------------+
1 HARTIN-DEKER TECHNICAL MANUAL 1 SPEETRDH 1000 SYSTEn 1 'JWlOll~
+------------------------------------------------------------+

3.03.05 SENSOR TRP HWULE The Sensor TRP Modules (PCB291A-X)

(regulator section) supply regulated, current limited voltages
of various levels for sensor excitation. The dash number of
PCB291A determines what the excitation voltage is. Table 3.5
lists the different dash number TRPs that have regulators and
their respective output voltages. All regulator TRPs are cur-
rent limited at 60 mAmps.
PCB2921A- OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1 +24 VOLTS
2 +12 VOLTS
3 +lO VOLTS
4 + 5 VOLTS
5 +12 VOLTS
8 +12 VOLTS
Table 3.5: Sensor TRP Excitation Voltages

IA TP4 I -

SENSORTRANSIENT
PROTECTIDN BOARD
PCB291A-SERIES

Figure 3.12: Transient Protector (TRP) - Block Diagram

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 3-17 THEORY OF OP=TIoW

+---------------------------------------------------------------*
1 MARTIN-DEKERTECHHICALHANUU, 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTml I mlo11I

+,, &, TRANSIENT PROTECTION, MULTI PURPOSE-

:Y NO PCB291A

CR5

R7 a

0
CZi
I I I””

MADE IN USA

MARTIN DECKER CEDAR PARK, TX !$

Figure 3.13: Transient Protector (TRP)

TRPs (TRansient Protectors) PCB291A-1 through -4 supply excita-
tion voltages for analog sensors. TRPs -5 and -8 supply excita-
tion for current sink and current source type switch transduc-
ers.
The different TRPs regulators supply different voltages, but the
theory of operation is the same for all of them. Figure 3.12
shows a block diagram for the basic configuration for all of the
TRPs. Figure 3.13 shows a -1 TRP. Regulated 30 VDC from the
sensor power supply is routed through the TRP motherboard to the
TRPs through connector Pl on the TRP. The input power is fil-
tered by a dual inductor in series and two capacitors in paral-
lel with the 30 volt input. A fuse is included on the +30 volt
line for protection against excessive current draw. The fuse is
rated at 125 mAmps 125 volts. The 30 VDC is then passed to the
regulator section. The regulator is the same for all the TRPs
that output excitation voltages. The difference between the
different TRPs is in the ohmic values of the resistors that

THEORY OF OPERATION 3-18 PRELININARY NELEASE 9/89

+-----------------------------------------~--------------------+
1 HARTIN-DECKERTECENICALHANUAL 1 SPECTRtJH 1000 SYSTEn 1 !MlOllI
+-----------------------------------------------------~-------+

determine the output voltage of the IC regulator. The voltage

selected is based upon the sensor attached to that TRP. All of
the TRP outputs are current limited at 60 mAmps. There is an
LED attached to the output of the regulator. It is used as an
indicator that the TRP is providing excitation to the sensor.
The LED is mounted on outside card edge of the PCB for ease of
viewing (See Figure 3.13). The output of the regulator is
protected from voltage transients by a transient voltage sup-
pressor diode. Voltage spikes are shunted to ground when they
exceed the rating of the diode. Diode voltages are based on the
dash number of the TRP;
After the voltage suppressor, a series resistor is included in
the 30 volt output. This resistor provides current limiting in
the 30 volt output. A bypass jumper is provided (see Figure
3.12) if the extra voltage drop is not needed. The most common
usage of this resistor would be when safety barriers are not
installed in the sensor power circuit. The final stage is a low
pass filter which attenuates EMI/RFI interference entering the
system through the sensor excitation conductors. The output of
the power section of the TRP is routed to a terminal block on !
the TRP motherboard for connection to a sensor.
The TRPs provide multiple test points for troubleshooting of
possible problems. These test points are brought out to the
edge of the TRP for ease of access. Five of the test points
deal with the TRP regulator section. Table 3.6 lists the test
points that are part of the regulator section. Reference Table
3.5 to find the voltage that will be read at TP2/TP6.
TEST POINT COLOR OUTPUT
TP5 ORANGE +30 VOLTS INPUT
TPl BLACK +30 VOLTS RETURN
TP9 ORANGE +30 VOLTS PROTECTED
TP2 BLACK + SENSOR POWER
TP6 GREEN - SENSOR POWER RETURN
Table 3.6: TRP Voltage Regula",3r Test Points

PRELIHINARY RELEASE 9/89 3-19 THXIRY OF OPERATION

+---------------------------------------------------------------*
1 HARTIN-D~TEHI!4ICALHANDAL 1 SPECTRDIY 1000 SYsTlw 1 Tw1011~
+w----- ------------------- --------------------------------+

3.03.06 TRP Poww - TRPs that supply sensor excitation can

source up to a maximum of 60 mAmps of current. A practical
maximum for continuous operating current is 50 mAmps. This pro-
vides sufficient power for most sensors. There are a few sen-
sors that require more power than this. The TRP Power Module
(PCB296A) was designed to provide power for sensors with re-
quirements greater than 50 mAmps. The -01 provides +12 volts at
a maximum of 470 mAmps of current. The -02 provides +24 volts
at a maximum of 230 mAmps of current. Both models are identical
in operation. The only difference between them is the DC/DC
converter PSl (Reference Figure 3.14).
Regulated +12 volts is routed from the TRP motherboard to an
inductive/capacitive filter on the TRP Power Module. This
section provides additional power filtering for the DC/DC con-
verter PSl. PSl provides voltage conversion and power isolation
of the sensor power from the system power. The output of PSl is
fed to a voltage suppression diode network. This network pro-
vides protection from voltage spikes which could damage the
DC/DC converter. The final section on the TRP Power Module is
an inductive/capacitive filter for the output power. It filters,
the sensor excitation voltage.
The TRP Power Module has four test points on the PCB. Table 3.7
lists the test points and their corresponding voltages. The
test points are mounted on the edge of the PCB for accessibility
during troubleshooting.
TEST POINT COLOR OUTPUT
TP2 ORANGE +12 VOLTS INPUT
TP4 BLACK +12 VOLTS RETURN
TPl BLACK + SENSOR POWER
TP3 GREEN - SENSOR POWER RETURN
Table 3.7: TRP Power Module Test Points
The TRP Power Module can be inserted in any spare TRP position.

TEEORY OF OPEStATIoIJ 3-20 PRELIHIMRY RELEASE 9/89

 +---------------------------------------- -----------------------+
1 HARTIN-DECKER TECElNICAL HANDAL 1 SPECTRDI'I 1000 SYSTBZ4 1 TUlOllI

, , Q TP2 - TPl
I m*Y Pl
B13
l-l
PSl

CUM Pl

Figure 3.14: TRP Power Module - Block Diagram

Pl
cl c2
l
TRANSIENT PROTECTION POWER MODULE
ASSY NO PCB296A P

6 00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
il 00

T
0 0
0 0
0
lo PSl

MARTIN DECKER
L2yJqg 0 QJ CEDAR PARK, TX cn5

C6 C; SERIAL NO, m ‘
MADE IN USA

Figure 3.15: TRP Power Module

PRELIHINARY RELEASE 9/89 3-21 THEORY OF OPgBATION

+--------------------------------------- ---------a-------+

1 H A E t T I N - D E ~ C B R T E C H N I C A L H A N ~ J A L 1 S P E C T R D H1 0 0 0 S Y S T r n I W lO llI
+ ------------------------------------------ --------------------+

3 .0 3 .0 7 INTRINSICAUY S A F E F O U E R S D P P L Y T h e In trinsically S a fe
Power S u p p l y (IS P S ) ( H 1 2 0 5 4 A - 0 2 1 1 5 ) is a linear p o w e r supply
th a t provides p o w e r to th e S p e c trum 1 0 0 0 Display P a n e l . It d o e s
so by lim iting th e m a x i m u m a m o u n t o f p o w e r delivered to th e
Display Panel. T h e supply runs o n 1 1 5 V A C ( 2 3 0 V A C o p tional)
a n d its m a x i m u m o u tp u t ratin g s a r e 1 2 .6 V D C a t 0 A m p s a n d 1 .2
A m p s a t 0 volts. T h e actual voltage delivered to th e l o a d is
d e p e n d e n t u p o n th e current r e q u i r e m e n ts o f th e l o a d . Figure
3 .1 6 s h o w s th e voltage to current relationship o f th e p o w e r
supply. T h e S p e c trum 1 0 0 0 display with 1 0 display b o a r d s draws
a p p r o x i m a tely 2 7 0 m A m p s o f current from th e IS P S . W ith this
l o a d , th e o u tp u t voltage o f th e IS P S is nominally 8 .3 volts.
F e w e r display b o a r d s d r a w less current with a corresponding rise
in o u tp u t voltage.
T h e IS P S is a B A S E E F A certified ( B A S # E x 8 2 2 3 7 2 ) intrinsically
safe p o w e r supply a n d is n o t field repairable. A n y a tte m p t to
repair or alter th e p o w e r supply in a n y fashion will invalidate
th e B A S E E F A certification.

Vdts

Figure 3 .1 6 : IS P S V o lta g e /Current Curve

T h e IS P h a s a fu s e m o u n te d internally. ,This ite m c a n b e re-
placed in th e field. H o w e v e r , th e fu s e is specially designed
a n d p a r t o f th e B A S E E F A certification. U s e o f a n y fu s e o th e r
th a n H 1 2 2 8 4 A - 0 1 will invalidate th e B A S E E F A certification and
r e m o v e th e i*ntrinsic safe ty capability o f th e p o w e r supply.
W A R N ING : R e p l a c e fu s e with M /D H 1 2 2 8 4 A - 0 1 only.

T E E D R Y O F O P W T IO N 3-22 P R E L IHIX A R Y R E L E W S R9 /8 9
1 HARTIN-DECKRFtTECEBIICALHABXUm 1 SPY= 1000 SYSTT# 1 tt5iil0lli
+---------------------------~--- -------------------------a--e--+

Figure 3.17: Intrinsically Safe Power Supplv

r----

/ \
- ISDLATEDLINEAR - DC OUTPUT
POWERSUPPLY OVERVDLTAG
WITH TRANSFORMER,
TRANSFORMER, PROTECTION
INPUT 1 f’R”$i;IoN RECTIFIER,AND AND CURRENT
NEUTRAL b OUTPUTFILTERING-
- OUTPUT LIMITING

w I
SAFETY L
EARTH =
INTRINSICALLY SAFE
POWER SUPPLY
Imm--- (ISPS> H12054kSERIES J

r.igure 3.18: Intrinsically Safe Power - Block Diagram

PRxLInImRY RELFiASB 9/89 3-23 THWRY OF OP=TION

 +--------------------------------------------------------------------*
1 HARTIN-DEKER TECHNICAL HANUAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTEn 1 TUlOllI

3.04 ANALOG SENSOR INPDT MODULES The analog input modules take
the voltage or current output of analog sensors and convert that
information into engineering units for display. The basic
functions provided by these modules are as follows:
t Transient voltage protection
t Input voltage/current selection
t Signal amplification and filtering
? Data channel selection
1
Analog to Digital Conversion
Raw Data to Engineering Units Conversion
i Post Processing of Data
There are three distinct modules in the analog signal path.
They are the Sensor TRP module, the AMP/MUX module, and ADC
module. Each module is described in the following sections. 1
3.04.01 SENSOR TRP mDDLE The analog TRP modules (PCB291A-1
through -4) provide transient voltage protection for the AMP/MUX
pcb. Figure 3.12 shows a block diagram of the analog signal
path through the TRP. The first stage the signal passes through
is a low pass filter that attenuates EM/RF1 interference. The
next section contains 3 jumpers used for testing and grounding.
Jumper F connects power return to the signal return. This
jumper is normally used for 2 or 3 wire sensors that do not have
separate power and signal return lines. Jumper B and C are used
for testing purposes. Jumper B shorts the sensor input for a
zero reading and jumper C applies the sensor excitation voltage
to the sensor signal line.
CAUTION: The dash one and two TRPs have excitations
voltages greater than the
10 volt signal input
range. Jumper C should never be installed on these
TRPs.
The next section contains two voltage dropping/current limiting
resistors with bypass jumpers. These resistors are normally
employed when safety barriers are not installed. They will
limit the current in the event of a short circuit. They may
reduce the voltage seen at the AMP/MUX board. The next stage
contains a transient voltage suppressor diode network. This
network protects the input amplifier from voltage levels which
could damage or destroy the amplifier. They do this by shunting
any voltage greater than their rating to ground. The final
section, the optional source to sink converter, does not pertain
to analog inputs and is not included on any analog TRPs. Solder

TEEORY OF OPERATICM 3-24 PRELIHINARY RELEASE 9/89

+------------------------------------------------------------+
1 HARTIBI-DHXCERTECBUCALHANDAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTEn 1 TWlOllI
+--------------------------------------------------------------+

bridge SB2 must be shorted on the analog TRPs to complete the

analog signal path. The output of the analog TRP is fed through
the TRP motherboard to the AMP/MUX pcb.
There are four test points available for measuring sensor input
voltage and the voltage output to the AMP/MUX board. The two
voltage readings will be identical unless the jumpers A and E
are not installed. The current limiting resistors will have a
voltage drop across them if they are not bypassed.
TEST POINT COLOR SIGNALS
TP8 WHITE + SENSOR INPUT
TP4 RED - SENSOR RETURN
TP3 BLUE + AMP/MUX OUTPUT
TP7 GRAY - AMP/MUX RETURN
Table 3.8: ADC TRP Sensor Input Test Points
3.04.02 AUPLIl?YI~/l4ULTIPLEXING B0ARD The AMPlifying/MUltipleX-
ing (AMP/MUX) board (PCB275A) buffers and filters up to sixteen
analog sensors, then selectively switches one of the sixteen
sensor signals to the ADC board. The signal connected is deter-
mined by the ADC board. The main features of the board are:
Bipolar operation (Input voltage range -1Ovdc to +lOvdc)
Precision resistors convert Current Inputs to Voltages
Jumper selectable gains of 1, 10, and 100
Low pass filter for each signal
Sensor connection in multiples of sixteen
High speed multiplexing between signals
1 Buffered output
Addressing for up to sixteen boards in a system.
The AMP/MUX board is primarily a "one-of-sixteen" switch that is
under the control of the ADC board. A typical AMP/MUX board
assembly is shown in Figure 3.19 and Figure 3.20 shows a block
diagram of the AMP/MUX board.

PRELIHIMY RELMSE 9/89 3-25 TBEORY OF OPERATION

+------------------------------------------ ------a------------+

1 HARTIN-DEKKRTECENICALHANDAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYsTEn I 3mlOll~

+----------~------~ -------me---------- -------------------+

r -- Figure 3.19:
JUMPER SELECTABLE
INSTRUKNTATION
GAIN”
AMP
--m
AMP/MUX Board Assembly
PASS
FILTER
1 OF 16
MULTIPLEXER

, ‘INPUT: 1

‘I,,,) e 5 OUTPUT
BUFFER
I
t
I TYPICAL FUR ALL .I
I SIXTEEN INPUTS .I

ENABLE

L AMPLIFIER/MULTIPLEXER
BOARD (AMP/MUX>
PCB275A
.

ADC ADC

Figure 3.20: AMP/MUX Board Block Diagram

THBDEtY OF OP=TICBl 3-26 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

+--------------------------------------------------------------*
1 HARTIN-DEKER TECHNICAL HANDAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTEM 1 TUlOllI
+---I--------------------------------------------------------+

Each analog sensor signal is connected to one of the sixteen

JUMPER SELECTABLE GAIN INSTRUMENTATION AMPS. These low noise
amps have jumper selectable gains of 1, 10, and 100 and appear
to the sensor as a 50,000 ohm load. If the sensor signal is a
current loop, the 244 ohm precision resistor converts the cur-
rent signal to a proportional voltage. The output voltage from
the INSTRUMENTATION AMP passes through a LOW PASS FILTER to
remove any high frequency noise, then is applied to one input on
the 1 OF 16 MULTIPLEXER. The multiplexer is ENABLED by the ADC
through the four ADDRESS lines, then one of the sixteen sensor
signals is selected by the four CONTROL lines. The selected
sensor signal is applied to the OUTPUT BUFFER then to the ADC.
The gain of the INSTRUMENTATION AMPS is normally set to 1, so
that the incoming voltages are equal to the output voltages. In
certain cases higher gains are desirable and these can be se-
lected using jumpers. Higher gains are most common when using
unbuffered strain bridges or T/C junctions. More common is the
use of a current signal from sensors rather than voltage. These
current signals are usually 4 to 20mA. If the jumper connecting 1
the 244 ohm resistor is installed, the 4-20mA sensor signal will-'
be converted to approximately 1 to Svdc. This voltage level is
then passed on into the ADC subsystem.
Failures on the AMP/MUX board will most likely occur at the
INSTRUMENTATION AMPS. Since these amps are the first electronic
devices encountered as a sensor signal enters, they are subject-
ed to the most abuse. The SENSOR TRP boards protect the INSTRU-
MENTATION AMPS from overvoltage during normal and abnormal
situations, but they must endure all offset voltages and with-
stand some transients. The best way to locate a failure in the
AMP/MUX board is to move the sensor wiring and SENSOR TRP to an
unused input and retest it. Make sure the 244 ohm jumper is
installed if required. Recalibrate the sensor then check it for
operation. If the sensor signal begins operating correctly, the
INSTRUMENTATION AMP may have failed. If so, replace the AMP/MUX
board and return the sensor and TRP to their original position.
The AMP/MUX boards are installed in the STD Bus card cage inside
the Signal Conditioner enclosure and connected to the ADC and
TRP Motherboard. One ADC can support up to four AMP/MUX boards,
but due to size limitation, one TRP Motherboard can only support
two AMP/MUX boards (32 sensors). If a Signal Conditioner chassis
extension is installed, another TRP Motherboard can be installed
along with two more AMP/MUX boards (64 sensors total). All four
are then connected to the ADC. A single 20 conductor ribbon
cable connects all the AMP/MUX boards to the ADC. A standard
system will only have one ADC and two AMP/MUX boards since this
is a full Signal Conditioner enclosure. Each of the AMP/MUX
boards is connected by a 34 conductor ribbon cable to the TRP
Motherboard.

PNELININARY RELEASE 9/89 3-27 -Y OF OPEBATION

i MARTIN-DEK.ERTEENICALHAUML 1 SP=~ 1000 SYSTI# 1 m0lli

No external indicators or switches are on the AMP/MUX boards.

AMP/MUX boards are usually installed in the four rightmost slots
in the STD bus and the cable to the ADC crosses to the left.
Jumpers on the board set the base address for the ADC enable,
connect the 244 ohm resistors in place for current loop sensors,
set the gain on the INSTRUMENTATION AMP, and set the cutoff
frequency of the LOW PASS FILTER. None of these jumpers are
normally changed in the field and all jumpers on a replacement
board should be set to match the board being removed. Refer to
the board assembly and Signal Conditioner drawings for jumper
positions and settings.
3.04.03 AN&I&G 'M DIGITAL CONVERT= B0ARD The Analog to Digital
Converter (ADC) board (PCB282A) converts the input voltage
presented at the single buffered input into a digital form to be
used by the Host computer. The input voltage is supplied by the
AMP/MUX boards. The main features of the board are:
? Microcontroller controlled
t 14 bits of resolution ?
t Bipolar operation (Input voltage range -1Ovdc to +lOvdc)
Dual communication protocol (1 serial port, 1 FIFO port)
1
Nonvolatile RAM to store calibration information.
t Low noise amplifiers provide high signal to noise ratio
Converts raw data into Engineering Units
t Converts raw data into a voltage equivalent
t Highly integrated software for expansion
The ADC board works in conjunction with up to four AMP/MUX
boards and 64 Sensor TRP modules to acquire data from analog
sensors. The ADC onboard microcontroller (8031 MICRO COMPUTER)
selects each sensor voltage on each AMP/MUX sequentially and
converts this voltage into digital counts. A typical ADC board
assembly is shown in Figure 3.21, and Figure 3.22 shows a block
diagram of the ADC board.

TNEORY OF OP~TIOH 3-28 PRELIHINARY RELEASE 9/89

+---------------------------------------------------------------+
1 HARTIN-DECKER TECHNICAL HANDAL 1 SPEZTRDH 1000 SYSTEn 1 mOl1;
+-------------------------------,,,,,,,,---------- -------------+

-.a U6
--
L.

Figure 3.21: ADC Board Assembly

r -

I
SAMPLE ANALOG
AND - / DIGITA
HOLD CONV

I I
,

I ADDRESS AND DATA BU

I \ ii
8031 MICRO FIFO SERIAL
ANALDG TCl BUfFER I/U
COMPUTER
L DIGITAL CONVERTER
BOARD ---(ADC) PCB282A
PORT PORT

*-I

MUX STD BUS HHT

Figure 3.22: ADC Board Block Diagram

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 3-29 THIPORY OF OP-TION

+---------------------------------------------------------------+
1 HARTIN-DEICER TECENICAL HANDAL 1 SPEZTRDH 1000 SYSTPW 1 !lUlOllI
+---------------------------- ---------------------------+

The signal voltage from each sensor is selectively applied at

the input of the UNITY GAIN BUFFER AMP. This amp provides imped-
ance isolation from the multiplexer on the AMP/MUX board. The
output of the UNITY GAIN BUFFER AMP, together with the output
from the CURRENT TO VOLTAGE CONVERTER, are subtracted at the
OFFSET AMP to provide a reference for the PROGRAMMABLEGAIN AMP.
The gain of this amp is set by the 8031 MICRO COMPUTER during
the conversion process. The PROGRAMMABLEGAIN AMP output is
connected to the SAMPLE AND HOLD section which stabilizes and
holds the signal voltage for the ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER
(A/D). The A/D converts the applied voltage into an equivalent
digital counts (RAW). The 8031 reads the RAW counts from the A/D
and processes them according to the program stored in the EPROM
MEMORY. All calibration values as well as temporary program
memory is stored in the NONVOLATILE RAM MEMORY (NVRAM).
To increase the effective resolution of the A/D and provide for
software calibration, the ADC board uses a feedback loop and
multiple conversion passes to calibrate and read a sensor. The
8031 has two controls in the feedback loop. These are the DIGI-
TAL TO ANALOG CONVERTER (D/A) and the PROGRAMMABLEGAIN AMP. The:
8031 writes a digital number to the D/A. This value is converted
to a proportional current then applied to the CURRENT TO VOLTAGE
CONVERTER. The resulting output voltage offsets the incoming
sensor voltage, allowing the ADC to null out any unwanted volt-
ages. The remaining voltage is adjusted using the PROGRAMMABLE
GAIN AMP to set the proper level at the SAMPLE AND HOLD. This
nulling and adjustable gain ability expands the resolution of
the A/D and allows it to read and store the calibration values.
The entire feedback/conversion loop is under program control and
allows the ADC board to be calibrated with software instead of
potentiometers.
The 8031 controls which sensor signal on the AMP/MUX board to
read using eight control lines. Four of these lines ADDRESS
which AMP/MUX board to read, and four lines CONTROL which sensor
to read. Refer to the AMP/MUX section for more information on
how these controls lines work.
The 8031 has two means of digital communications. The first is
through the SERIAL I/O PORT. This port is connected to the
MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION TERMINAL (HHT). The HHT can be used
to read or set (calibrate) any of the values stored for each
sensor. Since calibration using the HHT in ADC MODE is primi-
tive, this connection is normally reserved for troubleshooting.
The second means of communication is through the FIFO BUFFER
PORT. This port interfaces between the 8031 and the 280 Host
computer using the STD BUS. The FIFO buffers the differences in
speed of the two microprocessors and controls the direction of
communication. The Host computer sends commands to the ADC
(8031) through the FIFO. These are processed, then data is
returned to the Host through the FIFO. The Host computer can

-Y OF OPEIuTIm 3-30 PRELININANY RELEASE 9/89

*-------------------------------------------------------------+
1 MARTIN-DECKERTECHNICALHANDAL 1 SPBCTRDH 1000 SYSTE# 1 TWlOllI
+------------------------------------------------------------+

send calibration information for all of the sensors. Since this

is more convenient for the user, the HHT is normally connected
to the Host computer and calibration is done in HOST MODE.
If the Host computer indicates an ADC error (DO1 or FOl on the
HHT), this usually means communications through the FIFO have
failed. This can be due to two things. The first being FIFO
failure and the second being failure of the 8031 or its support-
ing systems. To determine if the 8031 is OK, connect the HHT
directly to the ADC board. The HHT display will power up and
briefly show "ADC MODE" then "ENTER CHN #". This prompt refers
to the physical or sensor channel number. Refer to the supplied
channel list for the available sensor channel numbers. Press the
desired channel number then ENTER. The HHT will prompt "ENTER
TST CODE". Press the "RAW" key. This is the key marked 1 with
the word RAW above it. If the ADC is OK, the HHT will display
the channel number, the word RAW, then the raw counts value for
that channel. The RAW value is the number of counts immediately
after the conversion at the A/D. If the RAW value is displayed
and changing, the 8031 is OK and the FIFO has probably failed. y
The ADC board should be replaced. If the 8031 has failed, the '
HHT display will freeze for a few seconds then display "NO ADC
RESPONSE". This indicates a failure in the 8031 or its support-
ing sections. The ADC board should also be replaced in this
case.
The HHT, when connected to the ADC, also provides the means for
viewing the calibration settings, viewing the Engineering Unit
value being sent to the Host computer, and viewing the approxi-
mate incoming voltage from the sensor. Each of these displays
results from pressing keys 2 through 5 on the HHT.
The ADC Board is installed in the STD Bus card cage inside the
Signal Conditioner enclosure and connected to the AMP/MUX ribbon
cable. Power for the ADC board is supplied by the STD Bus and
most communications are through this bus. External connections
are the 20 conductor ribbon cable to the AMP/MUX boards, and the
RJll connector to the HHT. The ADC board does not have any
indicators or switches on it. The ADC board is part of the
interrupt daisy chain and usually sits in the third card slot to
the left of the CPU.
Jumpers on the ADC board allow selection of ADCl or ADCZ, deter-
mine the priority in the interrupt chain, and select the type of
memory on the board. None of these jumpers are normally changed
in the field and all jumpers on a replacement board should be
set to match the board being removed. Refer to the board assem-
bly and Signal Conditioner drawings for jumper positions and
settings.

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 3-31 -Y OF OPgRATION

+---------.-----------------------------------------------------+
IHARTIN-DBCKERTlZCHNICAL~ I SPIXTRDH 1000 SYSTlm I THlOllI
+-------------------------------------------------------------*

3.05 PULSE SENSOR INPDT HODOLES The pulse input modules take
the output of pulse sensors and convert that information into
engineering units for display. The basic functions provided by
these modules are as follows:
Transient voltage protection
Switch, Current sink/source sensor inputs
Source to Drain current conversion
Opt0 Coupler isolation
Switch debounce
Pulse Rate computation
Raw Data to Engineering Units Conversion
Post Processing of Data
There are two distinct modules in the pulse signal path. They
are the Sensor TRP module and the PIB module. Each module is
described in the following sections.
3.05.01 SEWOR TRP HODDLE The Pulse Input TRP modules (PCB291A-
5 through -8) provide transient voltage protection for the PIB
pulse inputs. Figure 3.12 shows a block diagram of the sensor
signal path. The first stage the signal passes through is a low
pass filter that attenuates EMI/RFI interference. The next
section (-5 and -8 TRPs only) contains 3 jumpers used for test-
ing and grounding. Jumper F connects power return to the signal
return. This jumper is normally used for 2 or 3 wire sensors
that do not have separate power and signal return lines. Jumper
B is used for testing purposes. Jumper B shorts the sensor
input to simulate a switch closure. Jumper C should never be
used. This would connect the sensor excitation voltage to the
PIB source voltage. Damage could occur to the PIB and the TRP.

CAUTION: Jumper C should never be installed on the -5

and -8 TRPs. Damage to the PIB and the TRP could
occur.
The next section contains two voltage dropping/current limiting
resistors with bypass jumpers. These resistors are normally
bypassed for pulse input TRPS. The next stage contains a tran-
sient voltage suppressor diode network. This network protects
the input opto-coupler on the PIB from voltage spikes which
could damage or destroy the opto-coupler. They do this by
shunting any voltage greater than their rating to ground. The
final section, the source to sink converter is included on -7

-Y OF OPEBATIolJ 3-32 PRELININARY NELPASE 9/89

+--------------------------------------------------------------*
1 MARTIN-DEKERTXZHMICALMAtWAL 1 SPEZTRDH 1000 SYST~ I RJlOll(
+---------------------------------------------------------*

and -8 TRPS. The PIB normally sources current through the TRPs
to the sensors. When the TRP is connected to a switch or a
current sink sensor, this works fine. PNP sensors want to
source current also. Therefore, their outputs must be converted
from source to sink devices. Solder bridge SB2 is opened on the
TRP and solder bridge SBl is closed. This breaks the connection
between the two current sources (PIB and PNP sensor). The
output of the sensor is fed to the base of the converter tran-
sistor. The output of the PIB is fed to the collector. When
the sensor is on, it sources current to the base of the convert-
er which turns it on. The converter then sinks current to
ground which constitutes an ON state for the PIB and satisfies
its requirements. The output of the pulse TRP is fed through
the TRP motherboard to the PIB pcb.
There are four test points available for measuring sensor input
voltage and the voltage output to the PIB board. The two volt-
age readings will be identical on the -5 and -6 TRPs unless the
jumpers A and E are not installed. The current limiting resis-
tors will have a voltage drop across them if they are not by-
passed. On the -7 and -8 TRPs with the source to sink current
converter, TP8 and TP4 monitor the voltage coming from the
sensor and TP3 and TP7 monitor the voltage from the PIB.
TEST POINT COLOR SIGNALS
TP8 WHITE + SENSOR INPUT
TP4 RED - SENSOR RETURN
TP3 BLUE + PIB OUTPUT
TP7 GRAY - PIB RETURN

Table 3.9: PIB TRP Sensor Input Test Points

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 3-33 THEORY OF OPERATION

+--------------------------------------------------------------*
1 W IN-DECKER TECHNICAL HANDAL I SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTEU I lrnlOllI
+--------------------------------------------------------------+

3.05.02 PULSE INPDT BOARD The Pulse Interface board (PIB)

(PCB270A) detects and times incoming pulse (on/off) trains to
generate pulse rates to be used by the Host computer. The input
pulse streams are supplied by the TRPs. The main features of
the board are:
Microcontroller controlled
8 input channels
Opto-isolated
Switch debounce and pulse shaping
Interrupt driven pulse detection
Asynchronous host communications
Nonvolatile RAM to store calibration information.
Converts raw data into Engineering Units
Highly integrated software
The PIB board works in conjunction with up to eight TRP modules
to acquire data from pulse sensors. A typical PIB board assem-
bly is shown in Figure 3.23, and Figure 3.24 shows a block
diagram of the PIB board.
There are 8 identical pulse input circuits on the PIB. The
following circuit description applies to each of those circuits.
A DC/DC converter on the PIB supplies isolated 12 volts DC to
the pulse input opto-isolator. From the opto-isolator, the 12
volts is routed to the pulse TRP for connection to a sensor.
Power return comes from the sensor and through the TRP back to
the DC/DC converter. The DC/DC converter and the opto-isolator
decouple the pulse input from the PIB hardware. This prevents
external noise and transients from being conducted to the PIB
and from there to the Z80 host system. The external
sensor/switch closes the circuit to make current flow or opens
the circuit to stop the current flow. The opto-isolator detects
the current flow (or lack of current) and generates an on/off
output signal. This signal is routed to the pulse debounce
circuit. The debounce circuit prevents switch bounce from
generating false pulse interrupts. The debounce circuit re-
quires a stable input state change for 7 milliseconds before it
generates an output state change.

THEORY OF OPERATION 3-34 PNELININARY RELEASE 9/89

+---------------------------------------~----------------*
1 MARTIN-DZMXCERTECBNICALHUUAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 sy!?J!m 1 TulOllI

PULSE INPUT BOARD

I0 0 ma
1

I
J-

Figure 3.23: PIB Board Assembly

TRP

MAIN DC
POVER SUPPLY

Figure 3.24: PIB Board Block Diagram

PRELIHIM4RY RELEASE 9/89 3-35 TEmEtYoF0PEIuT10#

+------------------------------------------ ---------------+
1 MARTIN-DEKER TJEENICAL HANDAL 1 SPBCTRDH 1000 SYsTEn I !mn011~
+----------------------------------------------------------+

The output of the debounce circuit goes to the pulse data con-
trol section. When a pulse arrives, the control section detects
it and latches the condition until the PIB microcontroller
clears the latched condition. The pulse data control section
then generates an interrupt signal which notifies the PIB micro-
controller that a pulse has been detected. When the microcon-
troller processes the interrupt, it scans all eight pulse data
control outputs to see which one (or ones) detected a pulse. It
then reads the master timer and saves that time in memory. The
previous time stamp for that channel is moved in memory and
becomes the starting time stamp for the pulse interval. The
difference between the two time stamps is computed to determine
the pulse interval time. The pulse rate is then derived from
the pulse interval time. Finally, a pulse counter located in
ram memory is incremented.
The 8031 microcontroller provides the intelligence for the PIB.
Under program control, it counts and times pulse intervals for
eight channels, converts the raw data to engineering units,
performs post processing on channel data, controls the interface
with the 280 host processor, and executes commands received from
the 280 host processor. The microcontroller system consists of
the following components:
1 8031 Microcontroller
32K x 8 Eprom (Program) Memory
t 8K x 8 Non Volatile Ram (Data) Memory
128 Byte Bidirectional FIFO Buffer
t Power Supply Status/Control Port
The 8031 microcontroller drives the bus control, address, and
data lines. It fetches program data from the Program Memory,
decodes it, and then executes the decoded instruction. The
Eprom memory stores the program information. The nonvolatile
memory contains channel configuration information. If power
cycles, the PIB will start collecting pulse information based on
the channel data stored in ram. This eliminates the necessity
of initializing the PIB every time power is restored. The
temporary storage area for system variables is also in the Non
Volatile Ram memory. The FIFO buffer is the interface between
the 280 host system and the PIB microcontroller. It is asyn-
chronous which allows the 280 host and the PIB to have independ-
ent timing. It is bidirectional allowing data transfers in both
directions. The 280 host sends commands and data through the
FIFO to the'PIB microcontroller and the microcontroller returns
status and data to the 280 host processor.

TEHXtY OF OPEUTION 3-36 PRELININARY NELXhSE 9/89

+--------------------------------,,------
----mm---a-------+

1 MARTIN-D-TECHNICALMANUU, I S P E cTRrn 1 0 0 0 S Y S T IS I I T m O llI

+ --------------------------------,,-~ -- -----------W - W - - - - +

T h e p o w e r supply c o n trol p o r t is u s e d to m o n i tor a n d c o n trol th e

m a in p o w e r supply. T h e S p e c trum 1 0 0 0 only uses th e status
section. It p e r fo r m s a n I/O r e a d to th e p o w e r supply p o r t which
provides it with th e A C line status a n d th e conditio n o f th e
o p tio n a l b a ttery ( b a tteries).
J u m p e r s o n th e P IB b o a r d allow selection o f P IB l or P IB 2 , d e ter-
m ine th e priority in th e interrupt chain, a n d select th e type o f
m e m o r y o n th e b o a r d . N o n e of
th e s e j u m p e r s a r e normally changed
in th e field a n d all j u m p e r s o n a r e p l a c e m e n t b o a r d should b e
set to m a tch th e b o a r d b e i n g r e m o v e d . R e fer to th e b o a r d a s s e m -
bly a n d S ignal C o n d i tio n e r drawings for j u m p e r positions and
settin g s .

3 .0 5 .0 3 E N C O D = IW fE R F A C X B Q A R D T h e E N C O D E RI N T E R F A C E B O A R D
( P C B 3 3 8 A ) d e c o d e s th e o u tp u t o f th e O p tical Encoder Sensor and
o u tp u ts o n e o f two possible pulse trains. T h e o u tp u t th a t is
active is d e te r m i n e d by th e direction o f spin o f th e e n c o d e r
w h e e l a n d th e rate o f th e o u tp u t pulses is d e te r m i n e d by th e
velocity o f th e e n c o d e r w h e e l . Figure 3 .2 5 s h o w s a n E n c o d e r
In terfa c e B o a r d assembly a n d a block d i a g r a m o f th e E n c o d e r
In terfa c e is s h o w n in Figure 3 .2 6 .

Figure 3 .2 5 : Encoder In terfa c e

P R E L ININARY R E L E A S E 9 /8 9 3-37
+-------------------------------------------- --------------a----+

1 H A R T I N - D E l C E R T E C E N ICAL- 1 S P B C T R D H1 0 0 0 S Y s T E n I l% lO llI
+ --------------------------------------------------------------*

VOLTAGE
CiND FZUilLATOR PCB338A
E N C O D E RIN T E R F A C EB llA R D

Figure 3 .2 6 : Encoder In terfa c e - B lock Diagram

T h e o u tp u t o f th e o p tical e n c o d e r is two sym m e trical square
w a v e s th a t a r e 9 0 0 o u t o f p h a s e . O u tp u t B lags o u tp u t A by 9 0 0
if th e w h e e l is rota tin g in a clockwise direction a n d it leads A
by 9 0 0 if th e direction o f rota tio n is c o u n ter-clockwise. The
pulse width o f th e s q u a r e w a v e is d e te r m i n e d by th e velocity of
rota tio n . T h e q u a d r a tu r e d e c o d e r takes th e o u tp u t o f th e e n c o d -
er w h e e l a n d d e c o d e s th e direction a n d s p e e d o f th e e n c o d e r
wheel. T h e direction d e te r m i n e s which o f th e two d e c o d e r o u t-
p u ts is o u tp u ttin g pulses a n d th e rate o f th e pulses is e q u a l to
th e i n c o m i n g pulse rate from th e e n c o d e r w h e e l . The decoder
o u tp u ts a r e th e n divided d o w n by a p r o g r a m m a b l e divider circuit.
T h e divider circuit reduces th e h i g h s p e e d pulse train to a rate
th a t is c o m p a tible with th e P IB . T h e p r o g r a m m a b i l i ty fe a tu r e
e n a b l e s th e u s a g e o f o n e e n c o d e r sensor for m a n y different rates
o f revolution. T h e divider drives a pulse g e n e r a tor circuit.
This circuit o u tp u ts a 7 m illisecond pulse th a t is c o m p a tible
with th e P IB i n p u t r e q u i r e m e n ts. T h e o u tp u ts o f th e e n c o d e r
interface a r e fe d into s e p a r a te channels o f th e P IB .

T N E O N Y O F O P E R A T ICBJ 3-38 P R E L ININARY R E L E A S E 9 /8 9

+-------------------------------------------------------------+
1 HARTIN-DH.X.ERTECHNICALXANtJAL 1 SPJzcTRrn 1000 SYSTrn I TwlOllI
+'---'-----------------------------------~----------~--------+

3.06 COMPUTIHG HODULES The computing modules are the heart of

the system. They direct all activities and maintain the system
structure. Some of the functions they perform are:
Control of the data acquisition section
P
Post processing of data
1
Maintenance of the system data base
1 System time keeping
t Control the user interface
v
Logging of error conditions
1 Control System communications
The computing section contains the host processor and its sup-
port modules. The following sections describe the functions of
those modules.
3.06.01 CEW!CML PIWCESSIHG UNIT XHRD The Central Processing
Unit (PCB327A-02) is a 280 based STD Bus compatible single board
computer. It has the following features:
t Five BYTEWIDETM memory sockets (ROM, EPROM, OR RAM)
t RS232 Serial Port
1
8 Bit Parallel Output Port
t Memory Mapping Prom with selectable maps
b I/O Mapping Prom for onboard I/O
? 280 CPU running at 3.6864 MHz
t Supports all of the Z80 Interrupt Modes
1
Four 16 Bit Timers
t Bidirectional address, data, and control buses
b
Supports Direct Memory Access (DMA)
The 280 CPU is the main processor for the Spectrum 1000 System.
It executes the master program which, along with the hardware,
defines the operational characteristics of the system. The
Spectrum 1000 Operators Manual explains the operational charac-
teristics of the system. Figure 3.27 shows a CPU assembly
drawing and Figure 3.28 shows a functional block diagram.

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 3-39 THmRYoPoPmmTIoN

i HARTIN-DECKERTECHNICAL~ 1 SPBCTMJH 1000 SYsTL# I TwlOllI
+--------------------- ~----------------------------------+

-
I- -Aqeg.. ------- II ------- "'L
Lyyr---. 45---”

Figure 3.27: Central Processing Unit

1

EL

Figure 3.28: Central Processing Unit - Block Diagram

THHORYOFOPEBATION PRELININlUtY RELEASE 9/89

+---------------------------------------------- ---------------+
1 HARTIN-DEKERTECHMICALHANUAL I SPECTRUH 1000 SYsTxm I !ml1011~
+----------------------e-----m----------- -----------------+

The 280 Central Processing Unit (CPU) is the STD Bus Master. It
controls the address, data, and control/status lines and pro-
vides all of the system timing. The CPU has 16 address lines, 8
bidirectional data lines, and 18 status/control lines, all of
which are buffered to support communications with other STD
modules. The Port Control logic (see Figure 3.28), the memory
configuration logic, and the General Control logic combine with
the 280 microprocessor to provide complete STD Bus control.
The 280 supports a 64 Kilobyte memory address space. The memory
configuration logic of the central processing unit determines
the structure of the memory map. It controls the size of the
memory segments, their address range, and whether they are on
the CPU or on another printed circuit board. There are five
memory sockets available on the CPU. The sockets, through the
use of jumper options, can support RAM, ROM, or EPROM from 1K x
8 size to 32K x 8. A typical memory read cycle would proceed as
follows:
1. The 280 microprocessor would output the memory address and
initiate a memory read cycle.
2. The memory management logic would decode the address and
inform the general control logic which direction to enable
the bus. If the access is onboard, it would also enable
the proper memory socket.
3. The general control logic would enable the bus and deter-
mine its direction.
4. The 280 microprocessor would complete the memory cycle.
The other memory cycles would follow the same sequence of steps.
The Spectrum 1000 only uses one memory map configuration.
Program Memory resides in the first 48K of memory (OOOOH -
BFFFH). The last 16K of memory (COOOH - FFFFH) is designated as
random access memory (RAM). The program memory (EPROM) resides
on board in 2 32K x 8 Eproms. The last 16K of the 2nd Eprom is
not accessible. The RAM segment consists of 2 8K x 8 nonvola-
tile RAM integrated circuits (ICs) located on the Real Time
Clock PCB. The nonvolatile RAM serves as the program variable
storage area and as the system configuration data base area.
The 280 supports 256 input/output (IO) addresses. 18 IO ad-
dresses are used on the central processing unit. 16 addresses
are dedicated to the Serial Timer Interface IC (STI). 1 address
is allocated to the 8 bit parallel port and the last IO address
is for memory map selection. The Port Control logic functions
similar to the memory control logic except that it decodes
addresses during input/output (IO) cycles. The Port Control
logic decodes the IO address to be accessed, informs the general
control logic if it is on or off the CPU PCB, and if it is on
the CPU board, enables the proper IC.

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 3-41 TBWRY OF OPmATIoN

 T
i MARTIN-DECKERTECEUUCAL luNaAL 1 SP3iicTRun 1000 SYSTKH I TulOllI
+----------------------------------- ~--------------+

The Serial Timer Interface IC (STI) provides four 16 bit timers

and a serial port capable of communications at up to 9600 bits
per second (baud). One timer is used for the main system timer
and a second one is used as a baud rate clock generator for the
serial port. The serial data lines are brought in 53 to the
STI. The Spectrum 1000 uses the serial port to communicate with
the Hand Held Terminal. This communication link provides access
for a technician to execute commands and access status informa-
tion not available at the Display Panel.
The Central Processing Unit is the heart of the system. If it
is not functioning, the rest of the system will not function
either. If one of the other modules fails, the system can
continue to function, albeit with reduced functionality. To
protect against a CPU failure, the Spectrum 1000 employs a
redundant CPU scheme. There are two CPUs installed in the
Spectrum 1000. Only one is functioning at a time. The CPU
select logic controls the 280 processor and the bus logic. If
the CPU ENABLE Signal from the Central Processor Interface board
(CPI) is active, the CPU is functioning and executing the Master
Program. If the CPU ENABLE Signal is inactive, the CPU is held
in reset and the bus logic is deactivated. Only one CPU ENABLE
Signal can be active at one time. This allows two CPU PCBs to
be installed in the system at one time.
The system has a Watch Dog timer circuit designed in (located on
the MATS PCB). If the Watch Dog timer is not periodically reset
by the active CPU, it will generate a system reset. This system
reset automatically toggles the state of the CPU ENABLE signals
(See the CPI description). If the active CPU malfunctions, it
will not reset the Watch Dog timer and the system will switch to
the backup Central Processing Unit. Connector 53 is connected
to the CPI board for routing of the CPU ENABLE Signal and the
HHT communications link.
3.06.02 - PROCESSOR I-ACE rYURn The Central Processor
Interface board (PCB326A) contains the control logic for the
redundant CPU scheme. Figure 3.29 shows the CPI assembly and
Figure 3.30 show a block diagram of the CPI circuitry.

THEORY OF OPEBATI= 3-42 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

1 HARTIN-DJEKERTKEUICALHlUMJAL 1 SPECTRUM 1000 SYSTEM 1 -lolli

PCEJZIA REV I MARTIN-DEC :KER MADE IN U S.A

SERIAL - CEDAR PARH : TX

c2w
C’O (“(
E3 0 00

I
l
CJ @ e-&a
DSI

OS2

Jl E
c4\3 f=J & J2 77
l
u2
a-
l
CS 3
u3
n
CPU 2 CPU
r
1

19 es
C70

J4

Figure 3.29: Central Processor Interface

I--- -1

HANDHELD
TERMINAL
Figure 3.30: Central Processor Interface - Block Diagram

PEELININARY RELEASE 9/89 3-43 WY OF OPPION

i MARTIN-DECKER TECEINICAL HANDAL 1 SP-DH 1000 SYSTEX 1 TnlOllI
+-----------------------------------------------------------*

The main function of the CPI is to switch to a backup processor

if the active processor ceases to function. The CPI circuit
controls which CPU is currently active. It uses as input CPU
PRESENT signals to determine how many CPUs are installed in the
Spectrum 1000. If only one CPU is installed, the CPI control
logic enables that CPU and the system functions like a standard
system with a single CPU module. If two CPUs are installed, the
CPI control logic determines which processor is active. On
power up, the control logic randomly selects and activates one
CPU while disabling the other CPU. The control logic then
monitors the system reset line. If the system goes into reset
while power is still present, the control logic switches to the
alternate processor.
The watch dog timer circuit (located on the MATS PCB) controls
the system reset line. On power up, it starts its timing cycle.
The active CPU periodically resets the watch dog timer forcing
it to start the timing cycle over. As long as the CPU is func-
tioning properly, the watch dog timing cycle never completes.
If the CPU fails to reset the watch dog timer, the watch dog
circuitry will generate a system reset. This reset causes the
CPI board to switch processors.
A secondary function of the CPI is the switching of the HHTs
communication lines between the CPUs. The CPU ENABLE line
controls the communication logic. Only the active CPU has its
TXD data line connected to the HHT. The CPI also provides a LED
indicator to the technician to indicate which CPU is active.
CPU ID lines are provided for the CPUs so that the active proc-
essor can tell the Display Panel whether it is CPU 1 or 2.
3.06.03 WUD HELD WAI- TERHIXAL The Hand Held Terminal
(HHT) (H10980A) is the technicians system interface tool. It
will interface with the ADC or the Host CPU. The mode of usage
is defined by which PCB the RJll connector is plugged into.
Figure 3.31 shows a HHT assembly and Figure 3.32 shows a block
diagram of the HHT.
The HHT is a microcontroller (8031) based terminal. Input is
received from a 16 key pad matrix. The matrix lines are tied
directly to an IO port on the 8031. The host processor decodes
the key matrix and processes the translated data. Data is
displayed on a 16 character 5 x 7 dot matrix liquid crystal
display (LCD). The display interfaces directly to the microcon-
troller data bus. The micro controller outputs Ascii characters
to the display and the display translates the characters into
the 5 x 7 format for display on the LCD.

TEHDRY OF OPEUTION 3-44 PRELIHIW4RY RELEFiSE 9/89

+-------------------- -------------e--- -v--a---.---------a----+

IHARTIN-DECKERTFZEQUCAL 1 sPBcTRDH 1000 S Y I m

+ ---------------------------------*

Figure 3 H a n d H e l d Terminal

PREL RELEASE9 3-45 T E B O R YO F O P E R A T

+--------------------------------------------- ------ --------a+

1 H A R T I N - D E c K g R T E C H N IUL- 1 S P E c m u H 1 0 0 0 S Y s T m I m JlO llI

+ -------------W --W -- -------------------m -------------------+

I PROG,

MEM

27C256
1

HHT

CPU

8051

H10980A
H A N D H E L D T E R M IN A L

Figure 3 .3 2 : H a n d H e l d Terminal - B lock Diagram

T h e m icrocontroller c o m m u n i c a tes with th e h o s t using its built

in U A R T a n d a R S 2 3 2 receiver/driver IC. T h e H H T s u p p o r ts c o m m u -
nications with two h o s ts. O n e is th e A D C a n d th e o th e r is th e
2 8 0 H o s t C P U . T h e H H T d e te r m i n e s which m o d e it is in by sensing
th e polarity o f th e receive d a ta c o m m u n i c a tio n s line ( R e fe r e n c e
Figure 3 .3 2 ) . If th e line is positive, it displays th e H H T H o s t
m o d e m e s s a g e a n d inform s th e H o s t C P U th a t it is ready to re-
ceive e d a ta . If th e line is n e g a tive, th e m icrocontroller
toggles th e select line to invert th e polarity o f th e receive
line to a fo r m usable by th e o n b o a r d U A R T . It th e n displays th e
A D C m o d e m e s s a g e a n d e x e c u tes th e A D C user interface program
stored in th e H H T E p r o m .

T H E O R Y O P O P E R A T IO U 3-46 PR5uuawRY R E L E A S E 9 /8 9
 1 HARTIN-D-TEEHICALHAW& 1 SPECTRUM 1000 SYsTEn I TulOllI
+-------------- ---a------- -------a-----------
+

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

PEELIMIEARY RELEASE 9/89 3-47 TaHoEY OF OPERATION

1 HARTIN-D-TECEHICALHAUDAL 1 SPmzl!RtJH 1000 SYSTRI I mno11i

3.06.04 HATa AND ACTIVE TERHIBUiTION BMRD The Math and Active
Termination Board (MATS) is a STD bus PCB (PCB309A) that pro-
vides support functions for the Z80 host processor. Figure 3.33
shows an assembly drawing of the MATS PCB and Figure 3.34 shows
a block diagram of the MATS circuitry. The MATS PCB has the
following capabilities:
t 9511 Math Coprocessor
t Watchdog Timer/Reset Circuit
1 CPU addressable 8 position Switch block
t Active Bus Termination Circuit
k
STD Bus Power Indicators
t Parallel Port Controller (PIO)
Two Seven Segment LED Displays
Two Momentary Pushbutton Status Switches
Watch Dog Timer Control Line
These devices are controlled by the 280 host microprocessor.
Onboard logic decodes the STD bus addresses lines to determine
when the board is being accessed. That logic outputs an enable
signal to the IC being addressed. The control logic also ena-
bles the data bus buffer and turns it in the proper direction.
The math coprocessor interfaces directly with the 280 host
address and data lines. It loads 32 bit floating point data,
performs mathematical functions, and outputs floating point data
all under microprocessor control.
The Watchdog timer/reset circuit consists of a timer IC and a
buffer IC. On power up, the timer circuit is reset and starts
it time out cycle. If the timer is not reset during its time
out period (approximately 3.8 seconds), it triggers and changes
its output state. This will enable the buffer IC and put a
ground condition on the System reset line. The timer will hold
the ground condition for approximately 2.2 seconds. After that
time period, it will reset and start the time cycle over again.
During normal operation, the Spectrum 1000 System program will
regularly instruct the CPU to reset the Watch Dog timer before
the time period expires.

TEEORY OF OPEBATIW 3-48 PEEL-Y RELEASE 9/89

+----------------------------------------------------------*
1 HARTIN-DEKER TECHNICAL HANIJAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SY- 1 TWlOllI

UlO
‘U* u .

.
n - cl Ull
tl Cl

Figure 3.33: Math and Active Termination

MATHANDACTIVE
TERMINATION BOARD

TSR&Et ALL SiD BUS u&&s

SIGNALLINES STD BUS

Figure 3.34: Math and Active Termination - Block Diagram

PRELIHINARY R.ELEUE 9/89 3-49 TEmmYoPoPmu4TIoN

i MARTIN-D-TECHUICALHANUAL 1 SP-= 1000 SYSTEM 1 ~ll0lli

The 8 position switch block is connected to the system data bus

by the switch buffer driver. The 280 CPU can read the position
of the switches as set by the user. The current configuration
of the Spectrum 1000 program does not use this capability. The
active termination circuit ties all of the STD Bus lines (except
power and ground) to a Thevin's equivalent circuit of 270 ohms
resistance at 3.6 volts reference. This helps eliminate ringing
and other bus transmission problems. The MATS board provides
three LED indicators to show that +12, -12, and +5 power is
available on the bus. These indicators only indicate if voltage
is there or not. They do not indicate if the voltages are at
their proper level. Voltage level checks should be made with a
meter.
The Parallel Input Output (PIO) IC provides the Host 280 CPU
with access to circuits that do not have microprocessor inter-
faces. The PI0 contains two eight bit ports that can be config-
ured as either input lines or output lines under program con-
trol. The 280 Host can read data or write data to these IO
ports depending on their configuration. The MATS PCB uses four
IO lines of Port A and all eight lines of Port B. Two lines of
Port A are configured as inputs and read the status of the
momentary push button switches SW2 and SW3. SW2 closed on reset
indicates to the Spectrum 1000 program that a PIB reset is
needed. SW2 and SW3 closed on power up/reset indicates that a
System cold start is needed. A third line on Port A is also
used as an input line. It is tied to the END/ status line of
the math coprocessor. The CPU monitors this status line to see
when the math coprocessor has finished executing an instruction.
The final line used on Port A is configured as an output and is
used as the watch dog timer reset line. Periodically, the CPU
toggles the state of this line which restarts the watch dog
timers time out period. This keeps the system from going into a
reset condition. The other four lines on Port A are not used.
All eight lines of Port B are configured as outputs and are
connected to two seven segment LED displays. The 280 host can
write HEX codes to the display to be viewed by a technician.
The Spectrum 1000 program does not use the display at this time.

TaglQap OF OPH4ATIOH 3-50 PRELIHIEARY RELEASE 9/89

+----~-~--~------~------~-----
----------‘-----------------+

1 M A R T II'+ D E C K E R T E C E H IcA c M A N U A L 1 S P E C T R D H1 0 0 0 S Y s T m I TwlO llI

T

3 .0 6 .0 5 R J U U TINE C L C X X B Q A R D T h e R e a l Tim e Clock B o a r d (RTC)

is a S T D b u s P C B ( P C B 3 2 8 A - 0 2 ) th a t provides s u p p o r t fu n c tio n s
for th e 2 8 0 h o s t processor. Figure 3 .3 5 s h o w s a n assembly
d r a w i n g o f th e R T C P C B a n d Figure 3 .3 6 s h o w s a block d i a g r a m o f
th e R T C circuitry. T h e R T C P C B h a s th e following capabilities:
t R e a l Tim e Clock Calendar with B a ttery Backup
? B ytewideTM M e m o r y S o c k e ts x 4
t 1 6 B it C o u n ter/Tim e r s x 4
t 1 6 B it Parallel IO P o r t
t B r o w n O u t D e tector
T h e s e devices a r e c o n trolled by th e 2 8 0 h o s t m icroprocessor.
O n b o a r d logic d e c o d e s th e S T D b u s addresses lines to d e te r m i n e
w h e n th e b o a r d is b e i n g accessed. T h a t logic o u tp u ts a n e n a b l e
signal to th e IC b e i n g a d d r e s s e d . T h e c o n trol logic also e n a -
bles th e d a ta b u s b u ffer a n d turns it in th e p r o p e r direction.

IE IN CANAOA I

Figure 3 .3 5 : R e a l Tim e Clock

P R E L u II# A R p R E L E A S E 9 /8 9 3-51 T E m n Y o P o P m ? A T Im
 +----------------------------- ----------------------------+
~HARTIN-DEUERTItCEBIcAI;- I SPETRUH 1000 smT= I WlOllI
+---------------------.- -----'------------------------*

I
c I

I I INTERRUPT

4 1 w LOGIC

16 BIT COUNTER
.
I/O TIMERS

CHANNEL - x 4
I/O STD

DECODE BUS

- INTER- M

FACE

I’
PCB328A-02; I
l- .
Figure 3.36: Real Time Clock - Block Diagram
The Real Time Clock keeps accurate track of time/date informa-
tion. Once it is initialized by the 280 host with yearr month,
day, hour, minutes, seconds, and tenths of seconds, it will
track the time and date and provide that information to the 280
Host upon request. The Real Time Clock has a microprocessor
interface and connects directly to the address/data lines of the
STD Bus. The IO decode circuitry detects when the Clock is
being accessed and sets its enable line. The Time/Date informa-
tion is stored internally in non-volatile ram. The clock has a
battery backup and will continue to keep time after power is
lost.
There are four memory sockets available for use on the RTC PCB.

These sockets provide the capability of providing Ram, Rom, or

Eprom memory for use by the Host processor. The size of the
memory segment allocated to a socket is defined by configuration
jumpers on the RTC PCB. The memory is connected directly to the
STD Bus 'address/data lines for access by the Host CPU. The
memory decode logic detects when the Host is accessing memory on
the RTC and enables the proper socket. The onboard memory can
be enable/disabled by the host microprocessor. The current
configuration of the Spectrum 1000 uses two of the four sockets.
Each socket contains a 8K by 8 zero power ram IC for a total of
16K of Ram memory. This memory is mapped into the Host proces-
sor address space from COOOH to FFFFH. This is the only ram in
the system and it is used to store configuration information as

THEORY OF OP=TIOH 3-52 PRELIHIMARY RELEASE 9/89

+---a----------W-W- ---------I-------__----- ------------------+

1 HARTIN-DEKERTBCRWCALWWUAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYsTrn I !mTlo11~

+-~---~-------- -----------------------------------+

well as a scratch pad area for program variables. The ram is

non-volatile and configuration inform ation is not lost when
power is rem oved.
There are four independent 16 bit counter/tim ers in the CTC IC
on the RTC board. These counters are program m able by the Host
CPU. The CTC IC interfaces with the address/data lines of the
STD Bus and the Host CPU accesses the CTC through the Bus. The
IO decode logic detects when the CTC has been selected and sets
its enable line. The CTC can use the system clock for tim ing or
external clocks. External clocks can be brought in on connector
J2. The outputs of the CTC are also routed to 52. The current
configuration of the Spectrum 1000 program does not use the CTC
circuit.
A 16 bit parallel port is available on the CTC PCB. The Port
can be configured as input or output by configuration jum pers.
Two bidirectional latches tied to the m icroprocessor bus provide
access to 16 IO lines connected to connector 53. The parallel
port is not used in this configuration of the Spectrum 1000.
The RTC has a Brown Out Detector which m onitors the +5 Volt
power line. If the 5 Volt power drops below the Detector set-
point, the Brown Out Detector inhibits the m emory enable control.
lines and activates the STD Bus system reset line. The Brown
Out Detector will hold the system in reset until the 5 volt
power line rises above the setpoint. The Brown Out setpoint is
factory set at 4.75 Volts.
WARNIffi: Do not adjust R4 on the Real Time Clock PCB,
Adjustm ent would change the Brown Out Detector setpoint
and could cause the system to m alfunction.

PRELIlUBlARY RELEASE 9/89 3-53 TEWRY OF OP=TIOid

*--------------------------------------------------------*
1 MARTIN-DEZKERTECENICALMANUAL 1 SPETRUH 1000 SYsTrn I !lwlOllI
+------------------------------------------------------+

3.07 COHHDNICATION ODTPDT HODDLES The communication modules

provide the user interface section of the Spectrum 1000 system.
Information is developed by the host cpu and displayed to the
user through these modules. User input and control information
is returned to the host cpu through this section. Figure 3.37
shows a block diagram of the data pathway to the user. Data
originates in the computing modules. From there it is passed to
the Dual Serial Input/Output PCB. This module converts 8 bit
parallel data to a RS232 asynchronous serial bit stream. The
RS232 data is directed to the Current Loop Control TRP. The
Current Loop Control TRP converts the data to TTL levels and
routes that data to the current loop/RS232 TRPs.
The output of the RS232 TRP drives a communication link to a
personal computer. The personal computer runs Prism 1000 soft-
ware. This software receives data from the Spectrum 1000 and
displays and prints that data in various formats.
Two Current Loop TRPs receive data from the Current Loop Control
Board. These two TRPs convert the TTL data to current loop and
broadcast an identical data stream to the Display Panel. The
communication lines from the TRPs are routed to a junction box ;
external to the Signal Conditioner. From the junction box, two
separate cables are routed to the Display Panel. Both of the
cables carry communications and safe power from the I.S. Power
SUPPlY. The two cables from the junction box are physically
routed along different paths to the Display Panel. If one cable
is damaged, the Display Panel still receives power and communica-
tions. The Intrinsically Safe Modular Interface (ISMI) master
module inside the display panel receives the dual communication
and power links. The master ISMI routes the power and data to
its own display controller boards and to a maximum of three slave
ISMI modules. The controller boards display the data on Liquid
Crystal Display (LCD) Boards.
3.07.01 DUAL smIAL IBlPm/m B The Dual Serial
Input/Output Board (DSIO) is an STD Bus PCB (PCB341A-02) that
converts eight bit parallel data from the host CPU to an asyn-
chronous serial bit stream. Figure 3.38 shows an assembly draw-
ing of the DSIO and a DSIO block diagram is shown in figure 3.39.
The DSIO interfaces to the Host CPU through the STD Bus. Onboard
decode logic detects when the board is being accessed and enables
the data buffers for a data read or write operation. A dual
channel communications controller interfaces directly with the
data bus buffers. The decode logic detects when the communica-
tions controller is being addressed and sets the controllers
enable line. Data and status is read from the controller and
data and commands are written to the controller. It is the
controllers responsibility to convert parallel data to a clocked
serial data bit stream and convert serial data streams to paral-
lel data. A dual programmable baud rate generator provides baud
rate clock for the communications controller.

TEEDRY OF OPERATION 3-54 PREL-Y RELEASE 9/89

i MARTIN-DEcgERTECEQdICAL-
+-------------------------------------------------------------+
1 SPEC~~RU~ 1000 SYSTEM I -101ii

KEYPAD

MODULE

1341 MASTR 1341 SLAVE ISMI SLAVE ISMI SLAVE

MfzhE - Mi&E - MF&E - MODID

\
4 a

I DISPLAY PANEL I
CI

I IS.

SUPPLY
POWER

- JUtFN I

LIJ
CL TRP CL

LW
TRP

- PVR
SENSOR

SUPPLY
1
t \

\
I

COMPUTING DSIR TRP CNTRL RS232 TRP PE RSIJNAL

BOARD BOARD - 2.I -

MODULES - COMPUTER
PcB34lkoe PcB3m

I SIGNAL CDNDITICINER I
L 1

Figure 3.37: Communications Block Diagram

PRKLIHIHARY - 9/89 3-55 THBORY OF OPgaATIoW

 +--------------------------,,,--------,-
------------m-m---+

1 MARTIN-DEiCER TECHNICAL M A N U A L 1 sPEcTRDn 1000 S Y sTEn 1 m lo11~

+ -------------------------------------------------------------*

Figure 3 .3 8 : D u a l Serial In p u t/O u tp u t

T h e serial o u tp u t o f th e c o m m u n i c a tio n s c o n troller is r o u te d to a
T T L to R S 2 3 2 converter/driver. T h e converter th e d a ta signal to
R S 2 3 2 voltage levels a n d r o u tes th e o u tp u t to a p o r t c o n figura-
tio n h e a d e r . T h e c o n fig u r a tio n h e a d e r c o n trols th e u s e o f th e
h a n d s h a k i n g signals a n d th e r o u tin g of th e receive a n d transmit
d a ta lines. T h e S p e c trum 1 0 0 0 c o n fig u r a tio n uses th e p r o g r a m m a -
ble D a ta Terminal R e a d y (DTR) a n d R e q u e s t T o S e n d ( R T S ) h a n d s h a k -
ing lines as d a ta select lines. T h e s e two lines, a l o n g with th e
T X d a ta , R X d a ta , a n d g r o u n d lines, a r e r o u te d to th e T R P s . T h e
D S IO P C B also h a s a n o p tio n a l T T L to C u r r e n t L o o p interface on
th e P C B . This o p tio n is n o t u s e d . T h e o u tp u t o f th e D S IO is
r o u te d to th e T R P m o th e r b o a r d a n d from th e r e to th e C u r r e n t L o o p
C o n trol TRP.

T E E O N Y O F 0 P m tA !r1oN 3-56 P N E L ININARY R E L E A S E 9 /8 9

1 HARTIN-DECKERTEcB#ICAL- 1 SPmzTRtlH 1000 SYsTEn I TulOlli
+--------------------------------------------~-------------+

ADDRESS DUAL 20mA

DEfNyE SERIAL - toNFIZTIIIN *
- HEADERS -
PORTS Y!VRCIEpNT
DATA BUS

20mA PORT
cmF1GuRATIm
d - -s * *

L PCB341A-02 A
Figure 3.39: Dual Serial Input/Output - Block Diagram

PRELININARY NELEASE 9/89

1 MARTIN-DECI~ERTECHHICALB~AHUAL I SPBCTRDH 1000 SYsTgn I TwlOllI
+---------------------------------------~ ---------------------+

3.07.02 CDNRENT LOOP CONTROL TRP BOARD The Current Loop Control
TRP (PCB313A) performs signal level conversions and signal
input/output selections. Figure 3.40 shows a Current Loop Con-
trol TRP assembly drawing and a block diagram of the CLC TRP is
shown in figure 3.41. Transmit data and select control lines are
received from the DSIO through the TRP Motherboard and routed to
a RS232 to TTL converter. The transmit data is then directed to
the output select decoder. The output select decoder channels
the transmit data to four transmit channel lines. The data is
not transmitted unless the enable line for that channel has been
activated. The select lines are routed to a two line to four
line output select module. Under host control, this module can
enable one output channel for transmission. Each channel can
also be enabled by the installation of a jumper on the PCB. The
Spectrum 1000 does not use the output select lines for transmit
channel selection. All four output channels are enabled by the
installation of jumpers at locations G, H, J, and K.

I ~~ TRANSIENT PBOTECTOB. CURRENT LOOP CONTROL BD.

Figure 3.40: Current Loop Control

THEXBY OF OPERATIOU 3-58 PRELIHIIUIIP RELEASE 9/89

+---------------------------------------------------------------+
1 HARTIN-DECKER TJECENICAL HANDAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTE31 1 TUlOllI
+---------------------------------------------------------------+

Four receive data channels are routed to input buffers on the

Current Loop Control board. The output of the buffers go to the
input select decoder. The channel select lines from the host are
routed to the input select decoder also. The host CPU selects
which receive line it wants to listen to. The Spectrum 1000 only
receives data on two of the four data lines. If data is lost on
one line, the host switches to the other receive channel. The
output of the decoder is routed to the TTL to RS232 signal con-
verter. From there it goes through the TRP motherboard to the
DSIO.

OUT

TZS

Ftz
TRPS

L PCB313A
--p-p-- CURRENT LOOP CONTROL J
Figure 3.41: Current Loop Control - Block Diagram
3.07.03 RS232 T'RP BQARD The RS232 TRP (PCB340A) provides signal
level translation, optical isolation, transient suppression, and
EMI/RFI filtering. Figure 3.42 shows the RS232 TRP assembly
drawing and the RS232 TRP block diagram is shown in figure 3.43.
The RS232 TRP is a multi-purpose RS232 conversion PCB. It can
use as input TTL level signals or RS232 level signals. Transmit
Data can come from the TRP motherboard or through connector P2.
It can be routed directly to the opto-couplers or it can be
converted from RS232 to TTL levels first. Jumper block JP3 in
conjunction with jumper block JP2 determine the routing of the
input signals. After the level and source of the incoming data
are set by jumper installations, the data are routed to the
isolation section. Opto-couplers provide the electrical isola-
tion between the external world and the Spectrum 1000 system.

PNELININARY RKLEASE 9/89 3-59 THHXtY OF OPEEtATION

+------------------------------------------------------------+
IHAFtTIBI-DBCKBRT-ICAL- 1 SPEcrRtJH 1000 SYsTgn I !lwlOllI
+------------------------~---, -------------------------------+

’ -“’ 7- L2 UIJZ
6 00 I
00 JP4
c i - - ?rn I

C
-II II
C
7

Figure 3.42: RS232 TRP

Pl
n’

4 *

PCB340A
TRP - RS232
--_I_-- ---- -I
Figure 3.43: RS232 TRP - Block Diagram

Y!EBDRY OF OP=TIOBl 3-60 PRELININMtY RELEASE 9/89

+---------------------------------------------------------------+
1 MARTIN-DECKERTECENICALHANUAL I sPmTRm 1000 SYSTJM I TwlOll~

Data proceeds from the opto-couplers to a TTL to RS232 converter.

The outputs of the RS232 converter are routed through the TRP
motherboard to terminal blocks for connection to external commu-
nication lines. The outputs of the TRP are protected by a volt-
age suppressor diode and a EM/RF1 filter. The diode protects
the TRP from high voltage levels and the filter attenuates
EM/RF1 noise. Receive data comes in from the external and is
routed through duplicate circuitry. The conversion process is
done in reverse from the transmit data. Receive data is routed
to Pl or P2 depending on jumper configurations.
3.07.04 CURRENT LOOP !l!RP WURD The Current Loop TRP Board
(PCB290A) converts TTL or RS232 data to current loop and current
loop data to RS232 or TTL. Figure 3.44 show the assembly drawing
for a Current Loop TRP and a block diagram is shown in Figure
3.45. RS232 transmit data is received through Pl and routed to a
RS232 to TTL converter. The output of the converter is buffered
and then fed to another buffer. TTL transmit data is also routed
to the input of this second buffer from connector P2. Jumper
selection determines which signal drives the second buffer ampli-
fier. The output of the second buffer drives the base of a
transistor which controls the input of the opto-coupler. The
opto-coupler provides electrical isolation for the Current Loop
TRP. The output side of the opto-coupler is also the controlling
element of the current loop circuit. The opto-coupler output is
protected from high voltage level transients by a voltage sup-
pressor diode.

PNELININARY -E 9/89 3-61 THBORY OF OPgRATIoW

+------------------------------------------~------------*
1 HARTIN-DEKXRTECENICALHANDAL 1 SPXZTRDH 1000 SYsTm 1 lwlOllI
+----------- -----------------------------------------------+
,
-aa dOOllN3YYll3 NOl13310Ud lN3HitNVYl~;

Figure 3.44: Current Loop TRP

A jumperable resistor network is provided for current limiting.
Removal of the jumpers will add extra resistance to the current
loop. This is normally used when barriers are not installed.
The current loop circuit can be sourced externally or internally.
An isolated 12 volt power and ground source is available for
internal sourcing via jumper blocks. The current loop signal is
routed through a full wave bridge circuit. This circuit routes
current through the opto-coupler in only one direction. The
connecting wires for externally sourced current loops can be
connected in either direction without affecting the operation of
the circuit. Incorrect connection of the communications line
when the current loop is internally sourced will cause the cir-
cuit to not function properly. The output of the full wave
bridge is fed through a dual PI filter network. This filter
attenuates EM/RF1 interference. The receive circuitry functions
in the same manner as the transmit circuit except that the data
flow is in the opposite direction. Figure 3. 45 shows the data
path for the current loop receive side.

=Y OF OPERATION 3-62 PRKLIHINARY RELEASE 9/89

+---------------------------------------------------------------*
1 HARTIIU-DEKERT~ICALMAHUAL 1 SPETRUH 1000 SYsTEn I TulOllI
+--------------------------'------------------------------------+

---- ----
CURRENT LOOP TRP
PCB290A
1

Figure 3.45: Current Loop TRP - Block Diagram

PRELIHIHARY RELEASE 9/89 3-63 TWEORY OF OPERATION

+-----------------------------------------------------------*
I MARTIN-DEKERTECENICALHANIJAL I SPEcTRIm 1000 SYsTrn I TnlOllI

3.07.0s ISHI HASTER HODULE The Intrinsically Safe Modular Inter-

-face (ISMI) Master Module is a BASFEEA certified module that
distributes communications and power to the Spectrum 1000 Display
Panel. The ISMI Master can supply power and communications to 3
display controllers and up to 3 slave ISMI modules. Each slave
module can drive 3 display controllers (Reference Figure 3.37).
A maximum of 12 display controllers can be driven by the ISMI
modules. Figure 3.46 displays an ISMI Master assembly and a
block diagram is shown in Figure 3.47.
The ISMI Master module can be functionally divided into two sec-
tions. The first is the data communications signal level trans-
lation and the second is the power/signal attenuation and distri-
bution section. The dual (redundant) communications channels
enter the ISMI Master through connectors 52 and 53. The current
loop signals are routed through full wave bridges. These bridges
assure that the proper polarity signal is connected to the opto-
couplers. The opto-couplers provide electrical isolation and
signal level translation. The output of the opto-couplers are a
TTL level signal (+SVDC or OVDC). The TTL data signals are fed
to buffer amplifiers. These amplifiers provide the power neces-
sary to drive the data lines of three power/signal attenuators :
and the ISMI Slave module.

ISMI MASTER ISMI SLAVE

Figure 3.46: Intrinsically Safe Modular Interfaces

THEORY OF OPEBATION 3-64 PRELIHIBlARY RELEASE 9/89

+--------------------------------------------------------------+
I HARTIH-DElUZRTECENICALHANUAL
+------------------------------------------------------------*
1 SPBCTRUH 1000 SYsTml 1 mlo11I

Power from the ISPS enters the Display Panel through connector Jl
of the ISMI Master module. From there, it is routed to four
power attenuators and the output connector to the ISMI Slave
module(s). One power attenuator feeds a SVDC regulator that
supplies isolated 5V to the communications section of the ISMI
Master module. Power and data communications are routed to three
power/signal attenuators. These attenuators limit the amount of
voltage and current that the display controllers can receive.
Each of these attenuators supply data and power to one display
controller board. The outputs from the signal/power attenuators
go to connectors J5, J6, and 57 which are tied to display con-
trollers #l, #2, and #3 respectively. Connector 58 provides
power and data to ISMI slave module(s).
Display controller #l of the ISMI Master module is the only
controller allowed to transmit data. Transmit data is received
through connector 55 and passes through the power/signal attenua-
tor. This data is routed to the communications section where it
is divided into two signals for redundant communications to the
signal conditioner. Both signals are converted to current loop
and routed out of the Display Panel through connectors 52 and 53.

J2
cmn 1

Jl PCIVER ATTENUATOR

II lr'
PUVER

H12010A
L p-p----- KM1 MASTER MODULA

Figure 3.47: ISMI Master Module - Block Diagram

PRELIn.Ibuap RELEASE 9/89 3-65 TEEORY OF OPKRATION

+------------------------------------------------------------+
1 HARTIN-DEKER TBCENICAG XANUAL I sp=tJH 1000 SYsTm I lwlOllI
+------I--u-------------------------------~------~-----+

3.07.06 ISKI SLAVE Ly)wLE The ISMI Slave modules (H12009A)

provide power and signal attenuation for their respective display
controllers. Each Slave module drives three display controllers.
Each Slave module also routes the power and signal data to the
next Slave in the chain. A maximum of three ISMI Slave modules
can be chained to a ISMI Master module.
Power and data is brought in from an ISMI Master/Slave module
through connector 54. The RXDl and RXD2 signals are buffered to
provide enough power to drive the three power/signal attenuators
and the next ISMI Slave module. The three power/signal attenua-
tors feed their respective display controllers through connectors
J5, J6, and 57. Power and data is routed to the next ISMI Slave
module through connector 58.

H12009A
L p-----p-- ISMI SLAVE MODULE 1

Figure 3.48: ISMI Slave Module - Block Diagram

=Y OF OPERATION 3-66 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
1 HARTIN-DEICER TBCHNICAL HANUAL I SPECTRUH 1000 SYSTEW I !m1011~
+--------------------------------------------------~------------+

3.07.07 DISPLAY COHllZOLL.ER BOARD The Display Controller PCB

(PCB295A) is an -intelligent microcontroller based PCB. It re-
ceives data and power from the ISMI modules and provides data,
clock, and regulated power to the Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD).
Figure 3.49 shows the Display Controller assembly and a block
diagram of the controller is shown in Figure 3.50. The Display
Controller has the following features:
b Microcontroller based (8031)
32K x 8 Program Memory (EPROM)
1
8K x 8 Variable Memory (STATIC RAM)
1
Serial Communications
h
Watch Dog Timer
1
LCD Display Interface
t Keyboard Interface

MARTIN-DECKER CEDAR PARK, TX MADE IN USA-

Figure 3.49: Micro Display Controller

PRELININARY RELE44SE 9/89 3-67 !l!HBORY OF OPEBATION

+-------------------------------------------------------------+
I HARTIN-D~TECENICALHABXIAL
+---------------------------
1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTPII I !mJlOllI
---------------m--m---------+

The 8031 microcontroller provides the intelligence for the Dis-

play Controller board. Under program control, it decodes incom-
ing data packets, translates the data to a form usable by the LCD
controller ICs, and outputs that data to the proper LCD control-
ler.
The 8031 microcontroller drives the bus control, address, and
data lines. It fetches program data from the Program Memory,
decodes it, and then executes the decoded instruction. The Eprom
memory stores the program information. The volatile memory
contains system variables and configuration information. Switch
Block 1 (SWl) is read on power up/reset. The switch setting
defines which one of the 16 possible display configurations this
controller is driving. The display identification number (ID)
also tells the microcontroller which data packets to decode.
Receive data enters the controller at TBl. Two channels of
identical data is received. On power up, the microcontroller
selects receive channel RXD 1. If data is not received by the
microcontroller for XX seconds, the controller switches to re-
ceive channel RXD 2. The controller will alternate between the
two receive lines until it receives valid data. The microcon-
troller decodes valid data addressed to it and translates the
data into LCD segment data. It then outputs address information
out connector Pl to select the proper LCD display driver IC. It
then serially clocks out the LCD segment data to the display
driver.

I
I 1

I
VATCH
PCB295A
DOG

TIMER
-
MICRO DISPLAY
CDNTROLLER

1
Figure 3.50: Micro Display Controller - Block Diagram

TEEDRY OF OPWTIOBJ 3-68 PRELININARY RET,EASE 9/89

+---------------------------------------- --------------------+
1 HARTIN-DECKERTEZHNICALHAIW& 1 SPETRDH 1000 SYSTEn 1 !tWlOllI
+-----------------------------------------------------------*

If the Display Controller ID number is 00, then this display

controller also has the responsibility of scanning the Spectrum
1000 keyboard through connector 52. The microcontroller enables
the keyboard select lines and then reads the scan lines checking
for key depressions. If a key depression is detected, it packe-
tizes the key information and sends the data to the Spectrum 1000
Signal Conditioner.
The micro display controller boards have a built in watch dog
timer circuit. During normal operation, the microcontroller
continuously retriggers the watch dog timer, level allowing it to
time out. If the microcontroller fails to reset on power up or
malfunctions due to external causes, the watch dog timer will
time out and attempt to reset the microcontroller.
3.07.08 DISPLAY BOARDS The Display Boards PCB287A/8A/9A display
information for the user to read. Figure 3.51 shows a block
diagram that is typical of all 3 display boards. The actual
differences between the three boards is in the number of LCD
controller ICs and the type, number, and arrangement of LCDs.
---

SELECT LINES 3 T- 16
ra OTHER
DISPLAY DRIVERS
. ‘AAXIWU 16)

1 PCB287A/8A/9A
--- DISPLAY BOARD 1
--
Figure 3.51: Display Board - Block Diagram

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 3-69 TEHORY OF OPERATION

+---------------w---P ------------------------------------+

IMARTIN-DBCKFXTECFlNICALlUWtJAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTrn I TulOllI

+-------------------- --B--------B-- ------------------+

3.07.08 DISPLAY BOARD - VERTICAL The Vertical Display Board

(PCB287A) has a total of 15 LCD controller ICs. 6 of the con-
trollers drive 3 vertical bar graphs. The other 9 controllers
drive 6 display with 6 digits per display. Figure 3.52 shows an
assembly drawing of PCB287A.

m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m m
1m i
1m
Figure 3.52: Vertical Display Board
3.07.09 DISPLAY WUBD - HORIIXONTAL The Horizontal Display Board
(PCB288A) has a total of 10 LCD controller ICs. 4 of the con-
trollers drive 2 vertical bar graphs. The other 6 controllers
drive 4 displays with 6 digits per display. Figure 3.53 shows an
assembly drawing of PCB288A.
3.07.10 DISPLAY BOARD - CIRCULAR m The Circular Meter Dis-
play Board (PCB289A) has a total of 4 LCD controller ICs which
drive on circular meter LCD display. Figure 3.54 shows an assem-
bly drawing of PCB289A.
3.07.11 EmPAD mmlLB The Keypad Module (H11062A) is a simple 16
key matrix that enables the user.to control the functions of the
Spectrum 1000. The Keypad has four control lines and four scan
lines. These lines are connected to Display Controller 111 of the
ISMI Master. This controller monitors the Keypad for key depres-
sions.

TEBORY OF OPERATION 3-70 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

1 MARTIN-DEcI(wTEC'ENICALHANUAL 1 SPECTRA 1000 SYST= I ml0lli
+------------------------------------------------------------*

-I I

Figure 3.53: Horizontal Display Board

Figure 3.54: Circular Meter Display Board

PRELInIRilARY RELEASE 9/89 3-71 T'EHJRY OF OPER&TICM

1 MARTIN-DECILER TECBNICAL HUUA& 1 SPE~~~IM 1000 SYSTEM 1 -lolli
+--------------------- -----_I_

Figure 3.55: Keypad

TEHORY OF OP~TIOU 3-72 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

+---------------------------------------------~----~---------+
1 -IN-DBCXERT=ENICALllAMzAL 1 sPBcTRlm 1000 SYSTEH 1 TulOllI
+---------------------~ ---------------------------------+

3.08 BBLAY/AIABH OIJTPDT HODULBS The Relay/Alarm Output Modules

provide a means to initiate an external event based on an inter-
nal occurrence within the Spectrum 1000. The Spectrum 1000
internal event is a primary or secondary alarm condition and the
external event it initiates is the sounding of an alarm horn or
warning light.
3.08.01 RELAY BMRD The Relay Board (PCB266A) is an STD Bus PCB.
It interfaces directly to the host CPU address and data lines.
The board detects when it is being accessed and turns on the
appropriate relay based on the data sent to it by the host CPU.
Figure 3.56 show an assembly drawing of the Relay Board and a
block diagram is shown in Figure 3.57.
The host CPU address lines are fed to the board decode circuitry.
Data lines from the default address switch block data lines are
also fed to the board decode circuitry. This logic detects when
the board is being accessed and enables the proper relay bank.
There are two banks of 8 relays each. The host CPU then writes a
data byte to the Relay Board. That data is loaded into a data
latch IC. This latch IC turns its 8 relays on or off based on
that data.

Figure 3.56: Relay Card

PRBLIHINABY RBLBASB 9/89 3-73 -Y OF OPERATION

 e---m- ------------------- -------------------------~
+

~W4R!PIN-DEcB[ERTEcB#ICAL~ 1 SPY= 1000 SYSTBW 1 TKLOII~

+---------- --------m--- ----------------------------+

DATA DAT& DATA

BUFFER w * LATCH

-c

ADDRESS
CIRCUIT REPEATED

16 TIMES
-I I

ADDRESS

t ENABLE

SWITCH

SELECT

PCB266A
RELAY CARD
Figure 3.57: Relay Card - Block Diagram
3.08.02 BAILMODNT RKLAY The Railmount Relay (H12120A) is two
double pole double throw relays combined in one package. The
relays are powered by a 24VDC Power Module (PCB296A-02). The
Relay Board (PCB266A) provides the on/off control for the Rail-
mount Relay. The Relay coil operates at 24V DC/AC. The Relay
contacts have a maximum voltage rating of 250V AC/DC and a maxi-
mum steady state current rating of 3 Amps. The contacts can
handle a maximum momentary surge current of 5 Amps. The relay
has a yellow LED power on indicator. Figure 3.58 shows a Rail-
mount Relay assembly.

TEXXkYOFOPHtATIOH 3-74 PRBLUUBIABY RBLBASB 9/89

+--------------------------------------- -------------+
1 HARTIL3-Dl%XBE2T~ICALMhENSAL 1 SPmzTRDx 1000 SYSTBU I TwlOllI
+----------------------------- ---------------------+

Figure 3.58: Railmount Relay

PRBLINIBABY RBLBhSB 9/89 3-75 TEBORY OF OP-TION

+-----------------------------------------------~---~------+
1 MARTIN-DHXWR TECHNICAL W4NDAL 1 SPECTRtJH 1000 SYSTEW 1 TUlOllI

3.09 AN?iLoG OUTPUT HODtILES The Analog Output Modules provide 8

channels of 0 to 20 mAmp current loop signals to drive analog
devices. Kit KT1092A provides all of the components necessary to
equip the Spectrum 1000 with analog outputs. The Kit consists of
the Digital to Analog Converter Board (PCB343A-Ol), the interface
cable (H12107A), the Analog Output Termination Board (H12121A),
and a TRP 24V Power Module (PCB296A-02).
3.09.01 DIGITAL !YG ANALOG CONVERTER BOARD The Digital to Analog
Converter Board (DAC) (PCB343A-01) is an STD Bus PCB that pro-
vides 8 channels of programmable current loop outputs. Figure
3.59 shows a Digital to Analog PCB and a block diagram is shown
in Figure 3.60.
The board interfaces directly to the host CPU Bus. A board level
decoder monitors the Bus address lines and detects when the board
is being addressed. Switch block SW1 is used to set the default
board address. The board address decoder outputs an enable
signal to the DAC channel decoder. The channel decoder monitors
the lower 3 address lines to determine which channel is being
selected. The host CPU outputs an 8 bit digital byte to the DAC.
PCB. This byte of data is loaded into the selected channel's :
digital to analog convert chip. The dac IC outputs an analog
voltage which is connected to the input of a buffer amplifier.
The analog buffer in combination with an output transistor pro-
vide a constant current output that is proportional to the output
voltage of the dac IC.

Figure 3.59: Digital to Analog Converter

lXEOEY OF OPEIULTIOYI 3-76 PRBLININARY RBLBASB 9/89

1 MARTIN-DEKER TECHNICAL MANDAL 1 SPECTRUH 1000 SYSTM I TulOllI
+a-----------a----- ---_----------------- ------------------+

I------ l
II
b
P2

I
I
SELECT
I&

I
ANALOG/DIGITAL
CONVIZRTER
I

CIRCUIT REPEATES I
I
I
(8) TIKS
DATA I
*
DATA b DATA
em---
BWFER
PCB343kOi-
I I
I
J
DIGITAL TO ANALOG CONVERTER

Figure 3.60: Digital to Analog Converter - Block Diagram

3.09.02 luu4Laz ODTPm! TKRMINATION BOARD The Analog Output Termi-
nation Board (H12121A) is a railmount assembly that provides
screw type terminals for ease of connection to an external analog
device. It also provides transient voltage protection for each
channel. All 8 analog channel outputs are protected with bidi-
rectional transorbs. The 24V power source is also protected with
transorbs. Figure 3.61 shows an Analog Output Termination Module
Assembly.

PRBLInINaRY RBLBASB 9/89 3-77 -Y OF OPERATION

1 HARTIN-DEKERTECHNICALHANUAL 1 t3~am 1000 SYST= 1 m0lli
+ -__---------_---__-------- ----v-----m--------+

SETION 4.0

4.01 GENERAL ImRHATION

4.01.01 GENERAL The SPECTRUM 1000 Data Acquisition System is
based on an advanced electronic micro-computer system. Trouble-
shooting this type of system requires experience in several
areas. The technician should have experience with low voltage
CMOS and TTL electronic circuits, as well as high speed digital
computer processing and bus architecture. A considerable amount
of analog circuitry is also included in the system. Any techni-
cian troubleshooting or repairing the system should have a thor-
ough knowledge of how the system operates under normal circum-
stances and be familiar with the block diagram and the installa-
tion of the system. This manual should be available for use as a
guide in the troubleshooting procedures and a reference to var-
ious printed circuit board locations, switches, terminal blocks,
connectors, wiring, indicators, and power supplies. A review of
the theory of operation in Section 3 may be required if the
technician has not dealt with the system in some time. Repair of:
the system is normally limited to field replacement of a failed
printed circuit board or module. Board level repair is not nor-
mally attempted in a field environment. This manual deals with
troubleshooting down to the board level but not beyond. For
further troubleshooting information, refer to the specific tech-
nical manual for the board or module in question. In some cases,
specific information about the operation of a particular board is
required. In this case, adequate information will be given to
determine if a board or module is good or bad.

PEBLININARY RBLBWB 9/89 4-l

+--------------------------------- --~-----------+
1 HARTIbFD~TECENICALHAHDAL 1 SPBCTRDH 1000 SYsTrn I TmOllI
+--------------------------------------------~-----------+

4.02 OPERATIONAL CHECK-OUT

4.02.01 OPERATION The function of the SPECTRUM 1000 Data Acquisi-
tion System is to continuously query various types of analog and
digital sensors, scale this information against preset calibra-
tion values, then pass the engineering unit information on to LCD
type displays or other output devices. It also must check the
current value of any sensor against operator set alarm setpoints
and activate an alarm if these are exceeded.
4.02.02 FDNCTIOBWLITY The purpose of troubleshooting any system
is to locate a source of failure, remove the defective module,
and replace it. To locate the source of failure, the system must
first be tested for functionality. This test should demonstrate
the incorrect operation and be repeatable while the specific
failure is detected. Due to the complexity of the SPECTRUM 1000
Data Acquisition System and the many subsystems it contains, an
operational test of the overall system integrity should be per-
formed before beginning any in depth troubleshooting. An apparent
failure in one area may be caused by a defective module in anoth-
er area. An overall operational test will check the entire system
and help locate the general area of failure. The technician can :
then proceed with an in-depth search knowing that he has located
the subsystem in question. Any operational testing for function-
ality of the system must be done in five areas.
1. Overall sensor to display and alarm performance.
2. Display Panel performance.
3. Sensor calibration to engineering units.
4. Internal self-testing of electronic hardware.
5. Optional equipment and external hardware.
If these five areas are evaluated and shown to be functional, the
operator can be assured of acceptable system performance. If any
of these areas is determined to be non-functional or marginal,
the technician will have a good idea of the area to approach
during troubleshooting.

4-2 PRBLININABY RBLBMB 9/89

+--------------------- -w---e--- ---------------------------+

1 HARTIN-D-TECENICALHAHML 1 SPECTRUH 1000 SYSTIM 1 TulOll~

+- ---------v-----m-- -------a--B---m---+

4.03 VISUAL AND FmER CHECK

4.03.01 VISUAL Check Most failures in the system can be found by

a simple visual check of the equipment and its condition. Before
beginning any testing, the technician should visually confirm the
following;
1. The system is installed correctly and was functioning
correctly prior to the failure.
2. All the enclosures are intact and appear reasonably
clean, dry, and functional.
3. All sensors are intact and appear reasonably clean and
functional.
4. All wiring is in place and undamaged.
5. All hoses and hydraulic systems are in place and appear
operational.
6. Electrical power is provided to all necessary enclosures
and connectors.
Refer to Section 2 in TWlOll-IO (SPECTRUM 1000 Installation and
Operation manual) for the normal appearance of the equipment and:
to Section 3 in TWlOll-IO as well as the installation drawings .
for the location of enclosures, sensors, wiring, hoses, and power
connections. A few minutes spent visually inspecting the equip-
ment can save several hours of troubleshooting only to find a
damaged or broken cable. Refer to Section 5 in TWlOll-IO for the
normal maintenance check-out procedure.
4.03.02 APPLY HAITI POUIZR l!0 TEE SYSTEe( After confirming that all
equipment is in place and appears functional, the technician
should check to make sure all external voltage taps are set at
the correct voltage (110/220 VAC). If these are correct and
attached, apply power to the system and switch all external power
switches to the ON position. Several indicators should be lit
inside the Signal Conditioner enclosure and all LCD segments on
the Display Panel should blink ON and OFF several times. If this
doesn't happen, recheck for external AC power and begin trouble-
shooting the main DC power supply system. If the Display Panel
doesn't come ON, check-out the Intrinsically Safe Power Supply
and the wiring to the Display Panel. If no numbers are indicated
on the Display Panel after the initial all segment blink test and
power is supplied (only "--*I is displayed), begin troubleshooting
inside the Signal Conditioner enclosure. If numbers appear on the
Display Panel then much of the system is at least capable of
functioning. This is a major step in the operational testing
process.

PRELIHIBIARY RELEASE 9189 4-3 -1NG

+-------------------------- ----------------------------------*
1 HARTIN-DEICERTEcBNICALHANtWL I SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTm 1 TulOll)
+-----------------------------------------------------------*

4.03.03 RESTART HAIN COMPUTERS If power is applied following an

extended period -(more than one week), the main Host micro-
processors should be warm started. This is not normally neces-
sary, but will help reduce the possibility of abnormalities
caused by power-up glitches. The procedure for this is discussed
later in this section and in Section 4. Do not arbitrarily re-
start or reset the Host computer without a knowledge of the
implications of doing so. Resetting the Host computer can cause
complete loss of all calibration data, channel assignments and
alarm setpoints.
4.04 OVERALL PRRmmmNa cHEcu
4.04.01 0VERALL SENSOR !lX3 DISPLAY AElD ALARH PB The next
step in the process is to verify overall system throughput. The
technician should verify that each sensor has some effect on its
corresponding LCD display. This is done by manually operating
each sensor through at least part of its span and visually check-
ing to see if the LCD number or bargraph assigned to that sensor
changes. Linear or proportional operation is not important at
this stage. Simply verify that changing the sensor setting causes
a change on the display. Do this for every sensor in the system..
If no change is seen for any sensor, begin troubleshooting inside
the Signal Conditioner. If a change is not seen for one or only a
few sensors, begin troubleshooting each of those specific sensor
systems.
Since activation of the alarm horn is a primary function of the
system, operation of the alarm system is very critical to an
overall function test. The horn should be checked during the
normal maintenance check-out as described in Section 5 and if a
possible failure is detected, immediate action taken to repair
the system. The alarm system is quickly and easily checked. Using
the Display Panel keypad, change the high setpoint for any non-
alarming display from its normal value to a new value that is
below the current number being displayed. This will put the
system into an alarm condition. The display will begin to blink,
the alarm horn will sound and the alarm light, if installed, will
illuminate. Press the ALARM ACKnowledge key on the keypad. The
alarm should be immediately silenced but the display will
continue to blink. This confirms that the alarm can indeed be
activated and silenced. For further check-out, if possible, lower
the value on the display below the new high setpoint. The display
should stop blinking. This confirms that the system is correctly
clearing an alarm when it ceases.. Finally, reset the alarm high
setpoint to the original value that was set when you began. If
any of this process fails to operate properly, begin
troubleshooting the alarm system inside the Signal Conditioner.

-1NG 4-4 PNELININANY mms~ 9189

+--------------------------------e--w.----- ---------a-----+

1 H A R T I N - D E C ~ W R T E C E N I C A L H A W J A L I S P E C T E W H1 0 0 0 S Y S T r n I TwlO llI
+ ---------------------- ---------a----- ---------------+

4 .0 5 D IS P L A Y P A N E L C H E Z K
4 .0 5 .0 1 D IS P L A Y P A N E L P - T o c o n firm correct o p e r a tio n of
th e L C D s e g m e n ts o n th e Display P a n e l , a self test is included in
e a c h o f th e Display C o n trollers. T o invoke this test, set A L L
fo u r o f th e switches o n th e Display C o n troller b o a r d to th e
" C L O S E D " or " O N " position. T h e Display C o n trollers a r e m o u n te d o n
th e back o f th e Display B o a r d s inside th e Display P a n e l . A ctiva-
tio n o f this test will p u t th e Display C o n troller in a n internal
test m o d e . It will ignore a n y c o m m u n i c a tio n s c o m i n g to it from
th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r . T h e test will b e g i n by blinking all th e
s e g m e n ts o n th e Display B o a r d . It will th e n s e q u e n tially tu r n
e a c h s e g m e n t O N th e n O F F . It d o e s this a t a b o u t o n e s e g m e n t p e r
s e c o n d . O n e s e g m e n t o n e a c h L C D display o n th e Display B o a r d will
b e tu r n e d O N in s e q u e n c e . V e r i fy correct o p e r a tio n o f this test
by observing th e front o f th e display b o a r d . R e m o v i n g th e Display
B o a r d from th e m o u n tin g fram e is n o t normally required for this
test. T h e test will a u to m a tically cycle to th e b e g i n n i n g w h e n it
reaches th e e n d . T o te r m i n a te th e display test, retu r n th e
switches o n th e Display C o n troller b o a r d to their previous posi-
tio n . T h e test will c o m p l e te a n d th e L C D s will s h o w n u m b e r s as
th e y receive n e w inform a tio n from th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r . Failure
to correctly reset th e switches will c a u s e incorrect o p e r a tio n of
th e Display B o a r d . R e p e a t th e L C D test for e a c h o f th e Display
B o a r d s in th e Display P a n e l . N o te : W h e n th e display test is
p e r fo r m e d o n th e Display C o n troller a tta c h e d to th e k e y p a d ,
c o m m u n i c a tio n L INK errors m a y b e g e n e r a te d . This is b e c a u s e th e
Display C o n troller is ignoring c o m m u n i c a tio n s a n d r u n n i n g th e
display test. T h e c o m m u n i c a tio n L INK error o n th e S Y S T E M S T A T U S
display will a u to m a tically clear a fe w seconds a fter th e display
test is te r m i n a te d .

P R K L In IFlA R Y R E L E A S E 9 1 8 9 4-5
+------------- ------s------v- ---‘------------------+

1 H A R T I N - D H X E R T E C E B ~ I C A L H A H D A L I S P E C T R D H1 0 0 0 S Y S T m ! I TwlO ll~
+ -----------------------------------------------------+

4 .0 6 S E N S O RC A L IB R A T IO B I
4 .0 6 .0 1 S E N S O RC A L IFJRA T IO N T O E N G INEERIIWZD B J ITS For th e inform a -
tio n displayed o n th e Display P a n e l to b e reliable a n d accurate ,
it m u s t b e c o n firm e d th a t th e e n g i n e e r i n g units indicated corre-
s p o n d linearly to th e level or e v e n t b e i n g m e a s u r e d . This trans-
lation from sensor o u tp u t to e n g i n e e r i n g units displayed is d o n e
inside th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r C o m p u ter a n d calibrated during th e
calibration p r o c e d u r e a t installation. T o c o n firm correct trans-
lation from sensor to display, a k n o w n accurate stim u lus must be
applied to th e sensor. T h e corresponding display is th e n checked
to s e e if it is s h o w i n g th e correct value. T h e stim u lus is th e n
scaled u p a slight i n c r e m e n t a n d th e display is checked a g a i n .
This p r o c e d u r e is r e p e a te d a g a i n a n d a g a i n over th e e n tire span
o f e a c h sensor. This is a difficult a n d tim e c o n s u m i n g p r o c e dure
to p e r fo r m accurately for all th e sensor i n p u ts. B u t, d o to th e
design n a tu r e o f th e A n a l o g In p u t system in th e S ignal C o n d i tio n -
er C o m p u ter, o n e sensor i n p u t c a n b e checked for linearity with a
r e a s o n a b l e a s s u m p tio n th a t th e o thers correspond. If several
sensors a r e in d o u b t, e a c h o n e m u s t b e checked individually using
a k n o w n accurate refe r e n c e source to c o m p a r e it with.
4 .0 6 .0 2 A N A IB G - S C M I R C E S e v e r a l different refe r e n c e
sources a r e available th a t a r e suitable for checking th e accuracy
o f a n a l o g sensor i n p u ts. T h e m o s t c o m m o n m e th o d u s e d to check
hydraulic pressure transducers is a test or refe r e n c e g a u g e . This
is a very accurate p o r ta b l e g a u g e th a t h a s b e e n calibrated to a
highly accurate traceable refe r e n c e source. T h e g a u g e is in-
stalled in th e hydraulic line a n d pressure is applied. The gauge
r e a d i n g should th e n a g r e e with th e displayed value o n th e display
p a n e l . This m e th o d is suitable for checking th e accuracy o f th e
display to a b o u t 1 or 2 % o f s p a n , b u t requires o p e n i n g th e hy-
draulic line. A n o th e r c o m m o n source o f m e a s u r e m e n t is a n elec-
tronic calibrator. This is usually a small h a n d h e l d device th a t
c a n apply a n accurate electrical stim u lus to th e sensor i n p u t. In
e ffect this calibrator acts as a sensor sim u lator. A device such
as this is u s e ful for checking b o th th e sensor o u tp u t a n d sensor
i n p u t. T h e m o s t c o m m o n accuracy o f th e s e is l% , b u t very e x p e n -
sive p o r ta b l e units c a n h a v e a n accuracy e x c e e d i n g 0 .0 1 % . D e p e n d -
ing o n th e p a r a m e ter b e i n g m e a s u r e d , th e wiring m a y h a v e to b e
disconnecte d to u s e a calibrator. A third a n d less costly m e th o d
is to u s e a c o m m o n digital volt/ohm /m illiam p m e ter ( D V M ) . W h e n
th e D V M is correctly installed in th e wiring b e tween th e sensor
a n d th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r , it m e a s u r e s ,either th e voltage or
current flo w b e tween th e sensor a n d th e a n a l o g i n p u t. This c a n
th e n b e converte d m a n u a l l y to o b tain th e predicted displayed
value. M o s t D V M s h a v e a n accuracy o f 1 to 5 % a n d a r e very u s e ful
in checking *th e o p e r a tio n a n d accuracy o f a sensor. Regardless of
th e m e th o d u s e d to check th e accuracy o f a sensor, r e m e m b e r th a t
th e o p e r a tor is using th e n u m b e r s displayed a n d h e m a y deliber-
a tely w a n t th e displayed n u m b e r s to b e scaled u p or d o w n d e p e n d -
ing o n th e installation.

4-6 P R E L ININANY - E 9189

I HARTIN-DHXERTECRNICALHANDAL 1 SP=~ 1000 SYSTEMS1 m0lli
.

4.06.03 PULSE REFERENCE SOURCES Pulse type sensors are less

likely to be inaccurate but are more difficult to accurately
check calibration. Most pulse outputs are time based and any
reference source must have an extremely accurate time base in it.
Many simple time based displays can be checked with an acceptable
degree of accuracy using a stopwatch and counting the operations
as they occur. However, some displays are much more difficult. To
check the accuracy of a sensor detecting and displaying the rate
at which an electric motor is turning requires special test
equipment designed for that purpose. General purpose calibrators
are available that can supply a highly accurate frequency source
and can measure the rate of incoming pulse to within about 1%.
Even though these calibrators cannot be used in all circum-
stances, they are very useful when verifying the accuracy of most
pulse type sensors.

PRELIHINARY RELEASE 9189 4-7

 ---------I--- --------------------------------------------+

HARTIN-DBCiCHt TlXHNICALHAIW AL 1 SPECTRUH 1000 SYSTim I !mlO ll~

+---------------------------------------
i

-----------W -B-----+

4.07 SELFTESTIffiANDERRORCODES
4.07.01 INTERNAL SELF-TESTING O F ELECTRONIC HARDW ARE The SPECTRUM
1000 Data Acquis ition System has extensive internal self-
diagnos tic s . Many self-tes t routines have been designed into the
s y s tem. These run at power-up and periodically during operation.
They will query each major s y s tem component and report any fail-
ures on either the Display Panel SYSTEM STATUS indicator or
ins ide the Signal Conditioner. The operator cannot invoke these
tes ts , they run independently and the results are displayed in
real-time. The technic ian should refer to the SYSTEM STATUS
indicator on the Display Panel and the various indicators ins ide
the Signal Conditioner if a possible error is suspected. Many
times, the error has already been detec ted by the Host computer
and is noting it on these indicators.
4.07.02 SYSTm STATUS INDITE The SYSTEM STATUS indicators on
the Display Panel will indicate major areas of failure that would
concern the daily operator. These areas are designed to s imply
alert the operator of a possible problem. They do not give spe-
c ific information about the nature of the failure, other than the
general area involved. THe seven areas covered are;
1. SIG COND - A failure has occurred ins ide the Signal
Conditioner. Refer to the MATS error display ins ide the
Signal Conditioner for the code and the MATS ERROR code
chart in Table 4.1 for an explanation and appropriate
action. Refer to the HHT error code display for addition-
al codes and the HHT ERROR code chart in Table 4.2
2. PWR SUPPLY - AC power has been los t. The Signal Condi-
tioner is operating on the battery backup.
3. BATTERY - The battery back-up has discharged to 30% of
capacity . System shut down will occur in 15 seconds.
(NOTE - this feature may not be ins talled).
4. CPU l/CPU 2 - The primary or secondary computer is ac-
tive.
5. LINK - Communications between the Display Panel and the
Signal Conditioner have been interrupted or los t.
6. SENSO R - A sensor has been determined to be out of range.
(NOTE - this feature may not be ins talled).
7. CALIB - The calibration information for an active or
displayed sensor is not present. Need to recalibrate.
(NOTE - this feature may not be ins talled).

4.07.03 SIGNAL CONDITlOHER ERROR WDES The error codes displayed

ins ide the Signal Conditioner cover much more detail than the
SYSTEM STATUS display . These do not normally concern the daily
operator. They are used only when the SYSTEM STATUS indicator on
the Display Panel shows an error. The technic ian will then open
the Signal Conditioner and note the codes being displayed. The
Signal Conditioner error codes are displayed in two places. Each
of the display s shows a different set of error codes and indi-

-1NG 4-a PRELININARY RKLEASE 9189

1 HARTIbFD~TECHHIChLHMML 1 SPETium 1000 SYsTm I !mlOllI

cates different types of failures. The first set of error codes

is displayed on the MATS board on the Signal Conditioner Computer
STD Bus, This board is quickly located because it has two large
red seven segment LED displays mounted on it. This board also
contains several switches used for resets and other purposes. The
Signal Conditioner Computer STD Bus is inside the Signal Condi-
tioner in the upper portion of the enclosure. If a ribbon cable
obscures view of the LED displays, gently move it for a better
view. The displays show two digits that represent a two digit
error code. The top display is the first digit and the bottom
display the second digit. The normal display is 00. If anything
else is displayed, refer to the MATS board error codes in Table
2.1

PRELINIlNhRY R.ELEhSE 9189 4-9 mIffi

 r
i HARTIbl-DRCKERTECEWICAL HAmAL I SPECTRDH 1000 SYsTEn I TwlOllI
+---------------------------------------------------------------+

MATS
ERROR ERROR APPROPRIATE
CODE DEFINITION ACTION
+- +
00 Normal operation, no errors Check for CPU operation

81 User interface task failure iJarm~start reset

82 Scan task failure Warm start reset
83 Calibration terminal failure Check HHT, CPI, CPU
84 DAC task failure Check DAC
85 ADC task failure Check ADC
86 PIB task failure Check PIB
87 System status task failure Warm start reset
88 Scan task failure Warm start reset

c5 Cold Start has occurred Restore alarms and channels

DD CPU operation terminated Harm start reset

FF No operation, MATS default Check MATS, CPU, SIO, RTC

Table 4.1: MATS Error Codes

4-10 PRELIHIBu4RY RELEASE 9189

 ----a---v------ B-------P- ----------a-------+
i MARTIN-DECKERTXEMICALHABXJAL
+ ------------------
1 sPEcTRtm 1000 SYSTm I !mlOll~
----B-----B.---+

4.07.04 EET ERROR CODE DISPLAY The second error display is on the
HHT. It is under the menu heading "2>VIEW/CLR ERRS *' To show this
display, press the "CLEAR" key on the HHT keypad several times.
The display should indicate "l>CAL. LOG. CH.". When the 'l>CAL.
LOG. CH. " is displayed, press the "(down arrow)" button one
time. The display should indicate '2>VIEW/CLR ERRS ". Press the
"ENTER" button one time. The display should now indicate "LOO Rxx
DO0 FOO" (where xx is any number between 00 and FF). The L number
(link errors) should indicate 00 and be stable (not
incrementing). This indicates that the Signal Conditioner Comput-
er is successfully communicating with the Display Panel. The R
number (resets since cold start) can be any number as long as it
is not incrementing. The D number (errors on reset) and F number
(runtime errors) must be 00. If not, then some part of the system
has failed and should be repaired before continuing. These D and
F numbers are the HHT error codes. They are in HEX format and
each bit corresponds to a particular device in the system. If a
particular bit is set, then the Host computer has detected a
failure in that area. The bit definition under each number is the
same, but the D and F numbers have different meanings. The D
number represents "device failure on initialization". This means
the device represented by the error bit failed to initialize :
properly. The F number represents "device failure while on-line'*.
This means the device represented by the error bit failed to
correctly respond during operation and it returned an error. In
either case, the device represented by the error flag is ques-
tionable and should be replaced. Refer to Table 4.2 below for the
definition of each device bit in the D and F error numbers.

PRELIMINARY RELEASE 9189 4-11

+----------------------------------------- a---~----------~~~-+

1 M A R T IN-DEICER T E C H N I C A L H A N U A L I S P E clm J M 1 0 0 0 S Y sTrn I Tu1011~

H H T E rrors Display
+---------a-------+
[L O O R O O D O 0 F O O 1
+-----------------+

A A A *

/
/I I I \I /\ \
C o m m . Link E rrors -/ / \ \- R u n tim e E rrors
( a c c u m u l a te d c o u n t) / \ (see below)
/ \
R e s e ts S ince C o l d S tart J \- Initialization E rrors
( a c c u m u l a te d c o u n t) (see below)

Device H E X B it D e finition in D or F E rror Number

B it 0 : A D C E rror
B it 1 : P IB l E rror
B it 2 : P IB 2 E rror
B it 3 : N E T W O R KE rror
B it 4 : R T C E rror
B it 5 : H H T E rror
B it 6 : unused
B it 7 : unused

HHT
ERROR ERROR A P P R O P R IA T E
CODE D E F INITIO N A C T IO N
+ ---------------------------------------------------------------
00 N o r m a l o p e r a tio n , n o errors leek for C P U o p e r a tio n
01 A D C failure only leek ADC
02 P IB l failure only leek P IB l
03 A D C a n d P IB l failure leek A D C , S IO
10 R T C failure only leek RTC
11 R T C a n d A D C failure leek ADC, RTC
12 R T C a n d P IB l failure leek P IB l, R T C
13 R T C , A D C , a n d P IB l failure leek A D C , P IB l, R T C
20 H H T failure leek H H T , C P I, C P U
21 H H T a n d A D C failure ieck HHT, ADC
22 H B T a n d P IB l failure leek H H T , P IB l
23 H H T , A D C , a n d P IB l failure leek H H T , A D C , P IB l
30 H H T a n d R T C failure ieck HHT, RTC
31 H H T , R T C , A D C failure leek HHT, RTC, ADC
32 H H T , R T C , P IB l failure leek H H T , R T C , P IB l
33 H H T , R T C , A D C , R T C failure leek b o a r d locations
FF A ll devices h a v e failed leek CPU and STD bus

Table 4 .2 : H H T E rror Codes

4-12 P R E L IM I N A R Y R E L E A S E 9 1 8 9
i MARTIN-DEKERTEZHBICALHAHUAL
+ -----------m---------e
1 sPEcTRuN 1000 SYsTm I !mlOllI
--I-- --------•+

4.08 op~10wm I3QuIpmmf cmm

4.08.01 OPTIONAI; mr~nswr mm V HARDWARE Due to the wide
variety of optional equipment that can be attached to the SPEC-
TRUM 1000 Data Acquisition System, no specific troubleshooting
check-out can be given. In general, if the optional equipment
attached is displaying a value, compare that value to the value
displayed on the Display Panel. If they disagree, then begin
troubleshooting in that area. Confirm that the optional equipment
is operating correctly then check-out the communications link
between the Signal Conditioner and the equipment. If this link is
analog, measure the voltage. If the communications is digital,
more sophisticated equipment may be required. At least measure
the voltage level on the link to determine if the wiring or line
drivers have failed.

PRELININARY RELEASE 9189 4-13

+------------------------------------------- --------------------+
1 HARTIN-DECKER TECHNICAL BlANDAL 1 SPECTRUH 1000 SYM 1 lWlOllI
. T

4.09 LOCATION OF FAILDRE

4.09.01 PROmBLE CAUSE After completing the check-out of each of
the major areas in the system, the technician should have a good
idea of the area in question. Once the area of incorrect opera-
tion has been located the probable cause can be determined. Refer
to the block diagrams of the system in Section 2. Locate the area
of possible failure and check-out each module in that part of the
system. Each module always has some sort of input and gives some
type of output. Determine if the input to the module is correct,
then check to see if the output is also correct. If not, replace
the module. If possible, test the module unloaded before it is
removed from the system. Be aware that some modules may not
function properly when operated in an unloaded condition. This is
particularly true of power supplies.

4.09.02 SIGNi& TRACING Some circuits in the SPECTRUM 1000 Data

Acquisition System operate in a linear flow pattern. This means
they begin at some point, flow to another point, then another and
another, and finally to some end point. Once the area of failure
is located, jump to the end of that particular circuit and check:
for a malfunction. If the end fails to check-out, then back-up to
the next test point and check it. Repeat this back-up and check
until a good signal is found. This will probably narrow the area
of failure down to one or two modules. Check these out and re-
place them if they are questionable. For example, if no voltage
is found on the EXCITATION+ wire to a sensor, then check the
input to the TRP for that sensor. If it has voltage, replace the
TRP board. If no voltage is found at the input of the TRP, check
the output of the Sensor Power Supply. It may be malfunctioning.
Continue this process of looking for good or bad signals until
the failed module is located.

4-14 PRELININARY RELEASE 9189

+-------- P---w ------ -----------+

1 W ~ R T I R - D E ~ I L E E L T E ~ B ~ ~ I C & L M A----I
U ~ R U ,S P E C T R U N1 0 0 0 S Y s T m I TwlO llI
.

4 .1 0 RESET PRomDmEs
4 .1 0 .0 1 G E N E R A LR e s e ttin g a c o m p u ter system like th e S P E C T R U M
1 0 0 0 D a ta A cquisition S ystem is n o t a n u n c o m m o n occurrence. This
type‘ o f real tim e system h a s m a n y o p e r a tio n s g o i n g sim u lta n e o u s -
lY * If a n y o f th e s e o p e r a tio n s g e t o u t o f sync, th e system m a y
h a v e to b e reset to "resync" th e o p e r a tio n s a n d restore proper
fu n c tio n . H o w e v e r , o n rare occasions th e system m a y truly m a l-
fu n c tio n a n d lose s o m e i m p o r ta n t d a ta . In this case it m u s t b e
"reinitialized". This forces th e c o m p u ter to setu p all th e p e -
ripherals from th e b e g i n n i n g , p e r fo r m startup testin g , and get
th e m all g o i n g a g a i n . T h e c o m p u ter g e ts this initial d e fault
state from its E P R O Mm e m o r y a n d restores e a c h o f th e peripherals
to th e state d e fin e d in th e E P R O M . If a n y th i n g w a s c h a n g e d , this
restore will correct it. If a peripheral m a lfu n c tio n e d , th a t
peripheral m a y h a v e to b e restarted from th e d e fault state in its
E P R O M . Regardless o f th e circumstances, c o m p u ter system s m a y h a v e
to b e reset from tim e to tim e . A th o r o u g h u n d e r s ta n d i n g o f th e
o p tio n s a n d c o n s e q u e n c e s o f a p a r ticular type o f reset is impor-
ta n t b e fo r e d o i n g it. O n c e th e reset is c o m p l e te , all inform a tio n
a n d previous states a r e lost. V a luable d a ta m a y h a v e to b e m a n u - :
ally restored or e v e n th e e n tire calibration p r o c e d u r e r e p e a te d '
d u e to a n unwise or incorrect reset.

C A U T IO B l
R e a d a n d u n d e r s ta n d this section th o r o u g h l y RElWRE
a tte m p tin g a reset o f a n y kind. A n i m p r o p e r reset c a n
p e r m a n e n tly d e s troy valuable calibration a n d or a l a r m
d a ta . This inform a tio n c a n n o t b e recovered.

4 .1 0 .0 2 U A R H S T A R T R E S E T ( R E S T A R T ) A w a r m start reset is th e m o s t
c o m m o n type o f reset. It also carries with it th e least possible
d a n g e r o f losing d a ta . A w a r m start reset signals th e C P I b o a r d
to switch to th e o th e r H O S T C P U a n d activate th e m icroprocessors
reset signal. T h e H O S T m icroprocessor r e s p o n d s to this reset by
d o i n g s o m e checks o n th e peripherals, resyncing th e softw a r e ,
clearing a n y p e n d i n g error fla g s , a n d c o n tin u i n g o p e r a tio n . No
d a ta is lost a n d th e state o f o p e r a tio n s h a s n o t c h a n g e d . In
general, all th e peripherals r e s p o n d to th e w a r m start reset in
this s a m e m a n n e r . This type o f reset is a l m o s t c o m p l e tely trans-
p a r e n t to th e o p e r a tor. T h e technician will s e e th e switch in
C P U s a n d 'th e o p e r a tor will n o tice th e c h a n g e in th e S Y S T E M S T A T U S
indicator o n th e Display P a n e l , b u t n o th i n g else h a s c h a n g e d .
This reset will clear u p m o s t o p e r a tin g a b n o r m a l i ties o f th e
system . T h e i m p o r ta n t p a r t o f this reset is th a t th e peripherals
h a v e b e e n rechecked a n d th e softw a r e h a s b e e n restarted. This is
valuable w h e n tracking d o w n a p r o b l e m in th e system . This type o f
reset occurs a u to m a tically w h e n th e p o w e r to th e system is tu r n e d
o n a n d if th e w a tch d o g tim e r o n th e M A T S b o a r d is activated.

P R E L IM I N A R Y R E L E A S E 9 1 8 9 4-15
i MARTIN-DECKER TECRNICAL HANDAL 1 SPECTRA 1000 SYST~ I m0lli

4.10.03 UANH START RESET PROCEDDRE A warm start reset is accom-

plished by momentarily pressing the top most white push-button on
the MATS board. Notice that the two seven segment LED's will
flash as numbers change, then stop to display 00. This indicates
that the warm start reset was successful. Also notice that if the
system was running on CPU1 it has now switched to CPUZ. Pressing
the reset button again will cause the CPI board to switch control
back to CPUl. This reset causes no damage and may be performed at
any time.

4.10.03 COLD START RESET (REINITIALIZE) A cold start reset is

performed very rarely. It reinitializes all the peripherals,
restores all the default values in its own memory and to the
peripherals from the EPROMS, clears all the error codes from the
system, and clears all alarms and channel reassignments. The
result is a completely calibrated but default system. The periph-
erals were not cleared, so the calibration was not lost, but they
have been reinitialized. All channel reassignments are lost. If a
sensor was moved to a sensor channel other than the default
sensor channel, that assignment must be manually restored through
the HHT and the sensor recalibrated. All alarms set by the opera-
tor were cleared, so they must also be manually reset to there
previous value. A cold start reset is required only under very
specific circumstances. If the system cannot be restarted using
the warm start reset AND ALL OPTIONS HAVE BEEN EXHAUSTED, then a
cold start may be required. Another condition requiring a cold
start reset is if the system software is changed. If a different
version of software is installed in the HOST CPU board, a cold
start is required to initialize the system and all the peripher-
als. The last condition requiring a cold start is if a peripheral
such as the ADC or PIB is replaced and it was reset through the
HHT. Refer to the sections below on resetting the ADC and PIB.
Extreme care should be taken before performing a cold start reset
because of the dangers of destroying valuable data. Before begin-
ning a reset, make sure all alarm settings and channel reassign-
ments (if any) are recorded. Restore these after the reset if
required.

4.10.04 COLD START RESET PLEOCEDDREA cold start reset is accom-

plished by holding down the lower two white pushbuttons on the
MATS board and momentarily pressing the upper pushbutton. This is
the same button that was pushed for the-warm start reset. Release
the lower two pushbuttons when the red LEDs display "CS". This is
the code indicating a cold start reset is in progress. The warm
start reset button causes a warm start reset, but when the micro-
processor recovers from the reset, it reads the two lower push-
buttons. If they are both closed, the CPU will begin the cold
start reset procedure. The LED display will change to 00 when the
cold start reset is complete. Immediately begin restoring previ-
ous alarm settings and channel assignments if required.

-1NG 4-16 PRELININARY RELEASE 9189

i HAR!EIH-DEc9saTBcablICAL~~SP~ 1000 SPST~W 1 m0lli

4.10.05 P~IPEERAL RESET PRocmmE Peripheral resets are required

even less often than a cold start reset. A peripheral reset
essentially clears and restarts a peripheral device. ALL CALIBRA-
TION DATA AND CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS ARE LOST. THEY CANNOT BE RECOV-
ERED. All sensors must be recalibrated and all channel assign-
ments redone after a peripheral cold start. Two of these resets
are available in the SPECTRUM 1000 Data Acquisition System. They
are COLD START ADC and COLD START PIB. Both are accomplished
through the HHT menus. Refer to the HHT HOST Mode menu in Figure
4.2. Under the section for ADC FUNCTIONS and also under PIB
FUNCTIONS is the COLD START menu entry. Use the '*up** and "down"
arrows and the "ENTER" key to get to this point in the menu for
the desired peripheral. Pressing the "ENTER" key will prompt for
the appropriate protection code. At this point enter **232** and
press "ENTER". The system will again ask for a confirmation.
Enter this and the reset will begin. A message will indicate if
the cold start was successful. A malfunctioning peripheral cannot
be reset properly, so an error may be displayed if the reset
failed. This type of reset is only required if the ADC or PIB has
been replaced. Do not perform this procedure if the ADC or PIB
have been removed for inspection or power is temporarily removed:'.
Batteries onboard the ADC and PIB will retain all calibration
data for up to 10 years if it is not cleared by a reset.

PRELININARY RELEASE 9189 4-17

+a---- -mI------p ---w--m ---------m-----m--+
1 MARTIN-DECICERT~ICALHANUAL 1 sPBcTRun 1000 SPSTm 1 TwlOll~
. .

4.11 TRouBrasHm1NG FLCW CHARTS

4.11.01 GENERAL The following sections contain flow chart dia-
grams to aid in locating a particular failed module. They are
grouped into the seven major sections of the SPECTRUM 1000 Data
Acquisition System as discussed in Section 2. If the probable
area of failure is known, carefully following these flow charts
will help locate the malfunction. Always begin with the first
flow chart in each section, and proceed as instructed to the next
flow chart. Perform the tests as instructed, determine the re-
sults, and continue or replace the malfunctioning module.
4.11.02 NOHBKRI1JG All the flow charts in one group have the same
first three letters. For example, all flow charts concerning the
AC/DC Power Modules section begin with FCl. FClA is the first
flow chart, and it will give direction to the subsequent flow
charts. Each flow chart also has a title that refers to the
modules or system being checked. This will help the technician
keep track of progress as systems are tested.
4.11.03 TESTS Generally, all required indicators, test points,
and test procedures are described within the flow charts. Howev-:
er, some of the more detailed tests, such as DC power, are refer-
enced in the flow charts and described in more detail in the text
following the flow chart. Perform the tests as described, then
return to the flow chart and proceed.

4-18 PRELIHIBlARY RELEASE 9/89

iHARTIN-DECXBRTJ#XUWG xAlalAL 1 SPECTRDX 1000 SYSTEM I m0lli

4.11.04 FLOW CHART TITLES The seven flow chart groups and the
titles of the flowcharts are listed below;

SPIES PC1 - AC/DC powga mDuLEs

FClA - Rig AC Power
FClB - Battery Backup Power
FClC - Signal Conditioner Power
FClD - Display Panel Power
FClE - Auxiliary Equipment AC Power
FClF - STD Bus DC Power
FClG - Sensor Power Supply DC Power
FClH - ISMI Slave Modules DC Power
FClI - Display COntroller DC Power
FClJ - TRP Motherboard DC Power
FClK - Fan Assembly DC Power
FClL - Sensor Power Supply Auxiliary Devices DC Power
FClM - TRP Power Module DC Power
FClN - Sensor TRP Excitation DC Power
S~IESPCZ -Aluu&G IHPUTHDDULBS
FCZA - Analog Sensor Signals
FCZB - Single Analog Sensor Signals
FCZC - AMP/MUX Board Sensor Signals
FCZD - ADC Board Sensor Signals
mBspc3 -FULSBI~HXXlLES
FC3A - Pulse Sensor Signals
FC3B - Single Pulse Sensor Signals
FC3C - PIB Board Sensor Signals
s=Espc4 -CCMWUTIIpG~
FC4A - System Error Indicators
FCIB - CPU1 Board
FC4C - CPI Board
FC4D - CPU2 Board
FCIE - MATS Board
FC4F - RTC Board
FC4G - Hand Held Terminal
BIBS PC5 - ~CATIMIlywwJLEs
FCSA - Displayed Data
FCSB - Display Panel Communications
FCSC - Transmit Data from SCU to Personal Computer
FCSD - Transmit Data from SCU to Rig Computer
FCSE - Transmit Data from Signal Conditioner
FC5F - Transmit Data from Display Panel
FCSG - Transmit Data from SCU to ISMI Master Module
FCSH - Transmit Data from ISMI-MM to ISMI Slave Modules
FCSI - Transmit Data from ISMI-SM to Displays
SERIES IX6 -RELAY/ALl4W--
FC6A - Relay and Alarm Output
FC6B - Auxiliary Relay Outputs
SERIES Fe7 - ANALOG om!PDT mDDLEs
FC7A - Current Loop Analog Output

PRELIMIW4RY RELEhSE 9/89 4-19

 -I__-

; MART TECEN MAb 1 SP 1oosnsrElr Twlo

----
+

4 AC =
FL CHART SER FCl
AC POWER MODULES

FCl A
RlG
f

4-20 PR RELEASE 9
+
1 HARTIBJ-DH3!CERTECEllNI&~-~SPEcTIuIII 1000 SYSTm I--G
+ -- -+

4.12.01 Rig AC Power

FC’I A SERIES: AC/DC POWER MODULES
NAME: Rig AC Power
FROM: Origin
TO: FClC, FClD, FClE

Proand ta
sgnd caatbnr Pour
Dbplay PaId Parr
AUxalmy EquipmIlt Pwu

UEASURETHE
AC MLTMT AT
melNPuloF
TWE AC WE
REanATm.

PRELInIBmRY RELEASE 9/89 4-21

 --

i lU4RTIH-DBCEERTIpQmICALUUiRJAL~ SPECTRUM 1oooSYSmm I TulOl;i

--- ----+

4.12.02 Battery Backup Power

ABBREVlATlONS USED: FCl B SERIES: AC/DC POWER MOOULES
MDCPS - Main DC Power Supply
ACPP - AC Power Panel BATTERY NAME: Battery Backup Power
9ACKUP FROM: Origin
POWER
TO: FClF, FCl G

4-22 PRELIKIRARY RELEASE 9/89

iMARTII+DBCKERTECHHICAL~ 1 SPBCTRDM 1000 SYSTm 1 RJlOllI
+ --___+

4.12.03 Signal Conditioner Power

ABBREVIATIONS USED: FCl C SERIES: AC/DC POWER MODULES
MDCPS - Main DC Power Supply
ACPP - AC Power Panel NAME: Signal Conditioner Power
scu - Signal Conditioner Unit FROM: fC1 A
TO: FClF, FCl G

PRRLIHIRAEY RRLRASR 9/89 4-23

 --w- --------~~+
+--_-I_-- ----we-

1 MART -----
+ --

4 Display Panel Power

ABBREMAllONS USED FC D
SER AC POWERMODULES
I - Intrinsically S a P o w e r S u p p l y
D P - Disploy P a n e l / NAME Display P a n e l P o w e r
E M - Intrinsically S a M o d u l e FROM FCl A
In terfoce
EM-MM - I Master M o d u l e TO FClH, FCll
FTBl - Field Terminal Block in
the Display P a n e l

Rocud ta
- ml sow Powu
O~bntrolkPOrr

4-24 PREL~ RELBASB 9

 ---- --- -I--
+-- ----

I MARTIN-D-TECEW ICALMAHDAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYsTm I Twlo11;

+ -- --+

4.12.05 Auxiliary Equipent ACPower

FClE SERIES: AC/DC POWER MODULES

/ \ NAME: Aux. Equipment AC Power
FROM: FCl A
TO: NONE

PRELIHINARY RELEASE 9/89 4-25

 -- --
iwABTIB+D- TBCHHICALBU4HUAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYsTEi I Rllolli
+ +

4.12.06 STD Bus DC Power

FCI F
SERIES: AC/DC POWER MODULES
NAME: ST0 Bus DC Power
FROM: FClC
TO: FC4A

4-26 PBELmnamY RELEASE 9/89

i
+--
MARTIN-D~TECliBlICALHAHUAL 1 SPEcTRm 1000 SYSTlm I m011~
-----___+

4.12.07 Sensor Pquer Supply DC Power

FC1 G
SERIES: AC/DC POWER MODULES
NAME: Sensor Power Supply
DC Power
FROM: FCl C
To: FCIJ, FClK, FClL

PRELInIBmRY RELBSB 9/89 4-27

i HARTIN-DECKERTECEBIICAL- 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTml I lwlo11I
+ ----------+

4.12-08 ISHI Slave Modules DC Pover

ABBREVIATIONS USED: FCl H
WI - Intrinsically Safe Module lnterfo SERIES: AC/DC POWER MODULES
ISMI-MM - ISMI Master Module EMI Slave Modules
attached to the keflod DC Power
Display Con troller
ISMI-SMl - ISMI Slave Module 1
first module offer
the Master Module
ISMI-SM2 - ISMI Slave Module 2
second module after
the Master Module yzz - ta0-y
WI-943 - ISMI Slave Module 3 con~Powu
third module after
the Master Module,
(lost in the chain)

proad ta
1) FClD - ol8eioy pad Pouu
AT IQ*-W

4-28 PRBLInImEY RELEASE 9/89

4.12.09 Display Controller DC Power

A6BREVIARONS USED: FCII

EM - Intrinsically Safe Module Interface SERIES: AC/DC POWER MODULES
ISMI-MM - ISMI Master Module NAME: Display Controller
attached to the kemad DC Power
Display Con troller FROM: FCID
ISMI-SM - l!W Slave Module
DC - Olaplay Controller TO: FC4A. FCSA
D8 - Dlsplay Board

- cammulkatbn N061.8

Pmcadta
l)fclO-obpbyPaMlPouu

Repeat loop until all

Display Con trollers (DC)
are measured. then
proceed to FCSA
Communication AAodules.
i MARTIN-DXXES TECEUICAL HiUlUAL 1 sPEcTRlm 1000 SYm 1 TulOllI
+ -+

4.12.10 TRP Hotherboard DCPwer

ABBREVIATIONS USED: FCl J

SERIES: AC/DC POWER MODULES
TRP - Transient Protection
l-RPM6 - TRP Motharboord
TRP-PM - TRP DC Power Module
/fizzA NAME: TRP Motherboard
DC Power
TRP-SNS - Sensor TRP Module FROM: FClG
TRP-CLC - Current Loop Control TRP
TPR-CL - Current Loop TRP TO: FClM, FClN
SPS - Sensor Power Supply

Z+Z
2)fClN-
QP-SJS

I-30 PRELINIW4FkY RBLEASB 9/89

 --w--m ------ --------+
e---
+--

1 HAUT 1 SPgcTRuLl 1000 S Y I lwlo11

+ +

4 Fan A DCPcmer
ABBREVlAllONS USED FC-l K
S P S - Sensor Power Supply SER AC P O W E RM O D U L E S
NAME F a n Assembly
DC Power
FROM FCl G
TO NONE
+---me ---- -- ----------W--+

1 MARTIM-DEEERTEHHICALHANML 1 SPECTRUM 1000 SYSTEn I TulOllI

4.12.12 Sensor Pqver Supply Auxi..iary Devices DC Power

ABBREVIAT?ONS USED: FClL

SPS - Senror Power Supply SERIES: AC/DC POWER MODULES
AUX DEVlCE - Any device being NAME: sensor Power Supply
powered by the S,PS. other than Auxiliary Devices DC Power
the fans and the TRPMB. FROM: FClG
TO: NONE

No
‘&xl $%z”-soucePowuwYDc~

4-32 PRBLIlRIBARY RELEASE 9/89

 --
i HARTIaFDEClCERTIXZQJICALLuLwuL)
- SPEclgDll 1000 SY!sTm 1 TlplOll~

4.12.13 TRP Power Module DC Power

ABBREVIATIONS USED: FCl M SERIES: AC/DC POWER MOO&ES
TRP - Transient Protection
TRPMB - TRP Motherboard NAME: TRP Power Module
TRP-PM - TRP DC Power Module DC Power
Jxx - TRPMB Slot where TRP-PM FROM: FC1J
is installed
T&x - Temind block on TRPMB TO: FC2A. FC5A, FCBA. FC7A
conneoted to Jm.

PRBLIHIIUUY RELglssE 9/89 4-33 -xNG

+-
1 HARTIH-DlElUSlTEEUICALHlUXIAL --
SYSTm I m?lOlYi

4.12.14 Sensor !CRP Excitation DC Powis

A6BREWATlONS USED: FCl N

TRP - Tronsien t Protection SERIES: AC/DC POWER MODULES
TAPMe - TRP Motherboard NAME: Sensor TRP Excitation
TRP-SNS - Sensor TRP Module DC Power
Jxx - TRP Slot where TRP-SNS FROM: FCl J
is installed
TBXX- Terminal block on TRPMB TO: FCZA, fC3A
connected to Jxx.

PC8291A-1 +24vDC +23.6 r%z ta

- And00InputYodJlr
+24.4 !
zfcu- Pulr InputYodulr
PCB291A-2 +12M)C +11.8 +12.2
PCE391A-3 +lOVDC +9.0 +10.2
PCB491A-4 +svoc +4.9 +5.1
PC8591A-6 +12M)C +11.8 +12.2
PC8691A-6 NONE
PC8791 A-7 NONE ii-o
PC0891A-6 +12mc +1i.2 _
TA9LE A

-I[#; 4-34 PRBLIHIBMY RBLEASB 9/89

i MARTIN-DEKERTECRBJICALMANML 1 SP=~ 1000 SY- I =0lli

4.13 AC/DC TESCPRMXDDRJS

(CAUTION: This test procedure is designed to be conducted by
suitably trained field service personnel, and performed on an
existing installed SPECTRUM 1000 system.)
4.13.01 TEST AND WgAsDREwEHT EQu1-RI3Qo1BED
1. 3-l/2 or 4-l/2 digit Digital Volt/ohm/milliamp Meter (DVM)
2. STD Bus extender board with test points and bus pin num-
bers marked. The extender board should also contain LEDs
to indicate power on the STD bus. If a suitable extender
board is not available, the STD bus voltages are difficult
to measure. The three red LEDs on the MATS board will
indicate the approximate level of the +SVDC, +12VDC, and
-12VDC voltages on the STD bus.

4.13.02 BQUIPMEEC !JX) BE T-

1. Signal Conditioner
a) AC output voltage from the main power source
b) AC input voltage to the main DC power supply
c) DC output voltage from the main DC power supply
d) DC input voltages to the STD bus
e) DC voltages at the sensor power supply
f) DC voltages on the TRP motherboard

2. Intrinsically Safe (I.S.) Power Supply

a) AC input voltage to I.S. power supply
b) DC output voltage from I.S. power supply

3. Display Panel
a) DC input voltage to Display Panel
b) DC input voltage at each ISMI Slave Module
c) DC input voltage at each Display Controller

PRELIHIHARY RBLBASB 9/89 4-3s

+--S---W- ---------------+

1 HARTIBi-D-TECEBIICALHAHDAL 1 SPEcTRDn 1000 SYST.m I TulOllI

4.13.03 PRELIHRUR Y EQDIPHEtm IblSPEcTIoIQ

1. Check the inside of the Signal Conditioner for;
a) damaged cables or wiring
b) damaged printed circuit boards
c) screws and connectors inserted and tight
d) correct power fuse is installed and not blown

2. Check the inside of the I.S. Power Supply for:

a) damaged cables or wiring
b) damaged or loose components
c) screws and connectors inserted and tight
d) correct power fuse is installed and not blown

3. Check the inside of the Display Panel for:

a) damaged cables or wiring
b) damaged printed circuit boards
c) screws and connectors inserted and tight

4.13.04 POWER UP SIQUC COBDITIOHEB

1. Check power supply cables and connectors
a) check insertion of all AC and DC power connectors
b) visually check the routing of all wiring harnesses
c) check that the input voltage selection tab near the
bottom of the main power supply is set to show "1lSVAC"
if the system is powered from a 11SVAC power source.

2. AC Power ON to the Signal Conditioner

a) set the Signal Conditioner AC power switch ON (up)
b) open the Signal Conditioner door and verify that power
is applied and any LEDs inside the Signal Conditioner
are ON.
1) if not, check the AC power input fuse located in the
AC power panel, and replace if required.

4-36 PRELIEIW4RY RELEASE 9/89

 T
iMRTIN-DECKERTEcBlsICAL HAUUAL 1 SPETRtJn 1000 SYSTRI 1 TulOll(
+---------------~~---~ -----------------_I---~ ------+

4.14 TEST SIGHAL~C!ONDITIOHER POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGES

4.14.01 Heasure the AC power source voltage.
a) locate the breaker box supplying AC power to the SPEC-
TRUM 1000 system.
b) open the breaker box and remove the cover
c) set the DVM to measure AC VOLTS
d) connect the DVM between the ground (earth) rail and the
output of the breaker supplying the SPECTRUM 1000
system.
e) measure 110 to 125 VAC at the breaker output
1) if no voltage is present at the breaker output,
check the AC power bus and the breaker. Replace or
repair as required.
2) if the breaker output voltage is below or above the
limits, check the AC power generator and repair as
required.
f) disconnect the DVM, reinstall the cover, and close the
breaker box.
4.14.02 Heasure the AC input voltage to the Signal Conditioner.
a) open the Signal Conditioner enclosure and locate the
main DC power supply mounted in the upper right side of
the enclosure. The AC power and DC battery inputs are
at terminal block TB2 near the bottom of the power
supply. The wires connected to this terminal block come
from the AC power panel mounted in the lower right side
of the Signal Conditioner.
b) using the DVM set for AC VOLTS, measure the AC voltage
on the terminal block (TB2) at the input (bottom) of
the main DC power supply.
c) measure 110 to 125 VAC at TB2 between terminals 1 and 2
and between terminals 1 and 3
1) if no voltage is present, check and repair or re-
place:
a> AC fuse located in the AC power panel (p/n
H1507A-25)
b> cable between the breaker box and the Signal
Conditioner
c> the AC line regulator (if installed) (p/n
H10578B)
d> the AC power panel (p/n H11059A)
d) measure 0 to 1 VAC at TB2 between terminals 2 and 3
1) if more than 1 VAC is measured, check and repair or
replace:
a> cable between the breaker box and the Signal
Conditioner
b> AC line regulator (if installed) (p/n H10578B)
c> AC power panel (p/n H11059A)

PRELIMINARY RELEASE 9/89 4-37

1 MARTIN-DEXERTECEUICALHMUAL 1 SPET!.nJm 1000 SYsTml I lwlo11I
+ pm---- ----------------+

4.14.03 Measure the DC output voltage from the main DC power supply.
a) open the Signal Conditioner enclosure and locate the
main DC power supply mounted in the upper right side of
the enclosure. The DC voltage outputs are at terminal
block TBl near the top of the power supply. The wires
connected to this terminal block go to the STD bus and
the Sensor Power Supply.
b) using the DVM set for DC VOLTS, measure the DC voltages
on the terminal block (TBl) at the output (top) of the
main DC power supply.
c) measure +4.75 to +5.25 VDC at TBl between terminal 8(+)
and terminal lo(-). (+5 volt DC regulated output)
d) measure +4.75 to +5.25 VDC at TBl between terminal 9(+)
and terminal ll(-). (+5 volt DC regulated output, same
as above)
e) measure +11.4 to +12.6 VDC at TBl between terminal 2(+)
and terminal 3(-). (+12 volt DC regulated output)
f) measure -11.4 to -12.6 VDC at TBl between terminal 7(+)
and terminal 6(-). (-12 volt DC regulated output)
g) measure +10.8 to +13.2 VDC at TBl between terminal 4(+)
and terminal 5(-). (+12 volt DC semi-regulated output)
h) if any of the above voltage measurements are not within
the specified range, replace the main DC power supply
(p/n H11070A-01)

4-38 PRELIHIbuBp RELEASE 9/89

+----- --a- ------ -m-w- ---B.----------+

1 HARTIBI-DEKERTEEL!iICALMANUAL 1 SPEcTRun 1000 SYsTEn I TwlOllI

+--------- ----a-- --------- ----------+

4.14.04 Measure the DC input voltages to the STD bus.

a) locate the STD bus card cage. It is located in the
upper center of the Signal Conditioner enclosure and
contains sixteen slots for the various STD printed
circuit boards.
b) Insert an STD bus extender board with test points into
an unused slot in the STD bus card cage.
c) using the DVM set for DC VOLTS, measure the DC voltages
on the STD bus at the pins on the extender board.
1) measure +4.75 to 5.25 VDC between pins l(+) and 3(-)
2) measure +4.75 to 5.25 VDC between pins 2(+) and 4(-)
3) measure +11.4 to +12.6 VDC between pins 55(+) and
3(-)
4) measure -11.4 to -12.6 VDC between pins 56(+) and
3(-)
5) if any of the above voltage measurements are not
within the specified range, check and repair or
replace;
a> each board on the STD bus for shorts and failed
components.
b> the main DC power supply (p/n H11070A-01)
c> the sensor power supply (p/n PCB293A)
6) measure +0 to +5.25 VDC between pin 3 (-) and all
other pins on the extender board. These other pins
are active bus connections and the voltage on each
may be changing. This test simply verifies that no
excess voltage is present on any of these pins.
CAUTION - take care not to short any pins together
with the DVM test probes while taking the measure-
ments. If any pins measure greater than +5.25 VDC,
check and replace as required, all the STD boards.
7) remove the STD bus extender board when all voltage
levels are within the specified range.

PEELIHIHARY EELEASE 9/89 4-39

+------------------- --------------------------~----------+
I MTIN-D~TBCENICALHUUAL
+--------~----- _I-------
1 SPIETRon
----------
1000 SYSTIm I TmOllI
-v--------------+

4.14.05 Heasure the DC voltages at the Sensor Power Supply (SPS).

a) locate the sensor power supply printed circuit board

mounted on the left end of the STD bus card cage.
b) using the DVM set for DC VOLTS, measure the DC voltages
on the SPS at the colored test points near the front of
the printed circuit board.
cl measure +10.8 to +13.2 VDC between TP6(+) and TPl(-)
This is the semi-regulated input voltage to the SPS
DC/DC converter. If the measured voltage is not in this
range, check and repair or replace as required;
1) the wire harness from the main DC power supply
2) the sensor power supply (p/n PCB293A)
3) the main DC power supply (p/n H11070A-01)
d) verify that LED CR2 (lower LED) on the SPS is OFF
(breaker is not tripped). If it is ON, reset the break-
er by pressing the button on the top of the small
orange breaker component.
6 verify that LED CR1 (upper LED) is ON (DC/DC converter
is working). If it is OFF, replace the SPS (p/n
PCB293A).
f) measure +28.5 to +31.5 VDC between TP2(+) and TPS(-)
This is the output voltage from the SPS DC/DC convert-
If the measure voltage is not in this range, re-
ifAce the SPS (p/n PCB293A)
9) measure +11.4 to +12.6 VDC between TP4(+) and TPl(-)
This is the regulated +lZVDC from the main DC power
supply. If the measured voltage is not in this range,
check the wire harness from the main DC power supply.
h) measure -11.4 to -12.6 VDC between TP3(+) and TPl(-)
This is the regulated -12VDC from the main DC power
suPPlY* If the measured voltage is not in this range,
check the wire harness from the main DC power supply.
i) measure -0.1 to +O.l VDC between TP5(+) and TPl(-).
This voltage is the difference between the main DC
power supply COM and the SPS COM. The voltage between
these two reduces the 10 volt span of the ADC. If the
measured voltage is not in this not in this range,
verify that the jumper is installed on the terminal
block at the rear of the SPS (TBl) between terminal 2
and 3.

PRELIMINARY RELEASE 9/89

+------a-- ---I------- ---w----,-_-_ --a----

j HART I / 1 SP 1000 S Y I Twlo

T

4 Heasure t D C voltages on t TRP mo

a) locate-the TRP mo in t lower c e n o t
S Condi enclosure t locate t slot
n u m b e r s printed on t circuit board under each o t
card slots. T h e slots a r e n u m b e r e d fro t u p p e r left
slot (Jl) t t lower right slot (548)
b) using t D V M se f DC VOLTS measure t D C voltages
f t TRP mo a t colored t poin near
t front o t T R P b o a r d s p l u g g e d into t indicated
slots.
c) o n t T R P in slot 5 1 3 m e a s u r e + 2 8 t +31 VDC
be T P 5 ( + ) a n d TPl(-). This is t 3 0 volt i n p u t
all t TRP boards If t m e a s u r e d voltage is n o in
t range check a n d repair or replace as required
1) t wiring harness b e t S P S and TRP mo
board
2) e a c h T R P b o a r d installed in t TRP mo
3) t TRP mo (p PCB345A)
4) t sensor p o w e r supply ( S P S ) (p PCB293A)
d) o n t T R P in slot 5 4 6 m e a s u r e + 1 1 t +12 VDC
be T P 2 ( + ) a n d TP4(-) This is t + 1 2 volt i n p u
voltage t all t TRP power module boards (PCB296A-
series). If t m e a s u r e d voltage is n o in t range
check a n d repair or replace as required
1) t wiring harness b e t S P S and TRP mo
board
2) e a c h T R P b o a r d installed in t TRP mo
3) t TRP mo (p PCB345A)
4) t sensor p o w e r supply ( S P S ) (p PCB293A)

PREL RELEASE 9 4-41 -1#G

 ---------------s ------------+
+-

1 MARTIN-D~TEHblICAbUNUAL 1 sPJxTRun 1000 S Y M I !m lO llI

4 .1 5 T E S T D IS P L A Y P A N E L -
4 .1 5 .0 1 M e a s u r e th e A C i n p u t voltage to th e 1-S. Power Supply.
a) o p e n th e I.S . P o w e r S u p p l y enclosure a n d locate th e two
terminal blocks in th e lower p o r tio n o f th e enclosure.
T h e left terminal block (TBl) is for th e A C i n p u t
wiring.
b) using th e D V M set for A C V O L T S , m e a s u r e th e A C voltage
o n th e left terminal block (TBl).
c) m e a s u r e 1 1 0 to 1 2 5 V A C a t T B l b e tween terminals 1 and 2
a n d b e tween terminals 1 and 3
1) if n o voltage is p r e s e n t, check a n d repair or re-
place;
a > th e cable b e tween th e breaker b o x a n d th e I.S .
Power Supply
b > th e A C line regulator (if installed) (p/n
H10578B)
d) m e a s u r e 0 to 1 V A C a t T B l b e tween terminals 2 and 3
1) if m o r e th a n 1 V A C is m e a s u r e d , check a n d repair or
replace:
a > th e cable b e tween th e breaker b o x a n d th e S ignal
C o n d i tio n e r
b > th e A C line regulator (if installed) (p/n
H10578B)

4 .1 5 .0 2 M e a s u r e th e D C o u tp u t voltage from th e 1-S. Power Supply.

a) o p e n th e I.S . P o w e r S u p p l y enclosure a n d locate th e two
terminal blocks in th e lower p o r tio n o f th e enclosure.
T h e right terminal block (TBZ) is for th e D C o u tp u t
wiring to th e Display P a n e l .
b) using th e D V M set for D C V O L T S , m e a s u r e th e D C voltages
o n th e right terminal block ( T B 2 ) .
c) m e a s u r e + 9 .0 0 to + 9 .9 0 V D C a t T B 2 b e tween terminal 1
(+ ) a n d terminal 2 (-).
1) if th e a b o v e m e a s u r e m e n t is n o t within th e specified
r a n g e , e x c e p t as discussed b e l o w , check a n d repair
or replace as required:
a > th e fu s e for I.S . P o w e r S u p p l y (p/n H 1 2 2 8 4 A - 0 1 )
b > th e wiring b e tween th e I.S . P o w e r S u p p l y a n d th e
Display P a n e l .
c > th e I.S . P o w e r S u p p l y (p/n H 1 2 0 5 4 A - 0 2 1 1 5 )
d > th e IS M I M a s ter M o d u l e (p/n HlZO lO A )
2) if th e a b o v e m e a s u r e m e n t is in th e r a n g e o f + 1 1 .4 to
+ 1 2 .6 V D C , th e o u tp u t o f th e I.S . P o w e r S u p p l y is
u n l o a d e d . This m a y indicate a b r o k e n wire to th e
Display P a n e l or a loose c o n n e c tio n a t o n e o f th e
terminal blocks.

-1#G 4-42 P R E L IM IIP A B P R E L E A S E 9 /8 9

+----------------e----e- ---- -----a-

l -IN-DECKRRTEERlIU&~ 1 SPmun 1000 S Y - I lwlo11~

4 .X .0 3 Heasure th e DC input voltage to th e Display Panel.

a) o p e n th e Display P a n e l enclosure a n d locate th e IS M I
M o d u l e s . T w o o f th e l o n g black m o d u l e s a r e m o u n te d
inside e a c h d o o r o f th e Display P a n e l a b o v e th e display
b o a r d s . T h e IS M I M a s ter M o d u l e (IS M I-M M ) is usually
m o u n te d inside th e right d o o r a n d is th e m o d u l e closest
to th e k e y p a d . It h a s s e v e n small g r e e n c o n n e c tors
e n c a p s u l a te d in it. T h e r e m a i n i n g th r e e m o d u l e s a r e
IS M I S lave M o d u l e s (IS M I-S M ), a n d th e y e a c h h a v e five
e n c a p s u l a te d c o n n e c tors.
b) using th e D V M set for D C V O L T S , m e a s u r e th e D C voltage
i n p u t to th e Display P a n e l . This m e a s u r e m e n t is m a d e o n
th e IS M I-M M a t Jl. Jl is th e leftm o s t c o n n e c tor a n d th e
only two p o l e g r e e n c o n n e c tor o n th e IS M I-M M . Jl termi-
nal 2 is closest to th e e n d o f th e m o d u l e a n d Jl termi-
nal 1 is to w a r d th e c e n ter.
c) m e a s u r e + 9 .0 to + 9 .9 V D C a t th e IS M I M a s ter M o d u l e
( H 1 2 0 1 0 A ) two p o l e p l u g Jl b e tween terminal l(+ )(red
wire) a n d terminal 2(-)(black wire).
1) if th e m e a s u r e d voltage is n o t within th e specified
r a n g e , check a n d repair or replace as required:
a > th e fu s e for I.S . P o w e r S u p p l y (p/n H 1 2 2 8 4 A - 0 1 )
b > th e wiring b e tween th e I.S . P o w e r S u p p l y a n d th e
Display P a n e l .
c > th e I.S . P o w e r S u p p l y (p/n H 1 2 0 5 4 A - 0 2 1 1 5 )
d > th e IS M I M a s ter M o d u l e (p/n H 1 2 0 1 0 A )

4 .1 5 .0 4 M e a s u r e th e DC input voltage a t e a c h IS H I S lave Module.

a) using th e D V M set for D C V O L T S , m e a s u r e th e D C voltage
i n p u t to e a c h o f th e IS M I S lave M o d u l e s (IS M I-S M ). This
m e a s u r e m e n t is m a d e o n th e IS M I-S M a t 5 4 . 5 4 is th e
leftm o s t o f th e five c o n n e c tors o n a IS M I-S M .
b) m e a s u r e + 9 .0 to + 9 .9 V D C a t e a c h o f th e IS M I slave
m o d u l e ( H 1 2 0 0 9 A ) fo u r p o l e p l u g 5 4 , terminal l(+ )(red
wire) a n d terminal 2(-)(black wire).
c) if th e m e a s u r e d voltage is n o t within th e specified
r a n g e , check a n d repair or replace as required;
1) th e wiring b e tween th e IS M I-m o d u l e s in th e Display
Panel.
2) th e IS M I M a s ter M o d u l e (p/n HlZO lO A )
3) th e IS M I S lave M o d u l e s (p/n H 1 2 0 0 9 A )
4) th e fu s e for th e I.S . P o w e r S u p p l y (p/n H 1 2 2 8 4 A - 0 1 )
5) th e 1 ,s. P o w e r S u p p l y (p/n H 1 2 0 5 4 A - 0 2 1 1 5 )

P R E b In IIm R Y R E L E A S E 9 /8 9 4-43
 T
i WWJ!IRiJ-DIEKl=TECENICALHAIWAL 1 SPETRUH 1000 SYsTm I mlo11I
----+

4.15.05 Heasure the DC input voltage at each Display Controller.

a) locate the Display Controller printed circuit boards

(p/n PCB295A) inside the Display Panel. The Display
Controllers (usually 10 or 12) are mounted on the back
of the individual display printed circuit boards. Jl is
the five pole green connector near one corner of the
printed circuit board. Jl terminal 1 is farthest from
the corner of the board and Jl terminal 5 is nearest
the corner.
b) measure +6.2 to +6.8 VDC at each Display Controller
five pole terminal block Jl, between terminal 1 (+)(red
wire) and terminal 2(-)(black wire).
cl if the measured voltage is not within the specified
range, check and repair or replace as required:
1) the wiring between the ISMI module and the Display
Controller
2) the Display Controller (p/n PCB295A)
3) the ISMI Slave Modules (p/n H12009A)
4) the ISMI Master Module (p/n H12010A)
5) the fuse for the I.S. Power Supply (p/n H12284A-01)
6) the I.S. Power Supply (p/n H12054A-02115)

-ImlG 4-44 PRELIHIHUY RELEASE 9/89

 --mm ------ ----------------+
+-----------------a-

1 HARTIN-DEKERTECHNICALMANUAL 1 S P E T R U H 1 0 0 0 S Y S T m l I !m JlO ll~

+ -a-- --------------- -----------------m -+

4-16 m INPUT M O D U L E S
4 - 1 6 .0 1 Analog S e n s o r S ignals

A B B R E V l A T l O N SU S E D : FC2A S E R IE S : A N A L O G INPUT M O O U L E S
AOC - A n a l o g to Digital Converter
board NAME: A n a l o g S e n s o r Signals
AMP/MUX - Amplifying/Multiplsxing
F R O M : Origin
board
H H T - H a n d H e l d Terminal TO: FC4A. FC3A. F C l A
M A T S - M a th a n d Active Termination FCZE, FCZC, F C Z D
board

T ERRORS TH T
INI& A N A D C FA:L”R E
INIllAUZAllON RUNTME
001 FO
DO3 FO:
DOS F05
007 F07
DO9 F09

TABLE A
I

P m 8 ntad
1) fC20 - ADCbwd*8b

P R E L IHINARY R E L E A S E 9 /8 9 4-45
 ---------------s- a------+
+-------B---W---
~HARTIN-DE5ERTECENICALHMlU= 1 sPEcTRtm 1000 SYSTrn 1 TwlOll~
+-----.------------ ---- ----a-+

4.16.02 Single Analog Sensor Signals

ABBREVIATIONS USED: FCZB
ANALOG INPUT MOOULES
ADC - Analog to Digital Converter
board Single Analog Sensor Signals
AMP/MUX - Amplifying/Multiplexing
board
t-iHT - Hand Heid Terminal
- Transient Protection
%-SNS - Sensor TRP board
TRPMB - TRP Motherboard
Jxx - TRP Slot where TRP-SNS
is installed
TBXX - Terminal block on TRPMB
connected to Jxx.

PrQm.6 to:
1) FCX -
mQ/LtUr

u- PIE
PrQaod to:
1) FctJ -
SatBwTRP
ErdtotJal
OCPOWU

TR?-9rJs IN SLOT
Jxx m
ml(+) MO Ipq-).

SmAL TRP-SNS TRP-SNS WTHOUT

IT%? RANGE IYPEl auTPuT eARRER 6skR
24.OWC 23.OWC ?OvDC
cwdDc I 2onMC 24.OMc 23.OWC :iOUlC RmCE THE
o-24WC 1 PCB29lkl O.OWC 1 24.OVQC 24.OWC 2UWC 22.6WC
O-1 2% IPQ)ZSlA-2 o.ovDc 12OVDC 12OWC 11.6VDC 11.2%
0-12mc IPC626lA-2 o.mDc 12oMc lZO% --- ---
o.omc 1AOwC lo.omc s.swc 9.2MK:
o.owc lO.omc ,a- --- ---
5.OvoC 4.swc 4.omc
s- --- ---
TWA 1-9 TA6LEC TCdLLD
SENSOR TYPE MD RANGE INPUT TO AMP/MUX OUTPUT FRau sosoR NouluU. EXUTAllON VOLTAGE

4-46 PRELInIwA%p IlELsAsB 9/89

+--- --------- ---- -----------Wea----+

1 HARTIBI-Dm TECEliIccLT. HAlUJAL 1 sPBcTRun 1000 SYSTRI I m

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

+-s-----m P-B----- --------------------------------+

1 MARTIbFDXKERTECHNICAL~ 1 sPEcTRIln 1000 SYSmm 1 TwlOll)

+---- ---- -mm--- ~~-~--------~~+

4.16.03 AmP/xDx Sensor Signals

ABBREVlAllONS USED: - FCZC
SERIES: ANALOG INPUT MODULES
ADC - Analog to Digital Converter
board WE:
NAME: Amp/Mux Sensor Signals
AMP/MUX - Amplifying/Multiplexing FROM: FC2A, f-C28
board iY
HHT - Hand Held Terminal TO: FC2D
TRP - Transient Protection
TRP-SNS - Sensor TRP board
TRPMB - TRP Motherboard
Jxx - TRP Slot where TRP-SNS
is installed
Texx - Terminal block an TRPMB
connected to Jxx.
E.U. - Disploysd Number in
Engineering Units.

Proad tat
1) Fc2B -

22

4-40 PRXLIMIBJARY RELEASE 9/89

 -w-e- -------+

i-HARTIN-DECKER &HWLL MAHDAL 1 S P E C T R D X1 0 0 0 S Y s T m I TwlO ll~

+ +

1 0 .0

9 .0

8 .0

%
<!I 7 .0

6 .0
0
>
5 .0

4 .0

3 .0

2 .0

1 .0

0 .0
0 819 1638 2458 3277 4096 4915 5734 6554 7373 8192

ADC RAW COUNTS

Table 4 .3 : A D C R a w C o u n ts vs. A M P /M U X V o lta g e

P R .E L u l I N A R Y R K T .RIS E 9 /8 9 4-49 -I=

 _--
jMAR!W-DECSER TECHXICi4LHABUl4L~ SPSCTRUM 1000 SYB 1 m01li 1

4.16.04 ADC Sensor Signals

ABBREVIATIONS USED: - FCZD SERIES: ANALOG INPUT MODULES
ADC - Analog to Digital Converter ADC
board NAME: ADC Sensor Signals
BOARD
AMP/MUX - Amplifying/ktltiplexing SENSOR FROM: FCZA, FC2C
board SIGNALS
HHT - Hand Held Terminal TO: FC4A
- Transient Protection
::- SNS - Sensor TRP board
TRPMB - TRP Motherboard
Jxx - TRP Slot where TRP-SNS ?2EZi%%F INTOTHECPI
is installed op(RAnNG SOAm THE
Texx - Terminal block on TRPMB PRoeEIcLI, HHT S4OlLD %
cannected to Jxx. INHQSTYQW.

-1NG 4-50 PRKLIMXNMIY RELEASE 9/89 --

------
+------------------------------ ----------+
1 HARTIN-D-TECHHICALHAHDAL 1 SPlzcTmm 1000 SYSTEW I mrlo11I
+- ---- -m-----w- ----+

4.17 PULSE INPDT n0DuLES

4.17.01 Pulse Sensor Signals
ABBREVIATIONS USED: FC3A SERIES: PULSE INPUT MODULES
PIE - Pulse Input Baard
HHT - Hand Held Terminal NAME: Pulse Sensar Signals
MATS - Math and Active Termination FROM: Origin
board
To: FCSA. FC2A, FCI A
FC38, FC3C

r HH-ORS THAT ’
INICATE A PIB FAILURE
INlllAUZAllON RUNTIME
DO2 F02
DO3 CO3

E E
DOA FOA
DO6
2
OOF FDF
TizeLE A I

Roadto:
1) FCJC - flabwdJq#l8

PRELIHIIYCIRY I?ZLEASB 9/89 4-51 -1s

 iHARTIN-DECXERTEXBNICAL HANDAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTrn 1 !lwlOll~
+----- ---_---u-I-------------------__ -------+

4.17.02 Single Pulse Sensor Signals

ABBREVIATIONS USED: FC3B SERIES: PULSE INPUT MOOULES

PIB - Pulse Input Board
HHT - Hand Held Terminal NAME: Single Pulse Sensor Signals
TRP - Transient Protection FROM: FC3A
lRP- SNS - Sensor TRP board
TRPMB - TRP Motherboard TO: FCSC, FClJ
Jxx - TRP Slot where TRP-SNS I
is installed
TBXX - Terminal block on TRPMB
connected to Jxx.

Pmond
ta
1) Fcx -
Pm

!5wTcN --- e-e -we

PNP --- -es ---
PNP SOURCE PcmslA-a 12Dwc 11.6mc 11.2wc
TABLEA TAglEC
SENSDRlWEANDRANM NOWNM ucmnord VoLrMiE

-1NG PRELINIHARY EmLEASE 9/89

 _I_----- ------.-m+

~IURTIN-DECILEBT~ICAL #IAmaL 1 SPETRUH 1000 SYS!PRl I TwlOllI

+-------- ---w--m--- ---------B-+

4.17.03 PIB Sensor Signals

ABBREMATTONS USED: FC3C SERIES: PULSE INPUT MODULES

PM - Pulse Input Board
HHT - Hand Held Terminal NAME: PIB Sensor Signals
TRP - Transient Protection FROM: FC3A. FCX
TRP-SNS - Sensor TRP board
TRPMB - TRP Motherboard TO: FC4A
E.U. - Oisplayed Number in
Engineering Units.

WY.
Mm
Dow
DnERulHE PLUG THE HHT
INTO THE CP!

HHT-lHEWOULD BE
IN HOST MODE.

.
PI6 WARD AND

PRKLInImRY BKLE&SE 9/89 4-53 TBOWLgSBi001IHG

 ---- ------+
+---
1 MARTIN-D~~ICALHADJUAL 1 sPIi!cG&-1000 SYsTm I TwlOllI
+ - -- P--W+

4.18 CtMfPUTING HODDLES

FLOW CHART SERIES FC4

COMPUTING MODULES
,
FClA FC4A FC2A
&doO
AC/DC Par - - Input
uadub zzit bduko
4 INDmtms b

I FC

4-54 PBELIMIBiARY BELEME 9/89

ilIhRTIN-D BCEBR TECEUIC ALHMXIA L 1 sPEcTRtJ n 1000 SYsTm I mTl011~

4.18.01 Error Indicators

ABBREVIAllO NS USED: FC4A SERIES:

HHT - Hand Held Terminal COMPUTING MODULES
MATS - Math and Active Termination NAME: Error Indicators
board
CPU - Central Processing Unit Board FROM: FClF. FC2A. FC3A
CPU1 - Primary CPU Board TO: FCQB. FC4E. FCXF, FC4G
CPU2 - Secondary CPU Board FCSA, FCGA, FC7A
CPI - CPU Intarfoce Board
LED - tight Emlttlng Diode
LCD - Liquid Crptal Oisploy

PRELIHIE ABY RELEASE 9/89 4-5s

 E
-m--------v m-v ---a----+

i R HANUAL 1 SPE
---- G
B
+ ---- B
--------Twl B
B

B B

MATS
ERROR ERROR APPROPR STAR1
CODE DEFINITION ACT I ON AT

00 N o r m a l operation. n o errors C h e c k for C P U operation --

81 User interface task failure W a r m start reset ,
82 S c a n task failure W a r m start reset
a3 Calibration terminal failure I C h e c k HHT. C P C P UI FCSA
a4 D A C task failure Check DAC FC7A
a5 A D C task failure , CIh e c k A D C . FC2A
86 P task failure Check P I. FC3A
87 System status task failure W a r m start reset
88 S c a n task failure I W a r m start reset I --
c5 Cold S h a a occurred , I
Restore alarms a n d channels , I -
DD C P U operation terminated W a r m start reset
FF N o operation, M A T S defoult Check M A T S CPU S RTC FCSA
I I
T A B L .E A

HHT
ERROR ERROR APPROPR STAR
CODE DEFINITION ACTION AT
l oo N o r m a l operation, n o errors Check for C P U operation -
l O A D C failure only Check ADC FC2A
002 P failure only Check P FCJA
l 03 ADC and P failure Check AOC S FClA
l 10 R T C failure only Check RTC FC4A
011 R T C a n d A D C failure Check ADC RTC FClA
l 12 RTC and P failure Check P RTC FClA
l 13 RTC. A D C a n d P failure Check A D C PJB, R T C FClA
020 H H T failure Check HHT, C P CPU FC4A
l 21 H H T a n d A D C failure nitialization
Check HHT, A D C FC2A
922 HHT and P foilure Check HHT, P FCJA
~23 HHT. A D C a n d P failure Check HHT, A D C P FClA
030 H H T a n d R T C failure Check HHT. R T C FC4A
r31 HHT, RTC. A D C failure Check HHT, RTC, A D C FC4A
a32 HHT, RTC. P failure Check Ht-iT, RTC. P FC4A
*33 HHT, RTC. A D C R T C failure Check b o a r d locations FC4A
BFF All devices h a v e failed C heck CPU and STD bus
; FClA
* Fxx - Runtime Error TABLE B
Dxx - I (reset) Error
Tables 4 . 4 Ab K a n d 4.4B: MATS and HHT E Codes

m 4-56 PREL~~~~RY RELEASE 9/89

+---a-- -----_I --w-p- ----

1 HART TECHN HAN 1 sPlxTRuH 1000 S Y 1 mo1ri

+ --------- -----v- ------ -

4 CPU1 Board

ABBREVlA USED FC4B

H H T - H a n d H e l d Terminal SER COMPUT MODULES
M A T S - M a a n d Active Terminat ion NAME CPU1 Board
board
C P U - Control Processin g Unit B o a r d FROM FC4A
C P U 1 - Primary C P U B o a r d TO FC4C, F C S A
CPU2 - Secondary CPU Board
C P - C P U Interface B o a r d
L E D - Light Emitting
L C D - Liquid Crystal

WARY

M S S E 89

I I / W

PREL RELE 9 4-
 ---- -------e-- ----------------+
+------------‘--

IMARTIN-DECKER~ICAL- 1 SPEcTRrn 1000 SYsTm I mvlo11I

+ -------- -__I__+

4.18.03 CPI Board

ABBREVIATIONS USED: FC4C SERIES: COMPUTING MODULES

HHT - Hand Held Terminal
MATS - Moth and Active Terminotion /-ii-\ NAME: CPI Board
board FROM: FC4B
CPU - Central Processing Unit Board
CPU1 - Primary CPU Board To: FC40, FCSA
CPU2 - Secondary CPU Board
CPI - CPU Interface Board
LED - Light Emitting Diode
LCD - Liquid Crystal Display

\
‘--

4-58 PRELININhEY RELEASE 9/89

 m--M ----w-e ---------------+
+-----

1 MART 1 sPEc 1000 S Y

+ - -_---. I a m

4 CPU2 Board
A B B R E V l A T i O N SU S E D FC4D
H H T - H a n d H e l d Terminal SER COMPUT MODULES
MATS - Mo a n d Active Terminatio n m NAME CPU2 Board
board
C P U - Central Processing Unit B o a r d FCQC
C P U 1 - Primary C P U B o o r d
FCISE, F C S A
CPU2 - Secondary CPU Board
C P - C P U Interface B o a r d
L E D - Light Emitting D i o d e
L C D - Liquid Crystal Display
D LEE2E
mJcPu2

P m a at d
l)FwE-
UTsbosd
 -----Bp -----+
I__--- ---
+--------P----S

D A L I S PBE------
1 M A R T I N - D E c I c z B L T E C E H I c A L H A H--a--- tzTsum 1 0 0 0 S Y s T R a 1 lwlo11I
------------+
+ --------.-- --

4 .1 8 .0 5 HATS Board

A B B R E V l A T l O N SU S E D : FC4E S E R IE S : C O M P U T I N GM O D U L E S
H H T - H a n d H e l d Terminal
M A T S - M a th a n d Active Termination NAME: MATS Board
board FROM: FC4A. F C 4 D
C P U - Central Processing Unit B o a r d
C P U 1 - Primary C P U B o a r d TO: FC4F
CPU2 - Secondary CPU Board
C P I - C P U interface B o a r d
L E D - Light Emitting D i o d e
L C D - Liquid Crystal Display
r l L2DTEFE
@ 4cpvP
c

4-60 P R E L I H I H A E Y R E L E A S E 9 /8 9
 i
+
HARTIH-DEXEEtTEcBblICALwAMuL
-
1 sPlzc!cRlm 1000 SYSTEW I TwlOll)
------------+

t 4.18.06 RTC Board

ABRREWATIONS USED: FC4F SERIES: COMPUTING MODULES

HHT - Hand Held Terminal
MATS - Math and Active Termination NAME: RTC Board
board FROM: FC4A. FC4E
RTC - Real Time Clock Board
CPU - Central Procss8ing Unit Board To: FC4G
CPU1 - Primary CPU aoard
CPU2 - Secondary CPU Board
CPI - CPU Interface Board
LED - Light Emitting Diode LocATElIfE
LCD - Liquid Crystal
Display t!i?E.

I
IF CPUl W.L #EwTHENHT
NOT -TE

ZZE7-i-i
IWATWAS
aocu BOARD. SET-

PRELIHRURY RRLEASE 9/89 4-61

 bRTIN-DJXKERTIZCEBIIcAL RIAmAL 1 SPETRDH 1000 SYsTm 1 TwlOll)

4.18.07 Hand Held Terminal (HHT)

ABBREVlATlONS USED: FC4G

SERIES: COMPUllNG MODULES
HHT - Hand Held Terminal
MATS - Math and Active Termination HAND NAME: Hand Held Terminal (HHT)
board HELD
TERMINAL FROM: FCQA. FC4F
ADC - Analog to DIgital Converter
board TO: FCSA
CPU - Control Processing Unlt Board
CPU1 - Prtmary CPU Board
CPU2 - Secondary CPU Board
CPI - CPU Inttioce Board
LCD - Liquid Crystal Disptay
DdrR - Momentwily Diaconnoct
then Rwmmct the HHT
cable connector.

- 10:
1) FCSA - t!izkYc
cammunkatbn mARow
..-A._.--

4-62 PRBLInIElARY - 9/89

 -------+
-m-----w-----
+--------

1 HART 1 sPlm 1000 S Y 1 Tul

tt
PRESS HnT DISPLAY HAND HELO TERMINAL
HIT K E Y DURING TEST 1 6 C H A R A C T E RD I S P L A Y W R TEST
2 12

3 123

CLR 123.

4 123.4 FFFFFFFCFFFFFFFF
s 123.43 ((C(((((((((((((
5 123.*56
)))))))))))))))I I111211111111111
l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
CAL LO 12*a6/ -L
:
7 123.460/l ................
////////////////
5 123.4#/r8
1111111111111111
0 123.454/189
-
C A L HI 123M56/169+ 4444444444444444

I23 4 S 6 / 1 6 9 + .
nnnnn7nm
0 I 2*4Sb/lb 0
YYYYYYWYWYYYYY er
2 3 9 45e/71 o- 5A
..........
.......... . . 5. .B. .
...............
...............
ENT 123*4#/789+. 0-S c<c<<<<<<<<<<<<<
i
TAeLEA o>>>>>>>>>>>>>>
H H T K E Y P A DT E S T r?
(ropoat to8t)
EARY 89

. . t t

IHI /

.
Tables 4 and 4 H H T K e y p a d a n d Display Charac Tes

PREL RELEASE9 4-63

+--------- ----------------------- --------a---+

1 MARTIN-DECEERTECEHICALwMlML 1 sPEcTxDn 1000 SYSTRI I mo11I

+ s-----p-- ------+

4.19 CXMHDBIICATION MHXJLES

FLOW CHART SERIES FC5

COMMUNICATION MODULES

DWtAY
PANa.
-ano(s

&I &I FCSG FCSH

4-64 PRBLIJUWhBY RBLBMB 9/89

i
+--
HARTIN-D~TECQUCALnabwAt
s---
1 SPEc!rmn 1000 SYSTH I mlOllI
-s---m -------+

4.19.01 Displayed Data

ABBREVIATIONS USED: FC%

HHT - Hand Hdd Terminal SERIES: COMMUNlCAllON MODULES
CPI - CPU Interface Board
SW - Signal Conditioner Unit NAME: Displayed Data
LCD - Liquid Crystal Display FROM: Origin
PC - Personal Computer used for
TO: FClB, FClC, FClD,
running the PRISM 1000 program.
RIG COMPUTER - Local or Remote FClE, FCl F
Computer System receiving data
from the SPECTRUM 1000.

1
NO

1 ARED= i,
Fs to:
- oiapiay Pond
-amm8ntoatbn8
I PAMa? I

$z ta
- Traumtt
th. sa@
Data hm
cawumu.

$s ta - Trmmntt Oata Worn

ollpror PanJ.

PRtSt. IS DATA Pmoud ta

eoNc RE- 1) FC5C - cunmuntmuanr
tkunscutoPc.

IF A RIG
YES COMPUTER IS NO
DATA BLp(G -cammunkatbm
-waaJr RECElm AT ITT trwnsatto.
Rip Computu.

PRBLIMIBARY RBLEASE 9/89 4-65

 i MARTIN-DECKEZtTSQ3BJIcALMUAL 1 SPETRDH 1000 SYsTm I mo11I

4.19.02 Display Panel Cmunications

ABBREVIATIONS USED: FCSB SERIES: COMMUNICATION MODULES

HHT - Hand Held Terminal
CPI - CPU Interface Board NAME: Display Panel
scu - Signal Conditioner Unit Communications
EM - Intrinsic Safety Module Interface FROM: FCSA
EM-MM - ISMI Master Module
TO: FCSG. FC5H
DSIO - Dual Serial Input/Output STD Board
MATS - Math and Active Termination Board
,
PRESS KEY PuJc THE HHT
72 2 ON WIT TO INTO THE CPt
INUCATDR L WEYrMrnT -
““WI
cwWGr IEZ INHOSTMOOC
I
I ’

UNK mRms Pmcad ta

AREocuJRRpso FCIA - canputhq
IF THE 2’ NUUeER
IS INCREASNC

Pmoad ia
. 1) FCSA - DbgLoy8dData

TaowLEsBo[rrING 4-66 PBELIHIBMIY RgLgAsg 9/89

 sBB-------- ------------e---M-+
+-----------------

1 IIARTIN-DECK ER WI- m 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTR! 1 TwlOll~

+ -P-w e--B --P---~---+

4.19.03 Corrunications from !SCD to PC

ABBRfVlATiONS USED:
scu - Signal Conditioner Unit SERIES: COMMUNICATION MODULES
TXD - Transmit Data NAME: Communications from
PC - Personal Computer scu to PC
FROM: FCSA
TO: FCSE. FC6A

Proo
to: ad
1) lwlo26
2) The Ouwo
- PRISU Urn Uanud
Yanud UeprW
with the PC.

-Pmstunrsua wd CWECK -
MO REPLACE THE
2) ma Onm Yanvd uppl#
with the PC. lRP6OARO
SENaNo DATA
FROU ME SCU.

Pr0a.d
1) fCSB
1 to:
- Oi@ay
Pad colnmllnkotJala

PRELuuNl4RY ReLgAsE 9/89 4-67

 ---w---w- ------+
--------
+-----------------W.-

1 M A R T Ib F D E c R w T l 3 C H N I C A L H A N fN% 1 S P E C T R D H1 0 0 0 S Y sTml I R n O llI

-------u----------- wem--------------+
+-

4 .1 9 .0 4 Corrunicatio n s frum S C U to Rig C o m p u ter

A B B R fV lA T l O N S
USED: F-C5D S E R IE S : C O M M U N l C A T l O NM O D U L E S
scu- S i g n a l Conditioner Unit
- Transmit Data NAME: Communications from
R ? ( GCDO M P U T E R - Local or R e m o te S C U to Rig C o m p u ter
C o m p u ter System receiving data FROM: FCSA
from the S P E C T R U M 1 0 0 0 .
TO: FCSB, FCGA

4-68 P R E L IHINARY R E L E A S E 9 /8 9
 ---------------+
+------- --P --a-----

1 MARTXBI-DECKER TECHHICALIUWUAL I SPExzTRmI

---
1000 SYSTml I TwlOll(
---a---+
+--- ---- -----I_

4.19.05 T Data fro the Signal Conditioner

ABBREVIATIONS USED: FCSE SERIES: COMMUNICATION MODULES

scu - Signal Conditioner Unit
TXD - Transmit Data NAME: Transmit Data from the
LCD - Liquid Crystal Display Signal Conditioner
CPI - CPU Interface Board FROM: FCSA
HHT - Hand Held Terminal To: fC4A
MATS - Math and Active Terminotion Board I
LED - Light Emitting Diode

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 4-69

iHARTIl9-DJ!kKBR~ICBL~ 1 SPEcTmn 1000 SYsTEn I !mlOllI

,19.06 Transmit-Data frum the Display Panel

ABERfWAllONS USED: FCSF

SERIES: COMMUNICATION MODULES
TXD Transmit Data
-

TRP - Transient Protection NAME: Transmit Data from the

TRPMB TRP Mother Board

- Display Panel
TRP-CTRL - Current Loop Control TRP FROM: FCSA
TRP-CL - Current Loop TRP Board
ISMI - Intrinsic Safety Module Interface TO: FCGA
ISMI-MM - ISMI Master Module
KEYPAD DCTRLR - Oisplay
Controller Board
attached to the Keypad.

4-70 PRELlIltxNmY RNriEAsE s/rig

 e--s- ---------------+
+--------------------------

~IUbRTIM-DXXZRTECENICALLIANUAL 1 SPEzTRan 1000 SYsTmR I TulOllI

+----- -- -----~---------+

4.19.07 Transmit Data frm the SCD to ISMI-Master Hodule

ABBREWATIONS USED: FCSG SERIES: COMMUNICATION MODULES

- Transient Protection

ZMB - TRP Mother Board NAME: Transmit Data from the

TRP-CTRL - Current Loop Control TRP SCU to the ISMI-MM.

TRP-CL - Current Loop TRP Board FROM: FC58

ISMI - Intrinsic Safety Module Interface

TO:
ISMI-MM - ISMI Master Module
FCGA

DSIO - Dual Serial Input/Output STD

PR5I.uIBmRY RELEASE 9/89 4-71

 -e-e--
-----I_
p-----
+------

I H A R T IN-DEC.it= T E C H IUICAL~ ---- ----+

+ --

4 .1 9 .0 8 Transmit D a ta from th e IS H I-HH to X S R U S lave H o d u l e s

A B B R E V IA T I O N SU S E D : FCSH
S E R IE S : C O M M U N ICATIONM O D U L E S
T X D - Transmit Data
L I N K - Communicatians path NAME: Transmit Data from the
IS M I - Intrinsic S a fety M o d u l e Interface IS M I--MM to IS M I-SM.
IS M I-MM - IS M I Master M o d u l e FROM: FC5B
IS M I-SM - IS M I S l a v e M o d u l e
TO: FC51

4-72 P R E L IM I N A R Y r C E L E A S E9 /8 9
 -- ------e--- -~~~------~-----~~+
+------------

1 -IN-DEcIcERT~ICALHANUAL 1 S P E cTRtm 1 0 0 0 S Y S T E P II lwlo11I

+- -- SW- ------------------+

4 .1 9 .0 9 Transmit D a ta from th e IS H I-S H to th e Displays

A B B R E W A T IO N SU S E D : FC51 S E R IE S : C O M M U N ICATIONM O D U L E S
T X D - Transmit Data
U N K - Communications path NAME: Transmit Data from the
IS M I - Intrinsic S a fety M o d u l e Interface IS M I-SM to the Displays.
IS M I-MM - IS M l Master M o d u l e FROM: FCSH
W I-SM - IS M I S l a v e M o d u l e
D C T R L R - Display Controller B o a r d TO: FCGA
D B D - L C D Display B o a r d

P R E L I H I N A E Y R E L E A S E 9 /8 9
 1 HARTIN-DEKERTECRNICALMMJAL 1 SPECTRIJH 1000 SYsTm I m011~
+ -- -- --+

4.20 RELAY/ALBBII - HODDLES

4 20 01 Rela and Alarm Output
%BBffEVIAllONS AED: FCGA
LED - Light Emitting Diode SERIES: RELAY/ALARM MODULES
TRP - Transient Protection
TRPMB - lRP Motherboard NAME: Relay and Alarm Output
TRP-PM - lRP Power Module FROM: Origin
To: FClM, FCSA. FC7A. FCGB

, 1 I

2) FC60

I NO

RELAY BOARD

4-74 PRELIMIULRY RELEASE 9/89

 -------+
----w-------------
+--

1 M h R T I H - D E K E R T E C R B l I C 3 4 L H A U U A L 1 s P E c T R Iln 1 0 0 0 S Y - G x I R n O llI .
+ -- -- e-u_ -------+

4 .2 0 .0 2 Auxiliary Relay O u tp u ts

ABBREVlAllONS USED: FC6B

L E D - Light Emitting D i o d e S E R IE S : R E L A Y /A L A R M M O D U L E S
- Transient Protection
TMS - T R P M o therboard NAME: Auxiliary Relay O u tputs
TRP-PM - TRP Power Module FROM: FCGA
TO: FClM, F C S A , F C 7 A

IFOMQIS
WrvEREo 8Y A
mP--pu. -
M E DC MLTAGE
A T R E L A YC D L

N A s u R E D. c INwT 1
+ Mziz T & - EwC A l ( + )
D U N T R E L A YI N P U T A N D AZ(-). M O U N TR O A Y
TmaNAILs.

P R E L I H I H A B P R E L E A S E 9 /8 9
i MARTIN-DWTEcB#I=m 1 sPIEcTmn 1000 SYsTm
-------+
I !tulOll~

4.21 ANAUX OOTFUT WDtJLES

DAC - Digital to Analog Converter SERIES: ANALOG OUTPUT MODULES

STD 9oard
TRP - Transient Protection NAME: Current Loop Analog Output
TRPMB - TRP Motherboard Ft?OM: Origin
TRP-PM - TRP Power Module TO: None
EU - Enaineering Unit value
shown on display Panel 1

-.
PUTSAND
-7 PbR As

RWUT FOR
EACH A)(Al.aG
OulPuT USED.

4-76 PRBL~Y REWi4SE 9/89

+---------------------------- ----------------------+
1 HARTIN-DECKBRTECRNICALHANUAL 1 SPRCTRUH 1000 SYsT.m 1 TulOllI
+------------------------------------------------------- +

sEcT1oR 5.0
REPAIR
5.01 GENERAL INF0RHATIOR
5.01.01 IN!l!ROWCTION This section describes field repair of the
SPECTRUM 1000 Data Acquisition System.
Repair, in this highly modular system, centers around removal and
replacement of the faulty module. Refer to Table 5.1; Field
Replacement Module List, for a listing of these modules.
A few modules can have limited repair performed in the field.
These are listed in Table 5.3; Field Repairable nodule List.
Table 5.2; mn Field Replacement Parts List, details some of
the spare parts required for field repairs.
Note: Most items listed in the Field Replacement Module List and
Common Field Replacement Parts List will have been offered in the
spares package. However items that are not likely to fail but are
field replaceable are listed on the Common Field Replacement
Parts List but may not be on the spares list (Example:
Heatsinks).
Interconnecting cables, wiring harnesses, and certain enclosure
repairs (gaskets replacement etc.) can be accomplished in the
field provided proper workmanship practices are followed.
It should always be remembered that the Spectrum 1000 is primary
instrumentation. The Troubleshooting section of this manual
focused on quickly identifying the failed module or cable. Repair
is similarly focused on quickly returning the system to service.
Although more extensive repair is possible the time required to
repair and then properly test the repaired module would result in
excessive down time.

PRELIHIRARY RELEASR 9/89 s-1 REPAIR

+--------------------------------------- --------------------+
1 HARTIN-DKCKERTRCRBlICALHANUAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYsTml 1 !m1011~

SUBSYSTEM PART NUMBER PART NAME

-m--------e-- --e------w---- ---------------------------------
AC/DC POWER H10578B AC LINE REGULATOR
YODULES H10800A AC POWER SURGE PROTECTOR
H10800B AC POWER SURGE PROTECTOR
H11059A AC POWER PANEL
H11070A-01 DC POWER SUPPLY
PCB293A SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
PCB291A-SERIES SENSOR TRP MODULE
PCB296A-SERIES TRP POWER MODULE
H12054A-SERIES INTRINSICALLY SAFE POWER SUPPLY
------w-w---- ----B---B----- ---------------------------------
RNALOG SENSOR PCB291A-SERIES SENSOR TRP MODULE
INPUT MODULES PCB275A AMPLIFYING/MULTIPLEXING BOARD
PCB282A ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER BOARD
------e-w---- ---------------------------------
PULSE SENSOR PCB291A-SERIES SENSOR TRP MODULE
INPUT MODULES PCB270A PULSE INPUT BOARD *
PCB338A-SERIES ENCODER INTERFACE BOARD
----------m-B ---------------------------------
COMPUTING PCB327A-02 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT BOARD
MODULES PCB326A CENTRAL PROCESSOR INTERFACE BOARD
H10980A HAND HELD MAINTENANCE TERMINAL
PCB309A MATH AND ACTIVE TERMINATION BOARD
PCB328A-02 REAL TIME CLOCK BOARD
---------------------------------
COMMUNICATION PCB341A-02 DUAL SERIAL INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD
OUTPUT PCB313A CURRENT LOOP CONTROL TRP BOARD
MODULES PCB340A-01 RS232 TRP BOARD
PCB290A CURRENT LOOP TRP BOARD
H12010A ISMI MASTER MODULE
H12009A ISMI SLAVE MODULE
PCB295A DISPLAY CONTROLLER BOARD
PCB287A DISPLAY BOARD - VERTICAL
PCB288A-02 DISPLAY BOARD - HORIZONTAL
PCB289A DISPLAY BOARD - CIRCULAR METER
H11062A KEYPAD MODULE
------------- ,-------------- ,---------------------------------
RELAY/ALARM PCB266A RELAY BOARD
OUTPUT MODULE HlZlZOA-SERIES RAILMOUNT RELAY
------------- ,-------------- ,---------------------------------
ANALOG OUTPUT PCB343A-SERIES DIGITAL TO ANALOG CONVERTER BOARD
MODULES PCB344A ANALOG OUTPUT TERMINATION BOARD
+----------------------- ---------------------------------------
Table 5.1: Field Replacement Module List

REPAIR 5-2 PRELIMINARY RELEASE 9/89

1 HARTIN-DZlCERTECRNICALHARUAL 1 SPETRUH 1000 SYsTEn I TmOllI

+ ,________---_---_---------------------------------------------- .t
PART NUMBER PART NAME PART OF
-------------- ------------------------------------- ---mm----
A11274A HEATSINK, POWER SUPPLY H12056A
A11377A HEATSINK, TOP H12056A
H10555A JUMPER, 0.1" SPACING H12056A
H10955A-SERIES EPROM SET, ADC PCB282A
H11061A-SERIES EPROM SET, SIGNAL CONDITIONER CPU H12056A
HllOgOA-SERIES EPROM SET, DISPLAY CONTROLLER H12055A
H12037A-01 EPROM SET, PIB PCB270A
H12072A-01 TRANSIENT PROTECTOR, AC INPUT, 125VAC H11059A
H11008A-05 AC POWER, RF1 FILTER, 6A-120V/4A-250V H11059A
H12082A 333
... FAN, 12VDC H12056A
H12083A-06 FLAT CABLE TERMINATION MODULE, 34 PIN H12056A
H12085A SWITCH, 15A, 125VAC H11059A
H12120A-03 RELAY, RAILMOUNT, 24VDC, DPDT H12056A
H12284A-01 FUSE, 2 AMP, SPECIAL FOR H12054A H12054A
H1507-25 FUSE, 3 AMP, 250 V, SLO-BLOW, 3AG H11059A
H1507-28 FUSE, 5 AMP, 250 V, SLO-BLOW, 3AG H11070A
H1507-33 FUSE, 15 AMP, 32 V, SLO-BLOW, 3AG H10800A
KT1098A HAND HELD TERMINAL KIT H12056A
KT1121A-01 WIRE HARNESS AND CABLE KIT, SCU H12056A
KT1122A-01 GASKET KIT, SCU H12056A
KT1123A-01 GASKET KIT, DISPLAY PANEL H12055A
PCB345A TRP MOTHERBOARDASSEMBLY H12056A
PCB353A CARD RACK, STD BUS, 16 SLOT H12056A
H1689-8S CONNECTOR, EXT, SCON AC POWER H12056A
H1689-9S CONNECTOR, EXT, BATTERY POWER H12056A
K620-20C PIN, DISPLAY PANEL LATCH H12055A
A11310A ASSEMBLY, LATCH DISPLAY PANEL H12055A
B10517A LABEL SET EXTRACTOR H12056A
B10524A LABEL, SCON, INTERIOR, COMPONENTLOC. H12056A
H10420A FUSE HOLDER, RF1 H11059A
H10979A LCD, BAR GRAPH DISPLAY PCB287A
PCB288A
H10974A-05 LCD, NUMERIC, 7 SEGMENT DISPLAY PCB287A
PCB288A
H10975A-01 LCD, 128 PIN METER DISPLAY PCB289A
+--------------------------------------------------- -a---- .#.B---+

Table 5.2: Common Field Replacement Parts List

Note: An * indicates listing in Table 5.3; Field Repairable
Hodule List

PRELInImlmY RELEASE 9/89 5-3

 ------- -------I_--------------- ---mm--

i
HARTIR-D~TEZENICALHARUAL I SPRCTRUM 1000 SYsTEn I RnOlli

PART NUMBER PART N A M E CAN REPLACE REPLACEMENT P/N

-------------- i--------------------- -------w------
H10800A AC POWER SURGE PROT. AC POWER FUSE H1507-33
H11059A AC POWER PANEL AC PWR TRP H12072A-01
AC PWR FILTER H11008A-05
AC PWR S W ITCH H12085A
BATTERY S W ITCH H12085A
FUSE HOLDER AC H10420A
AC POWER FUSE H1507-25

H11070A-01 DC POWER SUPPLY INTERNAL FUSE H1507-28

H12054A-02115 IS POWER SUPPLY INTERNAL FUSE H12284A-01 (SEE
WARNING BELOW)
PCB287A DISPLAY BOARD - VERT. LCD, BAR GRAPH H10979A
LCD, NUMERIC H10974A-05
PCB288A-02 DISPLAY BOARD - HORI. LCD, BAR GRAPH H10979A
LCD, NUMERIC H10974A-05
PCB289A DISPLAY BOARD - CIRC. LCD, CIRCULAR H10975A-01
+----------------------------------------------------------------------+
Table 5.3: Field Repairable M odule List

The Intrinsically Safe Power Supply: Rl2054A-02115 has

special fusing requirem ents. Ro substitutions are
authorized. Failure to use the Rl2248A-01 fuse m ay
render the system unsafe.

REPAIR 5-4 PRELIMINARY RELEASE 9/89

i HARTIN-DECKERTECENIcALI(ANaAL 1 SPECTR= 1000 SYSTEM 1 m0lli
+---------- -------------------------------------------*

5.01.02 GRGARIZATIGR The remainder of this section is organized

as follows: _
The section
titled General nodule Replacement details in broad
terms must be accomplished
what in replacing a module. The next
section; Specific Module Replacwent Procedures gives specific
per module instructions for replacement.
The section titled General Module Repair provides information,
again in broad terms, on what steps should be taken to perform
field repair work. The section that follows this; Specific
nodule Repair Procedures describes specific per module instruc-
tions on repair.
The Repair section concludes with the section 5.06 Software Only
Replacement Procedures which explains how to perform replacement
of the System and/or Board level software.

The printed circuit boards used in this system contain

static sensitive parts. Improper handling will result
in da-age. Prior to touching a PC board the technician
should taken adeguate measures to remve any static
potential he may have acquired. All PC boards should be
handled only by there edges and transported in anti-
static shipping materials,

All the information presented is the latest available at the

time of this printing. Contact Martin-Decker for the latest
information about a particular module if the details shown here
do not agree.

5.02.01 Gm Ly)DuLg RRP-. This can be broken down into

a series of general steps:
5.02.01.01 Be aware that replacing certain modules may require
physical access that will block the view of the Driller tempo-
rarily.

PRELIHINARY RELEASE 9/89 5-5 RRPAIR

 ------------___------__------------ m-------------+

MART 1 SPRcTRm 1000 S Y I Tul

+
i

-------------------

5 De it is sa t open t equipmen (See

Warning below

If p u r g e d equipmen mus be opened f ma

ensure t a r e a is clear o a h a z a r d o u s condi
be t equipmen is o p e n e d

5 T a k e all appropria measures t ensure your person-

nel sa
E n s u r e by t or lockout devices t e q u i p m e n will no be
energized t is b e i n g w o r k e d o n This applies t bo devices
t could g e n e r a a n electrical shock a n d mechanical devices
t m c a u s e injury if t w e r e ac during t repair
procedure
Be aware o w h e r e sa equipmen is located on t rig.
U s e sa harnesses t preven f
5 P t ac repair t ensure t procedure is
clear and t all required t are on hand e
5 If t replaced m o d u l e will require a cold start
and recalibration ensure t all infor required t
per t cold start or recalibration h a s b e e n written down
I t write d o w n
A alarm se poin
A graph se poin
A n y historical values such as Ti on B Ton M e
Check t C h a n n e l list located in t S Condi
door pocke f "invisible" or h i d d e n se poin
T h e values o all basic pulse channel PPUs
If installed t DAC Channels scale values.
If reassigned t channel reassignmen
No This infor m a y already b e available in t S
Condi door pocke If it is verify it b e proceeding

RRPA 5-6 PREL RELEASX 9

T----

IlUUtTIN-DECKERTECEBICALl4ANUAL 1 SPRCTRW 1000 SYSTI# 1 ~~10lli

+-~------------ -----------------------------------------------+

5.02.01.06 Replace the m odule by following the specific in-

structions contained in the appropriate section 5.03-n.
Follow the Static Caution above as required.
5.02.01.07 After the repair is com pleted rem ove any tags or
lockouts and retest the system to ensure the repair fixed the
problem .
5.02.01.08 If the replaced part will require a cold start or
recalibration perform these now. (If these are required the
specific m odule replacem ent instruction will so indicate).
Ensure that all channel values that are cum ulative are reen-
tered.
Retest as required to ensure the equipm ent is operating norm al-
lY*
Perform a System test to ensure additional problems that m ight
have been hidden before due to the nature of the first failure
are not now evident. If additional problems are found correct
them by following this procedure.
5.02.01.09 M artin-Decker should be contacted for disposition of
m odules determ ined to have failed during the Warranty period.
It is requested that a full description of the failure be at-
tached to any m odule returned for repair to M artin-Decker. This
is required for m odules subm itted under Warranty.
5.02.01.10 Update the docum entation located in the Signal Condi-
tioner's door pocket as required.

PRELIMINARY RELEASE 9/89 5-7 REpAIR

+----------------------------------------~-- ~-------------~~*
1 HARTIN-DEICER TBCRNICAL HANUAL 1 SPECTRUH 1000 SYSTm 1 -0111
+---------------------------------------~---------~-+

5.03 SPECIFIC ZMXKJLE REP- PRocmmm

5.03.01 GENERAL INEWRHATION. After the faulty module is identi-

fied and the Section General Xodule Replacement Procedure has
been completed to Section 5.02.01.06; the technician follows the
appropriate section below to accomplish the removal/and or
repair work. Once this task is completed the remainder of the
Section General Module Replacement Procedure should be followed.
If the module is contained in Table 5.3 Field Repairable nodule
List the faulty module can be repaired on site to a limited
extent. Refer to the sections titled General Module Repair
Procedures and Specific nodule Repair Procedures for additional
information. However if the repair consists of changing a fuse
it will be covered in the General nodule Replacement Procedure
section.
In all cases verify the replacement module is the correct Part
Number and Dash Number. Where configuration jumpers (or switch-
es) are used verify the replacement module's jumpers match the
faulty module's jumpers. If EPROMS or PALS must be removed from
the faulty module and installed on the replacement module refer
to Section 5.06 Software Only Replacement Procedures for addi-
tional instructions.

REPAIR 5-8 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

+--------a __------------------__________u_______ -------+

1 HART I S P R C T R U H1 0 0 0 S Y S T m I Tul
+ -e--e----- ------v--

5 Recalibration, S Cold S a n d B o a r d Level C o l d

S The replacemen o certain m o d u l e s m a y require o n e or a
combina o t f t t be comple a t
syste is repaired
B o a r d Level Cold S
S Cold S
Channel Recalibration
Each o t f m o d u l e sections de if any o t
above t are required a n d in w h a order t should b e per-
f f t par module
S o m e rules o t concerning when Board and S Level Cold
S c a n b e stated:
If a S Level C o l d S is required t t P mus
first have a P B o a r d Level C o l d S per be t
S Level C o l d S is d o n e
If a P B o a r d Level C o l d S is p e r t a S
Level C o l d S mus immedia f
If a n A D C B o a r d Level C o l d S is p e r t a S
Level C o l d S is required E t means t ADC
B o a r d Level C o l d S is p e r t a P Board Level
Cold S is p e r a n d fi a S Level C o l d S is
per
W h e n ever a B o a r d Level C o l d S is p e r t t associ-
a physical channels m u s b e recalibrated.
For t ADC board t m e a n s all A n a l o g C h a n n e l s f t P
board t m e a n s all pulse channels
When a S Level Colds S is p e r t t Display
Panel and o infor mus be reen into t S
See Sec 5 f a list o t infor t will
be reen
If S Level so is changed a S Cold S is
required

PRKL -I 9 5-9 REPA

+-------------------------- ----------------------------+
1 HARTIN-DECKERTECRNICALMAtW4L 1 SPECTRUN 1000 syST= I TmOllI
+-------------------------------~---- --------------+

The directions on how to perform an ADC Board Level Cold Start

are in Section 5.03.12 PC8282.A; A/D CORVERTERKMRD.
The directions on how to perform a PIB Board Level Cold Start
are in Section 5.03.14 PC8270A; PULSE INPDT ROARD.
The information on how to perform a System Level Cold Start can
be found in the Spectrum 1000 User's Manual; TWlOll-IO Section
7.10 RESET PRV:
Information on how to perform analog and pulse channels recali-
brations can be found in the Spectrum 1000 User's Hanual;
!CWlO11-IO. Section 4.00 CALIRRATION
Information on Software replacement can be found in Section 5.06
Software Only Replacement Procedures.

RRPAIR S-10 PRBLININARY RgLEAsg 9/89

+--------------e ~~~~--~~~~--~-~~-----~~~~---~~----+
1 HARTIN-DEcKERT.ECRNICALMNDAL I SPBCTRUH 1000 SYSTRI I TulOllI
+----------------------- ---------------------------------+

S-03.03 Rl0578B; AC Line Regulator.

This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished
the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GENKRAL NDDULE
REE%ACEe(EHT through section 5.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC MODULE REE%AC~PROCEtKlRESGRNERALINmXk
HATION and Section S-03.02 Recalibration, System Cold Starts
and Board Level Cold Starts.
Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: Replacement will shut down the entire system.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? No.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? If H10800A was
supplied it has an external fuse which may be changed; if the
H10800B was supplied it has a circuit breaker but is not
repairable.
Note: The H10578B AC Line Regulator is composed of two de-
vices; an AC Power Surge Protector which is wired or plugged
into the mains and the AC Line Regulator which plugs into the
Surge Protector. The Signal Conditioner and the IS Power
Supply are plugged into the output of the Line Regulator.
First determine which device is malfunctioning:
TEST CBECKS FOR TBE El0800A; AC Pmm SURGE PRm!Ec!KlR (LATE
NDDEL) :

Unplug all devices plugged into the Surge Protector.

The AC Power Surge Protector has an on-off switch and a
circuit breaker. Ensure the AC switch is on and the breaker
has not popped.
The Surge Protector has three status lights.
The indicator marker PWR should be on.
The indicator marker H-N. should be on.
The indicator marker H-G Should be on.
Check the input to the AC Surge Protector; the voltage
should be 108 to 132 VAC.

PRELININMIY RPSEASE 9/89 5-11 REPAIR

 T
i HARTIN-DEKBR TECHNICAL HANDAL 1 SPETRDn
+------------------------------------ ------------I__
1000 SYsTEn I TulOllI
-----------+

If the voltage is not present obtain a source of excitation.

When the voltage is present proceed.
If either H-N or H-G indicators are not illuminated replace
the unit.
Check the output of the AC Surge Protector. The voltage
should be 108 to 132 VAC.
If the AC Surge Protector fails the above tests or has bad
or no output voltage with good input voltage it should be
replaced.
TEST CHEKS POR TEE EU0800A; AC PWER SURGE PROTEC!l!OR (E?iRLY
NOD-):
Unplug all devices plugged into the Surge Protector.
Check the input to the AC Surge Protector; the voltage
should be 108 to 132 VAC.
If the voltage is not present obtain a source of excitation.
When the voltage is present proceed.
Check the output of the AC Surge Protector. The voltage
should be 108 to 132 VAC.
If the AC Surge Protector fails the above tests or has bad
or no output voltage with good input voltage check the fuse
on the AC Power Surge Protector. This should be a 15 AMP, 32
V Slow Blow fuse. Replace it if blown and retest. If it
blows again replace the Protector.
TEST CRECKS FOR TBE El0578B; AC LINE REDLAm:
Follow the same checks as above except test the AC Line
Regulator. If it has no output with a good input replace it.
Observe the output voltage. It should not deviate more than
3% with an input variation of 15%; if it does the unit needs
to be replaced.

REPAIR 5-12 PRELININl4RY RELEliSB 9/89

+--------------------------------------------- ---------+
IMARTIN-DBCEERTRCRNICALMRUAL 1 SPEcTRtm 1000 SYsTRl I TbnOllI

PROCEDIJREFURREPLUXNGTHEACWWERSURGEPROTECTORORTREAC
LINE REGDLA!LX)R:
Turn off or unplug all equipment sourced from the device.
Isolate the AC power and remove the input cable.
Remove and replace the unit.
Reconnect the input cable and reapply AC power.
Turn the device on and check for the proper AC output volt-
age. (If the Line Regulator was replaced also check the line
regulation.)
Plug in all equipment sourced from the device and turn on
the equipment.
Verify the System is operating normally.
Return to Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replace-
ment Procedure.

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 5-13 REPAIR

+--------------wBm.----------------wBs--e-- --------------~-+

1 HARTIH-DXICER~ICALMHIAL 1 SPHZTRUH 1000 SYSTm I TulOll)

5.03.04 Rl1059A; AC PWER PANEL.

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: Replacement will shut down the Signal Conditioner.
The Display Panel and Prism 1000 will not receive data during
this time.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? No.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? Yes.
PRocEDuRgpoRREpLAcINGTKEACpowERPA#EL:
This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished
the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 Gm HODOLE
mm through section 5.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC llMlIJLg REP- B GENERAL
IRFDRHATIOU and Section S-03.02 Recalibration, System Cold
Starts and Board Level Cold Starts.

Turn off the Signal Conditioner's AC power. Turn off the

Signal Conditioner's battery power.
Remove the fuse and inspect it for continuity with a DVM.
This is a 3 AMP, 250 V 3AG fuse. If it is blown replace it.
Reapply AC power. If the Signal Conditioner now operates
return to Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Re-
placement Procedure.

Turn off the Signal Conditioner's AC power. Turn off the

Signal Conditioner's battery power.
Unplug the AC power line from the Line Regulator or isolate
the AC power from the mains. Disconnect the battery (if
used).
Disconnect both the AC power 'cable and the battery cable (if
used). (Protect the free cable ends from dirt and moisture.)
On th-e Main Power supply verify the 5 wires attached to the
bottom terminal strip (TBZ) have location markings (wire
numbers) attached. Mark them if they do not and then remove

REPAIR 5-14 PRELININARY -E 9/89

+---------------------

1 HARTIN-DEICER TECRNICAL HANDAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTRI 1 TulOllI

+--------------------------------------- ----------------+

all 5 wires.
Note: The AC Power Panel has several parts that can be
replaced; in general it is easier to remove the panel and
then repair it then to perform repairs with it installed.
Remove the Lexan cover plate that attaches to the AC Power
Panel. It may be necessary to remove several Sensor TRP
cards to allow room for the screwdriver to undo one of the
cover plate screws. If cards are removed ensure they are
marked so they can be replaced where they came from.
Now remove the 10 external screws that secure the AC power
Panel (4 Top, 4 Bottom, 1 each side).
Along with the gasket pull the AC power panel from the
Signal Conditioner Enclosure being careful not to snag the 5
free wires.
The technician is left to decide, based on System down time
and parts availability, if the panel should be replaced or
if further troubleshooting and repair are justified.
If the panel is to be repaired further then refer to Section
5.04 General Hodule Repair Procedure and Section 5.05 Spe-
cific Hodule Repair Procedures.
Table 5.3; Field Repairable Module List details what specif-
ic parts can be replaced on the AC Power Panel.
After the panel is repaired or if a replacement panel is to
be installed proceed as follows:
Carefully inspect the AC Power Panel Gasket (B10417A; Gas-
ket, AC Power Panel. Part of KT1122A-01; Kit Gaskets, Signal
Conditioner Spectrum 1000) and if unserviceable replace it.
Reassembly the gasket, panel and screws (use a threadlocking
adhesive; i.e. Locktite 242) and then mount the panel to the
Signal Conditioner insuring the 5 wires are not caught.
Attach the internal cover and replace the TRP boards if
removed.
Reconnect the AC power cable and the battery cable.
Apply AC power and reconnect the battery (if used).
Verify the AC power panel is now passing 120 VAC and 24 VDC
(Battery voltage if installed) as follows:

PRELIHIRARY RZLEASE 9/89 5-15 REPAIR

 ---- ----------------- ------------------------+
i HARTIIil-DECEERTICRRICALRiMJAL 1 SPECTRUH 1000 SYsTm I rwlOllI
+---------------------------------------------------~----------+

Wire the 5 free wires to TB2 of the main power supply per
their wire markings.
Turn on the Signal Conditioner's AC power switch.
Set up the DVM to measure 120 VAC. The test point is TB2
between Pins 1 and Pin 2.
Measure 108 to 132 VAC at the location above.
Turn off the AC power switch.
Turn on the battery switch
Set up the DVM to measure 30 VDC.
Attach the positive meter probe to TB2 Pin 4 and the nega-
tive to Pin 5.
Verify the meter reads between 19 to 26 volts DC at the
location above.
Turn the AC power switch on. Turn the battery switch on.
Verify the repair fixed the original problem.
Return to Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replace-
ment Procedure.

REPAIR 5-16 PRELININARY RKLBASE 9/89

+----------------------------------mm- me-- -------m------+

1 MART TEEbl 1 S P E T R D H 1 0 0 0 S Y S T E M 1 Twl

5 Rl107OA-01 D C P O W E RS U P P L Y
B o a r d Level C o l d S No required
S Cold S No required
C h a n n e l Recalibration: No required
E R e p l a c e m e n will shu down t S Condi
T h e Display P a n e l a n d P 1 0 0 0 will n o receive d a during
t ti
Jumpers n e e d verification? Yes
So needs t b e transferred? No
Is t module f repairable o n site? Yes t internal
f c a n b e replaced
PROCEDDREFORR
This p r o c e d u r e a s s u m e s t t h a s first accomplished
t t as described in S e c 5 Gm HODULE
REPLACE t section 5 and read Sec
5 SPEC MKNJLEREPLACRENTPaocgDllREsGEBlKRAL
HAT and Sec 5 Recalibration, S Cold S
a n d B o a r d Level C o l d S
tx
Turn o t S Condi AC power Turn o t
S Condi ba power
Unplug t A C p o w e r line fro t Line Regula or isolate
t A C p o w e r fro t ma Disconnec t ba (if
used)
Disconnec bo t A C p o w e r cable a n d t ba cable (if
used) (Pro t free cable e n d s fro dirt and mo
DC Power Supply I Fuse replacemen
Follow t above procedure t t poin be proceed-
ing Remove t cover t t Power Supply It is secured
by 4 screws. T h e f is located n e a r T B 2 i. t S wire
t
It should be a 5 A M P 250 V 3 A G slow b l o w f P
H1507-28
R e m o v e a n d check t f with a D V M If f replace
it.
Replace t cover and plug back in t Ba and AC

PREL RELRASR9 5-17 REPA

1 MARTIN-DECKERTECRBJICALHANDAL 1 SP== 1000 SYSTI# I T~1.0lli
+----------------------------------------------~------------*

power cables removed above.

Reapply AC power and turn the AC and Battery switches on.
If the power supply starts up check each output voltage
on TBl (5 VDC, 12 VDC FR, -12 VDC, 12 VDC SR) per the
appropriate troubleshooting tree.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
dure.
If these checks are not within specifications redo the above
procedure till the start of the fuse replacement section and
continue with the next paragraph.
On the Main Power supply verify the 5 wires attached to the
bottom terminal strip (TB 2) have location markings (wire
numbers) attached. Mark them if they do not and then remove
all S wires.
If the installation is such that disconnecting the power
supplies output cable at the power supply (TBl) is not
practical the following procedure can be performed. This
removes the Power Supply with the cable attached.
Loosen the left side of the STD bus card cage to allow
access to the rear of the card cage. Disengage the DC
power cable attached to the left rear of the card cage.
Disengage the DC power cable attached to the Sensor Power
Supply (54 of PCB293A; left end of card cage.)
Cut two tie wraps securing the cable to the top and rear
of the enclosure.
This frees the DC power cable so it can be removed from
the enclosure along with the power supply. This technique
allows the Power Supply/Heat sink combination to be moved
to a clean area for further disassembly.
Alternately the output cable can be removed as indicated
below.
Removed the 14 exterior screws that attached the Power
Supply Assembly (Heat sink attached to the Power Supply).
If the DC output cable was disconnected the entire assembly
with cable can be removed from the unit.

REPAIR 5-18 PRKLIHIHARY RELEASE 9/89

+------------ --------w--I__ ------.B--------+

1 HART 1 sPEcTRDn 1000 S Y I lwl

+ B e - ------_--_-----------------~------------ -------

If t DC ou cable will b e left in t uni slowly

withdraw t S u p p l y assembly t t hole and
ro it so t t t block c a n b e accessed Tie t
p o w e r supply o so it will n o d r o p w h e n all t wires a r e
de
Irregardless which m e is u s e d a b o v e verify t all
wires a t t supply h a v e t correct wire
markers iden A no t position o t 3
wire j u m p e r s
R e m o v e all wires a t TBl Remove t Power Supply
assembly a n d t t uni t a clean dry a r e a
If t DC ou cable is still a r e m o v e it with t
3 jumpers
Remove t 4 screws which a t Hea sink t t
Power Supply and separa t
Apply a t layer o T h e r m a l Joint C o m p o u n d P X10117A-
000003 be t old h e a sink a n d t n e w p o w e r supply.
I t 4 screws a n d nylon washers a n d secure t hea
sink t t p o w e r supply.
JuMPm VER
T h e two j u m p e r s discussed b e l o w a r e a p p r o x i m a 5 inches
fro t TB2 end o t p o w e r supply (top) a n d 1 inch fro
t e d g e (front). T h e y a r e viewable t t cover w h e n
t P o w e r S u p p l y assembly is installed in t S
Condi
If t S Condi h a s a n ex ba t t
B A T L O W j u m p e r discussed b e l o w should b e installed. If no
ba is u s e d t t A C L O W j u m p e r should b e in-
stalled.
On t new Power Supply if t ba op I NOT
installed, verify t j u m p e r s a r e placed f AC L O W and 15
S e c o n d s i. bo j u m p e r s a r e e v e n with t PC board
e d g e C h a n g e if required
If t ba op I installed, verify t jumpers are
placed f B A T L O W a n d 1 5 S e c o n d s i. t t jumper (15
second is e v e n with t PC board edge and t lower
j u m p e r ( B A T L O W is a w a y fro t b o a r d e d g e C h a n g e if
required

PR RELEASE 9 5-19 REPA

i MARTIN-DE'KBR
+----------------------
TECRNICAL MANUAL 1 SPW~
------vB----I_--
1000 SY~ 1 -0li[
---------+

Note: If the BAT LOW jumper is selected but no batteries

are attached the Display Panel's status indicator for
Battery may not Operate properly.
Inspect the AC voltage plug-in PC board selector. This
should be viewed from the end of the power supply which
houses TB2 and is next to TB2. The selector should read
"115 VAC". If it does not remove the PC plug-in selector
and reorient till it does.
If the DC cable was removed with the old supply reattach it
to the new supply per its wire numbers. Remember to wire in
the 3 separate jumpers.
Carefully inspect the DC Power Supply gasket (B10418A;
Gasket, Extrusion, Power Supply. Part of KT1122A-01; Kit
Gaskets, Signal Conditioner Spectrum 1000) and if unservice-
able replace it.
If the DC cable was left in the Signal Conditioner tie off
the Power Supply assembly and reattach the cable as de-
scribed above.
Either remove the tie off and rotate the assembly into place
or feed the DC cable carefully into the Signal Conditioner.
Attach the DC Power Assembly and gasket to the Signal Condi-
tioner using 14 screws.
Route, secure with new tie wraps, and plug in the DC output
cable if it was removed; one end engages in the STD card
cage and the other terminates on the Sensor Power Supply;
PCB293A, 54.
If the DC cable was left in the Signal Conditioner wire in
the DC output cable to TBl of the Power Supply. Remember to
wire in the 3 separate jumpers.
Plug back in the Battery and AC power cables removed above.
Reapply AC power and turn the AC and Battery switches on.
If the power supply starts up check each output voltage on
TBl (5 VDC, 12 VDC FR, -12 VDC, 12 VDC SR) per the appropri-
ate troubleshooting tree.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
durp

REPAIR S-20 PRELININMY RELEASE 9/89

.-
1 MARTIN-DHXERTXZHNICALMANDAL 1 SP-~ 1000 SYSTBW 1 Rn0,ii
+------------------------------------ -------------a-----+

S-03.06 PCB293A; SENSOR PUVER SUPPLY

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: Replacement will shut down the Signal Conditioner.
The Display Panel and Prism 1000 will not receive data during
this time.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? Yes.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? No.

This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished

the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GENBRAL nMMLg
RIZP- through section 5.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC mDoLE REPLAcmmlT PRocmmH GmImmL IMFWX-
HATIOBI and Section 5.03.02 REALIBRATIOU, SYSTm COLD STARTS
ANDKNhRDLEvELaxJDsTARTs.

Turn off the Signal Conditioner's AC power. Turn off the

Signal Conditioner's battery power.
Remove the three cables which attach to the Sensor Power
Supply at:
54 (Input from Main DC Power Supply; Bottom of Board; 9 Pin)
Jl (Output to TRP Motherboard; Top of Board; 6 Pin)
52 (Output to Fan assembly; Top of Board; 3 Pin)
Remove 6 fasteners (screws, lock washers and washers) which
secure the Sensor Power Supply Board to the STD card cage.
Carefully pull the board forward to exposed TBl; located on
the rear of the board. Remove the 14 AWG ground wire at-
tached to TBl, Pin 1.
Remove the jumper located on TBl between Pin 2 and 3. In-
stall this jumper on the new board in the same location.
Attach the 14 AWG ground wire disconnected above to TBl, Pin
1.

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 5-21 REPAIR

 -----------_I -----------------------~~~~~~~------+

H A R T I N - D E C I L E B T E C E N I C A L M A N U A L 1 S P E C T R U M1 0 0 0 S Y !sTRl I !m lO ll)
+ --v------------------------ ---------------------e-v----+
i

Install th e n e w b o a r d o n th e side o f th e S T D card c a g e using

th e r e m o v e d h a r d w a r e . E n s u r e th e g r o u n d wire a b o v e is r o u te d
in its original position.
Reconnect th e th r e e cables disconnecte d a b o v e to 5 4 , Jl and
52.
Ensure th e Circuit breaker o n th e S e n s o r P o w e r supply is
closed. ( T h e b u tto n is in).
T u r n o n th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r 's b a ttery power. T u r n o n th e
S ignal C o n d i tio n e r 's AC power.
O n th e S e n s o r P o w e r S u p p l y L E D C R 1 should b e o n (the to p
L E D ) a n d L E D C R 2 should b e o ff (the lower LED).
If th e L E D s a r e lit opposite th e a b o v e (lower o n a n d to p
o ff) th e circuit breaker h a s o p e n e d a n d furth e r trouble-
s h o o tin g is required.
O n th e Sensor Power Supply m e a s u r e th e following:
V o lta g e P o s i tive P robe N e g a tive P r o b e Comment
-12 VDC T P 3 Y e llow T P l B lack Pass Thru
+12 VDC SR TP4 O range T P l B lack In p u t to P S l
b e fo r e C B
+12VDC FR J5; P in 7 T P l B lack Pass Thru
+12 VDC SR TP6 O range T P l B lack In p u t to P S l
a fter CB
+30 VDC TP2 Red T P S B lack o u tp u t o f P S l
If th e s e checks a r e within specifications th e n retu r n to
S e c tio n 5 .0 2 .0 1 .0 7 a n d c o m p l e te th e G e n e r a l R e p l a c e m e n t P roce-
dure.

R R P A IR 5-22 P R E L ININhRY R E L E M B 9 /8 9
+-----------me--------------- -------------~-+
1 HARTIN-DEKERTECRNICALHANUAL 1 SPECTRUH 1000 SYSTm I TulOllI
+ ----m--------- -----------------------------+

5.03.07 PcB29lA-SERIES; SENSOR TRP mDuLE

Note: The Sensbr TRP Module power section is not repairable:
the board is removed and replaced.
For specific instructions refer to Section 5.03.10
Sensor TRP Module; Analog. Which applies to:
PCB291A-1
PCB291A-2
PCB291A-3
PCB291A-4
For:
PCB291A-5
PCB291A-6
PCB291A-7
PCB291A-8
refer to Section 5.03.13 Sensor TRP Mule Pulse.

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 5-23 REPAIR

 T
i HARTIN-DECKERTECENICALHUUAL
+----------------------------------
1 SPECTRDN 1000 SYsTrn
-------------------------+
I !mlOllI

5.03.08 PCB296A; TRP POWER NODULE

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Note: Due to the design of the PCB296A-Series modules they can
be removed and replaced with the Signal Conditioner still
powered.
Effects: Replacement does not remove the system from service.
(Of course the equipment powered by the bad module will al-
ready be down.)
Jumpers/Switches need verification? No.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? No.
pRocEDDREmRREPLAcINGTHETRPpowgRmwLE
This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished
the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GBMERAL w)DIJLE
REP- through section 5.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC H)DuL.E REP- PBocBDDaEs GglygRAL I--
HATION and Section 5.03.02 EWCALIERATION, SYSTR# COLD STAR!l!S
ANDROARDLEiVELCOLDSTARlYS.

Note: The Slot number is the same as the Terminal Block

number: i.e. Slot 546 is wired to TB46.
Dash 01 is 12 VDC; Dash 02 is 24 VDC.
Determine which Power Module is to be replaced. .
Pull the associated Terminal Block's plug.
Locate the correct slot on the TRP Mother board. Remove the
board by pulling straight out.
Verify the replacement is the same dash number.
Plug in the new board making.sure it goes into the correct
slot.
The TRP'Power Module's red LED (CR4) should be lit. (This
mean% output power is available).

REPAIR 5-24 PRELININARY RKLEASE 9/89

+--------------------------------------- -----------~~~+
IHARTIN-DECKER !l!ECRHICALUNUAL 1 SPEcfRun 1000 sys!rm I TulOllI
+---------------------------------------~- -----------------+

Using a DVM measure 12 VDC on the Power Module between TP2,

orange (positive) and TP4, black (negative). This is the
input to the Power Module.
Next measure between TPl, black (positive) and TP3, green
(negative). The voltage depends on the dash number in-
stalled. This is the output of the Power Module.
Measure on the TRP's associated terminal block the correct
voltage for the Power Module's dash number installed. Meas-
ure with a DVM between Pin 1 (positive) and Pin 4
(negative).
If all the above voltages are correct proceed. Otherwise
return to troubleshooting.
Plug in the wire termination plug removed above.
Verify this corrective action has fixed the original prob-
lem.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
dure.

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 5-25 REPAIR

+---------------------- ---------- me--------

1 H A R T I N - D E K E R T E C E N I C A L M A N U A L 1 S P E T E W H 1 0 0 0 S Y S T E n 1 Tiiiiii
.

5 .0 3 .0 9 H l 2 0 5 4 - S E R IE S ; IIW R I N S I C A L L Y S A F E P O W E RS D P P L Y
B o a r d Level C o l d S tarts: N o t required.
S ystem C o l d S tart: N o t required.
C h a n n e l Recalibration: N o t required.
E ffects: This is b a s e d o n h o w th e S ystem 's A C P o w e r is r o u te d .
Normally th e o u tp u t o f th e A C P o w e r R e g u l a tor g o e s to a junc-
tio n b o x w h e r e it th e n r o u tes to b o th th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r
a n d th e IS P o w e r S u p p l y . If this r o u tin g is u s e d th e n replace-
m e n t o f th e IS P o w e r S u p p l y will ta k e th e e n tire S ystem o u t o f
service for a short period o f tim e .
If a n alternate r o u tin g w a s u s e d th a t allows th e safe isola-
tio n o f th e M a ins p o w e r to only th e IS p o w e r S u p p l y th e n only
th e Display P a n e l will b e ta k e n o u t o f service. T h e S ignal
C o n d i tio n e r w o u l d c o n tin u e to o p e r a te a n d th e r e fo r e P rism 1 0 0 0
(if used) w o u l d c o n tin u e to o p e r a te .
J u m p e r s /S w itches n e e d verification? No.
S o ftw a r e n e e d s to b e transferred? No.
Is this m o d u l e furth e r repairable o n site? Y e s ; th e internal
fu s e c a n b e replaced.
P R W E D D R E m R R E e L a c Iffi !r5B IH!rRIm IsIcA L L Y s A F E ~ s u l ? P L Y
This p r o c e d u r e a s s u m e s th e technician h a s first accomplished
th e tasks as described in S e c tio n 5 .0 2 .0 1 .0 1 G E N E R A LM M J L E
R .lZP v th r o u g h section 5 .0 2 .0 1 .0 5 a n d r e a d S e c tio n
5 .0 3 .0 1 S P E C IFIC H O D D L B R E P ~ P ~ G E N K R A L INP0R-
H A T IO N a n d S e c tio n S - 0 3 .0 2 I!tE A L IB R A T IO N , S Y S T m C O L D S T A R T S
ANDROARDLEVELCOLDSTARTS.
N o te : T h e In trinsically S a fe P o w e r S u p p l y is supplied prewired
from th e factory to a c c o m m o d a te only o n e i n p u t p o w e r source.
It is wired for either 1 1 5 V A C i n p u t or 2 2 0 V A C i n p u t. It
c a n n o t b e c h a n g e d in th e field. R e fer to th e m e tal ta g o n th e
front d o o r or th e small label inside th e front d o o r for th e
prewired i n p u t voltage.

- A IR 5-26 P R E L ININhRY R E L E A S E 9 /8 9
+-------------------------------------------------------------+
1 MARTIN-DERRRTRCRNICALRANDAL 1 SPECTRUH 1000 SYSTIPI I TulOllI
.

WARNING
Any attempt to modify the input power characteristics
of the Intrinsically Safe Power Supply may cause the
power supply to fail and could endanger equipment or
cause serious injury or loss of life. Any modifications
to the power supply will violate its intrinsically safe
design and defeat the purpose of the power supply. Do
not modify the power supply in any way. Use an input
transformed if required.

IlRlRINSICALLY SAFR P(BIRR SUPPLY INTHWAL PDSE REP-:

Take the required steps to isolate the mains voltage from
the input to the box:
If wired to an AC Power breaker turn off the breaker and tag
it.
If wired directly into the AC Regulator simple pull the
associated output plug.
The IS Power Supply box requires a special key to unlock it.
Obtain the key and unlock the box.
Temporary remove the output DC wiring which connects to TB2
pin 1 (positive) and pin 2 (negative).
Remove the fuse.
Note: The IS power supply is designed to blow its internal
fuse if the output power voltage or current goes out of
specifications.
Measure the fuse with a DVM to ensure it is good.
If the fuse is good put it back in the supply.
If the fuse is open replace the fuse. This is a specially
designed and tested fuse. Use only M-D P/N H12284A-01.
See WARHIHG with Table 5.3 above.
Apply the mains AC power.
Measure with a DVM TB2 pin 1 (positive) and pin 2 (negative)
for 12 VDC.
If there is no output replace the IS Power Supply per the
instructions below.

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 5-27 RRPAIR

+------------------------------------------------------~-----~+
1 HARTIN-DEICER TBCHBICAL MANUAL 1 SPETRUH 1000 SYsTgn I TulOllI
+------------------------------------~-- --------------------+

If the voltage is correct remove AC power and attached the

DC wiring removed above. Reapply the AC power. Repeat the
above measurement for 12 VDC.
If there is no output a fault in the Display Panel may be
causing the IS Power Supply to blow its fuse. Additional
troubleshooting is required to isolate the problem. Skip the
next line.
If the voltage is still correct the IS Power Supply has been
repaired.
Close and lock the box; return the key to the person who
issued it. Return to Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the
General Replacement Procedure.

IN!FRINSICALLY SAFE POWER SUPPLY RXPV:

Take the required steps to isolate the mains voltage from
the input to the box:
If wired to an AC Power breaker turn off the breaker and tag
it.
If wired directly into the AC Regulator simple pull the
associated output plug.
The IS Power Supply box requires a special key to unlock it.
Obtain the key and unlock the box.
Ensure the AC Input and DC output wires are marked so they
can be rewired into their proper positions.
Remove the AC input wiring. Remove the DC output wiring.
Remove the earth safety ground wire(s) which attaches to an
external ground stud.
Remove the mounting hardware which secures the IS Power
Supply enclosure to the wall.
Replace the enclosure with the new supply. Ensure the new
supply is the same voltage as the supply being replaced.
Mount the new supply.
Note: If the safety ground wire was removed perform the
resistance check as outlined in TWlOll-IO; Section 3.07.02;
Safety Earth Ground Connection before it is reattached.

REPAIR 5-28 PREUNINARY R.ELEME 9/89

+---------------------------------------- --------v-w----+
1 WARTIN-DIEKERTECRBIICALHANUAL I SPECTRDH 1000 SYsTI# I TwlOllI
+ -----------------e-------------7 --------------------+

Attach the earth safety ground wire(s) to the external

ground stud.-
The two wiring hubs contain a gasket which must be placed
into the lip of the hub before reassembly. Ensure this is
done. Tighten the hubs to seal the wire.
On TBl reattached the input AC Power wiring: Line goes to
pin 1 'IL"; Neutral goes to pin 2; "N'; ground goes to pin 3
WE” .

On TB2 reattached the DC output wiring: TB2 pin 1 is posi-

tive, pin 2 is negative.
Reapply the input AC power.
Measure with a DVM TB2 pin 1 (positive) and pin 2 (negative)
for 12 VDC.
If the voltage is correct the IS Power Supply has been
repaired.
If the voltage is wrong continue troubleshooting.
Close and lock the box; return the key to the person who
issued it.
Return to Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replace-
ment Procedure.

PRXLININARY RELEASE 9/89 5-29

+-------------------------------------- ---------------a---+

1 M A R T IM - D E c K E w T E C E B l I C A L H i W C J A L I S P E C T R U H1 0 0 0 S Y S T B 3 nI !m O ll(
*--------------------------------------------------------------+

5 .0 3 .1 0 P c B 2 9 u k S E R IE S ; s E t!so R T R P m D u L E A w u a G
N o te : This section applies to :
PCB291A-1
PCB291A-2
PCB291A-3
PCB291A-4
For P C B 2 9 1 A - 5 ,6 ,7 ,8 refer to S e c tio n 5 .0 3 .1 3
B o a r d Level C o l d S tarts: N o t required.
S ystem C o l d S tart: N o t required.
C h a n n e l Recalibration: Y e s , for th e a ffecte d channel.
E ffects: R e p l a c e m e n t will a ffect o n e physical channel and any
calculated channels which u s e it.
J u m p e r s /S w itches n e e d verification? Yes.
S o ftw a r e n e e d s to b e transferred? No.
Is this m o d u l e furth e r repairable o n site? No.

This p r o c e d u r e a s s u m e s th e technician h a s first accomplished

th e tasks as described in S e c tio n 5 .0 2 .0 1 .0 1 G J B J K R A Lw ) w L E
REP- th r o u g h section 5 .0 2 .0 1 .0 5 a n d r e a d S e c tio n
s-03.0 1 S P E tcIP IC W D U L E R E P x A C R m U T P R o c E D tlR E s G ~ INFO R -
H A T IO N a n d S e c tio n S - 0 3 .0 2 R E C A L IB R A T IO N . S Y S T R t C O L D S T A R T S
ANDBOARDLEVELCOLDSTARTS.

N o te : D u e to th e design o f th e P C B 2 9 1 A - S e r i e s m o d u l e s th e y
c a n b e r e m o v e d a n d replaced with th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r
still powered.
L o c a te th e correct slot o n th e T R P M o th e r board. R e m o v e th e
b o a r d by pulling straight o u t.
V e r i fy th e replacement is th e same dash number.
N o te : E a c h d a s h n u m b e r h a s different c o m p o n e n t values in-
stalled a n d m a y h a v e different j u m p e r s . It is generally not
possible to m o d i fy o n e d a s h n u m b e r b o a r d to m a k e it into
a n o th e r d a s h n u m b e r b o a r d while in th e field.

S -30 P R E L ININARY R E L E W E 9 /8 9
+----------------------------------------- --------------------+
1 HARTIN-DlZlWRT~ICALMANDAL 1 SPmzTRuH 1000 SYsTlm I TwlOllI
+ __--I_------------- -P------F -----~------~---~-+

If the dash numbers are the same then verify the jumpers
that are on the replacement board match the jumpers on the
original board. If they do not rejumper the replacement
board to match the original board.
Note: The jumpers are provided for configuration to the
specific installation. Jumpers "B" and "C" are used in
troubleshooting.
Plug in the new board making sure it goes into the correct
slot.
The red LED should light if the Sensor Power Supply and the
new TRP board's regulator are working.
Recalibrate the associated channel.
Follow the calibration procedures as outline in the Spectrum
1000 User's Hanual; TUlOll-IO.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
dure.

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 5-31 REPAIR

+-------------------------------- ---------------------+
IHARTIN-DECKERTECHBICALIYMUAL 1 SPECTRtJH 1000 SYSTEH 1 TulOll~
. .

5.03.11 PCB27SA; AHP/HUX BOARD

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Yes ; All channels associated with the
replaced Amp/Mux board must be recalibrated.
Effects: Replacement will shut down the Signal Conditioner for
a short period of time. The Display Panel and Prism 1000 will
not receive data during this time. Up to 16 Analog channels
may need to be recalibrated.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? Yes.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? No.
PRoCmKmEFoRRBpLACINGTHEAnP/HDxmAE2D
This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished
the tasks as described in Section S.02.01.01 GENERAL HXMILE
REP-W through section S.02.Ol.OS and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC HODULE RKP- B GEUERAL IHPQR-
HATION and Section 5.03.02 RECALIRRATIobi, SYSTm OLD STARTS
~mi4iw~m~swutfrs.

Turn off the Signal Conditioner's AC power. Turn off the

Signal Conditioner's battery power.
There can be as many as 4 AMP/MUX boards in one Signal
Conditioner.
Use Table 5-4; Channel Number to Amp/Mux Board Assignment,
below to determine what channels appear on which Amp/Mux
board.
Note: Viewed from the card edge end with U4 on the left the
jumpers are from the top to bottom:
565
568
567
566 8
Ensure the 34 Pin Ribbon cables attached to each MUX board
are labeled with the MUX number they attach to.
Disconnect the 2 ribbon connectors from each AMP/MUX card
and remove the bad board.

REPAIR 5-32 PRKL-Y RELEiUE 9/89

1 HARTIR-DEcIcERTECRRICALHARCU& 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTRI I lulOlli
+ -- ----------------- --------- --m------+

+
CHANNEL NUMBERS-
----------------
MUX 0 PCB275A
----s----------v
JUMPERS JP65 IN
JP68 IN
JP67 IN
JP66 IN
----------------

CHANNEL NUMBERS
----B-m---------
MUX 1 PCB275A
----e---e-------
JUMPERS JP65 IN
JP68 OUT
JP67 IN
JP66 IN

“““““‘--“““‘““““““---------------------------------------------+
CHANNEL NUMBERS I 32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,41,42,43,44,45,46,47 I
---------------- ------------------------------------------------ +
MUX 2 PCB275A
----------------
JUMPERS JP65 IN
JP68 IN
JP67 OUT
JP66 IN

CHANNEL NUMBERS
----------------
MUX 3 PCB275A
----------------
JUMPERS JP65 IN
JP68 OUT
JP67 OUT
JP66 IN

Table 5.4: Channel Number to Amp/Mux Board Assignment

PRELIHIRARY RELEASE 9/89 s-33 REPAIR

 ---I_-------------~------~~~~~---~~~~------~

.
HARTIR-DEKERTECHNICALMANDAL I SPECTRDU
.

T a k e th e n e w A M P /M U X b o a r d a n d j u m p e r J P 6 5 , J P 6 8 , JP67 and
J P 6 6 to m a tch th e old b o a r d . ( N o te : T h e s e j u m p e r s set th e
b o a r d 's address.)
J u m p e r th e rest o f th e new board to m a tch th e old board.
N o te : T h e r e a r e 1 6 a n a l o g channels o n e a c h M U X b o a r d .
If th e a n a l o g c h a n n e l o p e r a tes as a current l o o p th e n its
associated J u m p e r (Jl - 5 1 6 ) is installed. This activates
th e d r o p p i n g resistor.
N o te : T h e amplifier section has a gain settin g which is set
by a pair o f j u m p e r s p e r c h a n n e l (J18, J19 - J48, 549).
N o te : E a c h c h a n n e l c a n h a v e s o m e s m o o th i n g applied o n this
b o a r d . This is activated by placing th e following jumpers.
( O n e j u m p e r p e r channel) (517, 550-564).
Install th e new board in th e old b o a r d 's position.
R e c o n n e c t th e 2 ribbon cables. T h e 3 4 pin cable m u s t g o to
th e p r o p e r M U X .
T u r n o n th e A C P o w e r S w itch a n d th e B a ttery S w itch.
V e r i fy th e channel th a t w a s b a d h a s b e e n fixed.
If th e n e w A M P /M U X b o a r d is left in th e system th e n all 1 6
C h a n n e l s o n th a t b o a r d m u s t b e recalibrated at this tim e .
Follow th e calibration procedures as o u tline in th e S p e c trum
1 0 0 0 User's M a n u a l ; T W lO ll-IO . S e c tio n 4 .0 0 C l K L h B R A T IO N
R e tu r n to S e c tio n S .0 2 .0 1 .0 7 a n d c o m p l e te th e G e n e r a l Replace-
ment P rocedure.

RBPNR s-34 P R B L IHIIW R Y R B L B A S B 9 /8 9

 ---------e-v------ ---- B----------------------+

MARTIN-D~TECRRICALlUWDAL 1 S P m T R D n 1 0 0 0 S Y s T m I TulO llI

+ ---------------_I- a----------------------
i

--------- +

S - 0 3 .1 2 P C R 2 8 2 A ; A /D C O N V E R T E R B M R D
B o a r d Level C o l d S tarts: Yes.
S ystem C o l d S tart: Yes.
C h a n n e l Recalibration: Y e s , A ll Analog channels a n d A ll
P u lse channels.
E ffects: R e p l a c e m e n t will s h u t d o w n th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r for
a short period o f tim e . T h e Display P a n e l a n d P rism 1 0 0 0 will
n o t receive d a ta during this tim e .
A n A D C B o a r d Level cold start is required which is th e n fol-
l o w e d by a P IB B o a r d Level cold start. A S ystem cold start is
th e n p e r fo r m e d a n d finally all a n a l o g channels a n d all pulse
channels will require recalibration.
S e c tio n S .0 2 .O l.O S m u s t b e followed. This d e tails w h a t infor-
m a tio n m u s t b e r e c o r d e d prior to th e repair.
J u m p e r s /S w itches n e e d verification? Yes.
S o ftw a r e n e e d s to b e transferred? Yes.
Is this m o d u l e furth e r repairable o n site? No.

This p r o c e d u r e a s s u m e s th e technician h a s first accomplished

th e tasks as described in S e c tio n 5 .0 2 .0 1 .0 1 G E N E R A LH D D D L E
HKP- th r o u g h section S .0 2 ,O l.O S a n d r e a d S e c tio n
s.03.01 S P E C IFIC H D D D L B R R P ~ P B G ~ I~ -
H A T IO R a n d S e c tio n 5 .0 3 .0 2 R E C A L IRRATIOR, S Y S T P U C O L D S T A R T S
ARD-LBVBLCOLDSTARTS.

T u r n o ff th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r 's AC power. T u r n o ff th e

S ignal C o n d i tio n e r 's b a ttery power.
R e m o v e th e 2 0 pin ribbon cable a tta c h e d to th e A D C b o a r d .
R e m o v e th e M o d u l a r cable a tta c h e d to th e A D C b o a r d (this
a tta c h e s to th e H a n d H e l d Terminal).
R e m o v e th e board from th e card cage.
Transfer th e softw a r e from th e old b o a r d to th e n e w b o a r d
p e r th e instructions in S e c tio n 5 .0 6 S o ftw a r e O n ly Replace-
m e n t P rocedures. This is th e device in socket U S .
N o te : T h e b o a r d will be shipped with th e P A L softw a r e in-
stalled.

P R B L IHIB A R Y R B L B A S B 9 /8 9 S -35 RBPNR

+------------------------------ ------------a----+

~ M A R T Ia F D l Z C K E R T E C H B l I C A L ~ 1 S P B C T R D H1 0 0 0 S Y sTrn I m lO llI
+ ------------------------ ---------------------------+

J u m p e r th e new board to m a tch th e old board.

Install th e n e w A D C into th e slot th e old A D C c a m e from .
Connect th e 2 0 pin cable r e m o v e d a b o v e to th e A D C .
Connect th e M o d u l a r cable r e m o v e d a b o v e to th e A D C .
T u r n o n th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r 's A C P o w e r S w itch a n d th e n
th e B a ttery S w itch.
N o te : It is i m p o r ta n t to r e m e m b e r th a t th e display will
freeze all a n a l o g channels values a n d all calculated from
a n a l o g channels values o n th e Display P a n e l as s o o n as th e
A D C is cleared. T h e C o l d S tart will clear th e Display Panel
V a lues so a n o p e r a tor c a n s e e th e system is d o w n .
T h e following m u s t b e accomplished in th e order below:
1 . C o l d S tart th e A D C B o a r d . This initializes th e calibra-
tio n values which a r e stored o n this b o a r d . T h e proce-
d u r e is:
A . U s e th e H a n d H e l d Terminal: P ress th e Clear key
u n til th e display reads:
l> C A L . L O G . CH.
B . P ress th e 3 key th e H H T display will read:
l> A D C F U N C T IO N S
c. P ress th e E n ter key.
D . P ress th e D o w n A rrow K e y twice. T h e display reads:
3XOLD START ADC
E . P ress th e E n ter key. T h e display reads:
ENTER CONF. #
F. P ress 2 3 2 a n a th e n th e E n ter key. T h e display reads:
C O N F IRM 1 (l= Y )
G . T O clear th e A D C press 1 a n d th e n th e E n ter key. The
display will read:
A
-- t.: C L E A R E D

R B P A IR S -36 P R B L IHIB h R Y R B L B A S B 9 /8 9
 I

+--- _I-------s-- -I-----------------~--~~------*

1 M A R T IN-DEKERTEEUIChLHiSUDAL 1 SPBCTR~ 1000 SPST~BWI -lolli

.

To abort the function hit the Clear key until the

display reads:
l>CAL. LOG. CH.
2. Cold Start the PIB per the instructions in Section
5.03.14 PCB27OA; Pulse Input Board.
3. Perform a System cold start. Refer to the Spectrum 1000
User's M anual; TUlOll-IO Section 7.10 RESET PB:
4. Now recalibrate all analog channels and all pulse
channels.
Follow the calibration procedures as outline in the
Spectrum 1000 User's M anual; TWlOll-IO. Section 4.00
CALIBRATION
5. Now reenter the following inform ation:
All alarm set points;
All graph set points;
Any historical values such as Depth, Time on Bit;
Ton M iles etc.;
Check the Channel list located in the Signal
Conditioner's door pocket for "invisible" or hidden
set points;
The values of all basic pulse channel's PPUs.
If installed the DAC Channel's scale values. (If
they are different from the default values.)
If reassigned, the channel reassignm ents.
Note: Update any inform ation that has changed. Store
this inform ation in the Signal Conditioner's door
pocket.
Verify the problem that required the replacem ent of
the ADC has been fixed.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and com plete the General Replacem ent Proce-
dure.

PRBbIHIW4RY RBLBASB 9/89 s-37

+--------------~ -----------------------------------+
IMARTIBI-DlZCXER~ICALlulyaAc 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYsTm! I !mlOll~
+ -----------_---I_---------------__ --------------------+

s-03.13 PCJ329lA-smwzs; sENsoR TRP HmDLE PULSE

Note: This section applies to:
PCB291A-5
PCB291A-6
PCB291A-7
PCB291A-8
For PCB291A-1,2,3,4 refer to Section 5.03.10
Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: -Yes, for the affected channel.
Effects: Replacement will affect one physical channel and any
calculated channels which use it.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? Yes.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? No.
P-F'ORRBPLACIlGTHBPULSBSBHSORTRPHODULE
This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished
the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GENERAL W
BEPLUm through section 5.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC HJDDLE REP- m GEHKRAL INREt-
HATION and Section S-03.02 RECALIBRATIOiil, SYSTm COLD STARTS
AHDB0ARDLEVELCOLDSTARTS.

Note: Due to the design of the PCB291A-Series modules they

can be removed and replaced with the Signal Conditioner
still powered.
Locate the correct slot on the TRP Mother board. Remove the
board by pulling straight out.
Verify the replacement is the same dash number.
Note: Each dash number has different component values in-
stalled and may have different jumpers. It is generally not
possible to modify one dash number board to make it into
another dash number board while in the field.

RBPAIR S-38 PRELIHIBARY RELEA8B 9/89

 T
i HARTIN-DEEERTZCHNICALHANUAL
+--------------------~~~~-
1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYsTm I m7lOllI
--- ---- -----+

If the dash numbers are the same then verify the jumpers
that are on-the replacement board match the jumpers on the
original board. If they do not rejumper the replacement
board to match the original board.
Note: The jumpers are provided for configuration to the
specific installation. Jumpers "B" and "C" are used in
troubleshooting.
Plug in the new board making sure it goes into the correct
slot.
The red LED should light if the Sensor Power Supply and the
new TRP board's regulator are working.
Recalibrate the associated channel.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
dure.

PRELIHIBJARY RBLBASE 9/89 s-39 RBeAIR

+------------------------------- -----------------------+
1 HARTIN-DEKERTECEblICALHANUAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYsTm I mlo11I
. .

5.03.14 PCB270A; PULSE INPDT w)ARD

Board Level Cold Starts: Yes.
System Cold Start: No.
Channel Recalibration: Yes, Raw Pulse channels only.
Effects: Replacement will shut down the Signal Conditioner for
a short period of time. The Display Panel and Prism 1000 will
not receive data during this time.
A PIB Board Level cold start is required. after this a System
Level Cold Start is performed. Then the PIB channels are
recalibrated.
Section 5.02.01.05 must be followed. This details what infor-
mation must be recorded prior to the repair.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? Yes.
Software needs to be transferred? Yes.
Is this module further repairable on site? No.
PRocmmWmRREPLAcIIJGTHBPDLsEIHPDTBoARD
This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished
the tasks as described in Section S.02.01.01 GEUERAL MDDDLE
REP- through section S.02,Ol.OS and read Section
s.03.01 SPECIFIC MHXJLBRRP~P~G~IWOR-
IUTION and Section 5.03.02 REALIBRAl!IOH, SYSTm COLD STARTS
ANDBMRDLEVBLCOLDSTARTS.

Turn off the Signal Conditioner's AC power. Turn off the

Signal Conditioner's battery power.
Remove the 14 pin and 16 ribbon cables attached to the PIB
board.
Remove the board from the card cage.
Transfer the software from the old board to the new board
per the instructions in Section S-06 Software 0nly Replace-
ment Procedures. This is the device in socket U3.
Note: The board will be shipped with the PAL software in-
stalled.
Jumper the new board to match the old board.

RBPAIR s-40 PRBLIHIBARY EtBLBASB 9/89

+----~~------ -------------------_-
1 MARTIN-DHXBR T=ICAL HANDAL 1 SPBCTRUN 1000 SYSTBU I Tulo1;i
+-------------------------------- ----- ------•+

Install the new PIB into the slot the old PIB came from.
Connect the 14 pin cable and the 16 pin cable removed above
to the PIB.
Turn on the Signal Conditioner's AC Power Switch and then
the Battery Switch.
Note: The PIB cold start that follows will clear the PIB and
then reload the PIB with the defaults contained in the host.
These defaults included the factory Pulses Per Unit (PPU)
which in effect recalibrate the PIB channels. However these
may not be correct for the current rig operation. Before
performing the PIB cold start capture all PPUs from the
current PIB if possible. These can then be keyed in during
the recalibration process. If these values are not capture
then the channels will need to be recalibrated from scratch.
In any case all PIB channels will need to be recalibrated
immediately after the PIB board level cold start. Also any
historical values such as Depth, Time on Bit, Ton Miles etc.
should be written down to be reentered after the system is
operational again.
The following must be accomplished in the order below:
1. Cold Start the PIB Board. This initializes the calibra-
tion values which are stored on this board and loads
the defaults for each channel's PPU from the Host CPU.
The procedure is:
A. Use the Hand Held Terminal: Press the Clear key
until the display reads:
1XAL. LOG. Q&
B. Press the 3 key then press the Down Arrow key once.
The HHT display will read:
l>PIB FUNCTIONS
c. Press the Enter key. The HHT display will read:
1XAL. PHY. PIB CH
---
D. Press the Down Arrow Key twice. The display reads:
3XOLD START PIB
E. Press the Enter key. The display reads:
ENTER CONF. &

PRELIHINARY RKT.RASB 9/89 s-41 RBPAIR

 ---Bw--I__ -------B-----B ---w--m--- -----+

i
HARTIN-DEKERTECHNICALHAMJAL 1 S P E C T R U H1 0 0 0 S Y sTml I lwlO llI

F. P ress 2 3 2 a n d th e n th e E n ter key. T h e display reads:

C O N F IRM 2 (l= Y )
G . T o clear th e P IB press 1 a n d th e n th e E n ter key. The
display will read:
P IB C L E A R E D
T o a b o r t th e fu n c tio n hit th e Clear key u n til th e
display reads:
1XAL. L O G . CH.
2 . P e r fo r m a S ystem cold start. R e fer to th e S p e c trum 1 0 0 0
User's H a n u a l ; THlO ll-IO S e c tio n 7 .1 0 R E S E T P R O C E W R E :
3 . N o w recalibrate all P IB channels.
Follow th e calibration procedures as o u tline in th e
S p e c trum 1 0 0 0 User's H a n u a l ; TUlO ll-IO . S e c tio n 4 .0 0
C A L IB R A T IO N
If th e old P IB P P U values w e r e c a p tu r e d th e s e c a n b e
r e e n te r e d n o w . O therwise follow either th e P P U or
Engineering Units Calibration procedures which fit th e
p a r ticular sensor b e i n g calibrated.
4 . N o w r e e n ter th e following inform a tio n :
A ll alarm set p o i n ts:
A ll graph set p o i n ts;
A n y historical values such as D e p th , Tim e o n B it;
T o n M iles e tc.:
C h e c k th e C h a n n e l list located in th e S ignal
C o n d i tio n e r 's d o o r p o c k e t for "invisible" or h i d d e n
set p o i n ts:
If installed th e D A C C h a n n e l 's scale values. (If
th e y a r e different from th e d e fault values.)
If reassigned, th e channel r e a s s i g n m e n ts.
N o te : U p d a te a n y inform a tio n th a t h a s c h a n g e d . S to r e
this inform a tio n in th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r 's door
p o c k e t.
V e r i fy th e p r o b l e m th a t required th e replacement of
th e A D C h a s b e e n fixed.

S -42 P R E L ININARY R B L B A S E 9 /8 9
+----------- -----------e------ -----------------------+

1 MARTIN-DBCKBRT~ICALHANUAL 1 S P B C T R D H1 0 0 0 S Y s T m I I TwlO llI

w-- r

If th e s e checks a r e within specifications th e n retu r n to

S e c tio n 5 .0 2 .0 1 .0 7 a n d c o m p l e te th e G e n e r a l R e p l a c e m e n t P roce-
dure.

P R E L In I R A R Y R B L B A S B 9 /8 9 s-43 RBPNR
+---------------------------------------------------------*
1 MhRTIbFDEKERTECHHICALMAUUAL 1 SPETIUJH 1000 SYsTRl I TulOllI
+---------------------------------------------------------*

5.03.15 PQ3388A-SmIES; EUCODER INTERFACE BOARD

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required, unless the Encoder
divide by is changed.
Effects: Replacement will affect any channels that use the
drawworks encoders up or down pulses. Typically these would
include DEPTH, ROP UNIT/FOOT, ROP MINS/UNIT, and BLOCK POSI-
TION; and any other calculated channels which use these.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? Yes.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? No.

This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished

the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GENERAL MODULE
REPWE)IzEwT through section 5.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC noDoIsE~~P~~I~-
HATION and Section 5.03.02 RECALIBR?iTIOH, SYSTm COLD STARTS
ANDBoARDLBvELcoLDsTARTs.

The encoder interface is located on the Signal Conditioner's

mounting shelf next to the Analog Output Termination Module
(if installed).
Unplug the 5 pin connector and then unplug the 4 pin connec-
tor from the Encoder interface.
The Encoder Module is a "Snap Rail" mount. Use a screw
driver to pry against the extended lip in the direction away
from the rail to release it from the rail.
Carefully pull the end pieces from the rail mount to expose
the Encoder and its mounting plate.
Unscrew the 4 screws which mount the encoder PC board to its
plate.
Ensure the replacement board is jumpered the same as the old
board at P3, P4, P5 and P6. Normally P5 and P6 are always
jumpered the same.

RRPNR s-44 PRBLININARY RELEA8B 9/89

~HARTII~~-D~WERTRCRNICALHARCU~L 1 SP-UR 1000 SPSTEW I =0lli
+--------------- ----- ----P---v- +

Mount the new Encoder board to the mounting plate. Make sure
the washers are still in place on the mounting plate. Tight-
en the 4 screws.
Reassembly the rail mount around the mounting plate.
Snap the assembly onto the rail.
Plug in the 4 pin connector and then the 5 pin connector
into the Encoder board.
The channels that use the up/down pulses from the Encoder
board will not require recalibration if the divide by was
not changed. Otherwise recalibrate all associated channels.
Follow the calibration procedures as outline in the Spectrum
1000 User's Hanual; TUlOll-IO. Section 4.00 CALIRRATION
Verify the original problem has been repaired.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
dure.

PRBLININARY RBLBASB 9/89 s-45

 ------w-s---- ----------------------- ----------+

I-iiik-DW TECRRICAL HAbmAL I SPETRmf 1000 SYsTR# I m1011I

. .

5.03.16 PCR327A-02; CPU ROARD

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required: unless the software
revision is changed.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: Replacement will shut down the Signal Conditioner for
a short period of time. The Display Panel and Prism 1000 will
not receive data during this time.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? Yes.
Software needs to be transferred? Yes.
Is this module further repairable on site? No.
PRomDmWmRREPIJ4CINGTRECPumARD
This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished
the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GRRERAL MODULE
BEP- through section S.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC MXXJLRRBE'~P~GERERALIRFDR-
HATIOR and Section 5.03.02 RBCALIRRATIOR, SYSTRI CC&D STARTS
ANDmARDLBvBLcoLDsTARTs.
CPUROARDR.BP-:
Note: If a System software revision upgrade is part of the
repair then follow the instructions in Section 5.06 Software
Only Replacement Procedures.
Determine which CPU is to be replaced.
Note: They only difference between a CPU1 card and a CPU2
card is the extractor label: the hardware, software and
jumpers are identical.
Note: CPU1 is the CPU which has its 53 cable attached to the
CPI card; PCB326A 53 connector. CPU2 is the CPU which has
its 53 cable attached to the CPI card's 54 connector.
Note: The red LED (DSl) at the bottom of the CPU board
flashes for the CPU which is currently on-line.
Note: The CPI board has two red LEDs; the top, DSl is lit
when CPU1 is on line: the bottom; DS2, is lit when CPU2 is
on line.
Turn off the Signal Conditioner's AC power. Turn off the
Signal Conditioner's battery power.

REPNR 5-46 PRBLIHINARY RELEASE 9/89

 Il / IR

-----s---- ------------ ------W--VW-+

+--

~MART 1 S P E C T R U H1 0 0 0 S Y S T R N 1 !l
+ ----- -------------------------

Remove t 2 6 pin ribbon cable a t t CPU board a

53
Remove t board fro t card cage
Trans t so fro t old b o a r d t t new board
per t instructions in S e c So Replacemen P
dures These are t devices in sockets U 5 a n d U 6
No T h e b o a r d will be shipped with t P R O M so
installed.
Jumper t new board t ma t old board
I t n e w C P U into t slot t old C P U c a m e fro
Connec t 2 6 pin cable t J3 o t CPU board
Turn on t S Condi AC Power Sw and t
t Ba Sw
No The ma o t ti t syste starts a n d selects
CPUl however it c a n select C P U 2 w h e n n o f is p r e s e n
T h e syste can be f t select t o C P U by p e r
ing a w a r m start.
Re t t Spec 1 0 0 0 User Manual TW Sec
7 RESET PRocmmm
O n c e selected observe t syste t ensure t original
p r o b l e m h a s b e e n repaired
If required modi or c h a n g e t E label on t new
CPU board t ma which C P U # t n e w b o a r d is.
A t conclusion o all t CPU Y should b e selected.
If t S so revision was changed t per a
S cold start. Re t t Spec 1 0 0 0 User Hanual
TW Sec 7 RBSBT B t reen all
infor as listed in S e c 5
If t checks a r e within specifications t re t
Sec S and comple t General Replacemen P
dure

PREL RELEasE 9 s-47 RRPA

+-------------------------- e--p ---------- --------B-+

1 -IN-DEKERTBCRUICALXMUAL 1 s P E c T R m 4 1 0 0 0 S Y S T R a I TulO llI

. .

S - 0 3 .1 7 PCB326A; CPI BOARD

B o a r d Level C o l d S tarts: N o t required.
S ystem C o l d S tart: N o t required.
C h a n n e l Recalibration: N o t required.
E ffects: R e p l a c e m e n t will s h u t d o w n th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r for
a short period o f tim e . T h e Display P a n e l a n d P rism 1 0 0 0 will
n o t receive d a ta during this tim e .
J u m p e r s /S w itches n e e d verification? No.
S o ftw a r e n e e d s to b e transferred? No.
Is this m o d u l e furth e r repairable o n site? No.
P R o c m m B m R R E P L A c ING T H E c P Im A R D
This p r o c e d u r e a s s u m e s th e technician h a s first accomplished
th e tasks as described in S e c tio n S .0 2 .0 1 .0 1 G g s IE [(A t H D D tJLE
REP- th r o u g h section 5 .0 2 .0 1 .0 5 a n d r e a d S e c tio n
5 .0 3 .0 1 S P H X P IC H o m J L B R E P ~ P B G ~ IHFO R -
H A T IO N a n d S e c tio n S - 0 3 .0 2 R E C A L IB R A T IO N , S Y S T R ! C O L D S T A R T S
ANDmARDLEvELcoLDsTARTs.

N o te : T h e C P I b o a r d c o n n e c ts to th e C P U 1 b o a r d via a ribbon
cable b e tween C P I-J3 a n d C P U l - J 3 . T h e C P I b o a r d c o n n e c ts to
C P U 2 b o a r d via a ribbon cable b e tween C P I-J4 a n d C P U 2 - J 3 .
C P I-J3 is th e c o n n e c tor o n th e e d g e o f th e b o a r d . C P I-J4 is
th e c o n n e c tor which is perpendicular to th e b o a r d .
N o te : T h e r e d L E D (DSl) a t th e b o tto m o f th e C P U b o a r d
fla s h e s for th e C P U which is currently on-line.
N o te : T h e C P I b o a r d h a s two r e d L E D s ; th e to p , D S l is lit
w h e n C P U 1 is o n line; th e b o tto m : D S 2 , is lit w h e n C P U 2 is
o n line.
T u r n o ff th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r 's AC power. T u r n o ff th e
S ignal C o n d i tio n e r 's b a ttery power.
R e m o v e th e board from th e card cage.
E n s u r e th e two ribbon cables. a tta c h e d to th e C P I card are
m a r k e d b e fo r e r e m o v a l to i d e n tify th e m .
R e m o v e th e 2 6 pin ribbon cables a tta c h e d to th e C P I b o a r d at
J3 a n d 5 4 .
R e m o v e th e M o d u l a r cable from 5 2 o f th e C P I b o a r d .

R E P A IR S -48 P R E L IHIRARY R E L E A S E 9 /8 9
+----------- --- -------a-+
~HARTIBl-DJSCEERTBCEttlICALlWUAL

Connect the Modular cable removed above to the new CPI board
at J2.
Attach the 26 pin ribbon cables removed above to the new CPI
board at 53 and J4 per the note above.
Install the new CPI into the slot the old CPI came from.
Turn on the Signal Conditioner's AC Power Switch and then
the Battery Switch.
Note: The majority of the time the system starts and selects
CPUl; however it can select CPU2 when no fault is present.
The system can be forced to select the other CPU by perform-
ing a warm start.
Refer to the Spectrum 1000 User's Manual; TWlOll-IO Section
7.10 RESET PRmKDmB.
Once selected observe the system to ensure the original
problem has been repaired.
At the conclusion of all testing CPU #l should be selected.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
dure.

PRELIMItBURY RELEASE 9/89 s-49 REPAIR

+---------------------~----~ -------- ---------------------+
I MARTIIY-Dm !l%CEIMICAL llAwcILIL 1 sp=uH 1000 SYSTW I lwlo11I

5.03.18 Rl0980A: EET HAIB?!I!m TERMINAL

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: None.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? No.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? No.

This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished

the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GENERAL HODULE
REP- through section S.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC MmlLE REPLACRammPRDCEWREGENwALI#poa-
HATION and Section 5.03.02 RECALIBRATION, SYS!Ym COLD STARTS
~BoARD~rnLwswtrs.
RRT NAINTENANCE T=NALREP-
The Hand Held Terminal (HHT) is replaced as a unit.
Unplug the Modular cable from the HHT.
Plug the Modular cable into the new HHT.
Note: The following test should be run to verify operation
of the HHT:
Unplug the Modular cable attached to the CPI board (52)
and plug it into the ADC board (Jl).
On the HHT remove the Modular plug.
While pressing the ENT key plug in the Modular cable into
the HHT. Keep holding the key for 5 seconds.
The HHT 16 character LCD display will display the follow-
ing for a second and then clear:
ADC MODE
Release the ENT key the display should show:

REPAIR s-so PRELIHIMARY RELEASE 9/89

+--~~--------------- ___-------------------- -----------------+
1 MARTIN-DEKERTECRNICALHANDAL
+ ------w-------------s---
I SPECTRUN 1000 SYsTEn I TulOllI
----- --- +

Starting with the top left key press each key left to
right till all keys are pressed. The display will add a
character for each key pressed:
Key Pressed LCD Display Remarks
ENT % Already displayed
1 1
2 2
3 3
CLR *
4 4
5 5
6
UP ARROW
7 4
8 8
9 9
DOWN ARROW +

This concludes the keyboard test.

Press the ENT key. The display will clear and then show
the same character in all 16 positions. The sequence is:
Clear display:
Special Characters: I #$%&'()*+.-/
Numbers: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Special Characters: ; < = >
Alphabet: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX
Y z
Special Characters: [ \ 1 A _
The sequence will repeat until the Modular cable is
unplugged.
Unplug the Modular cable.
This concludes the processor/display test.
Plug the cable into 52 of the CPI.
The display will show:
HOST MODE
This will clear and display:
l>CAL. LOG. CH.

PRELININARY RXLEASE 9/89 S-51 REPAIR

 ----_------------------------ ----------------------+
i MARTIN-DRCKERTBCRRICALHARUAL 1 SPECCRUH 1000 SYsTgn I TulOllI
+----------------------------------------------------------*

Verify the menus change per the Spectrum 1000 User's

Manual; TICLOll-IO, Section 4.02, Field Calibration;
Figure 4.2, REP ROST Hode Henu Structure.
This concludes the HHT tests.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
dure.

REPAIR S-52 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

 --- --------------I----- ------------------
-------

HARTIN-D~TECRNICALHARDAL I SPECTRDH 1000 SYm I TulO lli

+----------------------p
i

------- ----- ----w-m +

5.03.19 PCR309A; HATS BOARD

Board Level Cold Starts : Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effec ts : Replacement will shut down the Signal Conditioner for
a short period of time. The Display Panel and Prism 1000 will
not receive data during this time.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? Yes.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on s ite? No.

This procedure assumes the technic ian has firs t accomplished

the tas k s as described in Section S.02.01.01 Gm HODDLE
REP- through section S.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC NODULEREP- BGENERALIm-
HATIO N and Section 5.03.02 RECALIRRATIO U , SYSTm COLD STARTS
ANDmARDLEvELcoLDsTARTs.
NATSRCMRDREPB:
Turn off the Signal Conditioner's AC power. Turn off the
Signal Conditioner's battery power.
Remove the board from the card cage.
Jumper the new board to match the old board.
Set the switch on the new board to match the switch on the
old board. (This is for consis tenc y the switch is not used.)
Ins tall the new MATS into the s lot the old MATS came from.
Turn on the Signal Conditioner's AC Power Switch and then
the Battery Switch.
After a few seconds the RATS board will display 00 on its
two hexadecimal display s (U7, Ull).
The top LED CR3 should be lit (5 VDC present).
The middle LED CR4 should be lit (-12 VDC present).
The bottom LED CR5 should be lit (12 VDC present).

PRELININARY RBTiEASE 9/89 S-53 REPAIR

1 MARTIN-D- TECEUICAL HANUAL 1 SPY- 1000 SYM I m0lli
+-------------------------- ----------------------a--*

To test switch SWl; Reset perform a system warm start. This

will have the effect of changing the on-line CPU.
Refer to the Spectrum 1000 User's Hanual; TUlOll-IO Section
7.10 RESET PRocmmEs.
Once selected observe the system to ensure the original
problem has been repaired.
Using a DVM carefully measure the bus termination voltage on
the MATS board Ul-2 positive and Ul-7 ground (negative). The
value should be 3.6 VDC; +/- 0.1 VDC.
At the conclusion of all testing CPU #l should be reselect-
ed.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
dure.

REPAIR s-54 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

+---v----------ma------ -----B--------------m-----------+
~HARTIBJ-DECKERTECRWICALHMJAL I SPECTRUH 1000 SYsTgn 1 lw1011~

S-03.20 PCB328A-02 REAL TIHE CLOCK BOARD

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Yes, only in the sense the TIME will
need to be reentered.
Effects: Replacement will shut down the Signal Conditioner for
a short period of time. The Display Panel and Prism 1000 will
not receive data during this time.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? Yes.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
IS this module further repairable on site? No.
PROCHWREPORREPLACINGTHEREALTIHECLCX!KRMRD
This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished
the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GENERAL HXXJLE
REPLAW through section S.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPBICIPIC H0DULEREP~P~GENEEMLIRmR-
HATION and Section 5.03.02 RECALIRRATIo#, SYsTEn CXLD STARTS
ANDBOARDLEVELCOLDSTARTS.
REALTIHE~BQARDREPLWRmtmz
WARNING
The RTC board contains batteries. Since voltage is
always present scne where on the board it rust not be
allowed to short out against other boards or be placed
in a conductive plastic bad. Return the bad board to
the original plastic bad.

Examine the new board. Measure with a DVM the voltage be-
tween BAT 3; positive pole and BAT 1; negative pole. If this
voltage is above 2.0 volts the batteries have sufficient
charge to retain the time should the Signal Conditioner lose
power.
Note: JBlO when jumpered activates the on board batteries.
It may take 24 hours for these batteries to charge.
Note: The 3 1.2 VDC batteries' when fully charged provide
approximately 4.2 VDC.
Turn off the Signal Conditioner's AC power. Turn off the
Signal Conditioner's battery power.

PRBLININARY RELEASE 9/89 5-5s REPAIR

 ----- -7-m ---W-----W------ ----- __ ---- +

i HARTIN-DFZXlZRTECRRICALHANML I SPECTRUN 1000 SYsTEm I TwlOll~

Remove the board from the card cage.

Jumper the new board to match the old board.
Install the new RTC into the slot the old RTC came from.
Turn on the Signal Conditioner's AC Power Switch and then
the Battery Switch.
Observe the System time and ensure it changes. Time this.
The system should be keeping accurate time.
Record the System time and turn off the Signal Conditioner's
AC power. Turn off the Signal Conditioner's battery power.
Wait 2 minutes.
Turn on the Signal Conditioner's AC Power Switch and then
the Battery Switch.
Observe the System time has kept up with the passage of
time. If it has the batteries are working.
Note: The RTC board has a brown out detector circuit which
monitors the 5 VDC STD Bus voltage. If this voltage drops
below 4.70 VDC the RTC board will issue a constant push
button reset. R4 sets the detector's threshold and is facto-
ry set.
Reset the System time via the Display Panel once the System
is returned to service.
Verify the original problem has been repaired.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
dure.

REPAIR PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

+--------------a---- -------------- -----mm ----v-B--+

1 HARTIN-DEQCERTBCEWICALHANUAL I SPECTRUH 1000 SYSTrn I TulOll~

5.03.21 PCB34lA-02: DUAL SERIAL I/ BOARD

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: Replacement will shut down the Signal Conditioner for
a short period of ti The Display Panel and Prism 1000 will
not receive data during this ti
Jumpers/Switches need verification? Yes.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? No.
PRocmmmmRREPLAcINGTREDuAL sm I/
This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished
the tasks as described in Section S.02.01.01 GENERAL MKHILB
REP- through section 5.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC HmKJLE REP- ~GEHERALI~-
LUTION and Section S-03.02 REALIBRATIolJ, SYSTFX COLD STARTS
ANDBMRDLEVELCOLDSTARTS.
DuALsmuAL 1/oBMRDRgPm:
Turn off the Signal Conditioner's AC power. Turn off the
Signal Conditioner's battery power.
Remove the board from the card cage.
Note: DSIO-Jl goes to the TRP Mo J51. The ribbon
cable converts from 26 pins to 14 pins.
Remove the 26 pin ribbon cable attached to the DSIO board at
Jl.
Jumper the new board to ma the old board.
Install the new DSIO into the slot the old DSIO came from.
Attach the 26 pin ribbon cable removed above to the new DSIO
board at Jl.
Turn on the Signal Conditioner's AC Power Switch and then
the Battery Switch.
Verify the original problem has been repaired.

PRELININBRP RELEASE 9/89 S-57 RBPAIR

 ---- ------------- --- -----BB--+
iw HARTIW-DEICERTRCRNICALMAMJAL 1 SPECTRUN 1000 SYsEm I TulOllI
.

If these checks are within specifications then return to

Section 5.02.Ql.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
dure.

REPAIR s-58 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

1 HARTIN-D~TECENICALHARUAL
+-a------P--W --- 1 SP-W --- 1000 SYST~W 1 -10lii
---------
+----------------- --a---- --------~-------+

5.03.22 PCFJ313A; cDRRmTLooPccRm!R0LTRPmARD

Board Level C&d Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: Replacement will not shut down the Signal Conditioner
but will interrupt the flow of data to the Display Panel and
Prism 1000.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? Yes.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? No.
pRocEDuRgmRREPL44cIHGT!3Rc(JRREwTLwP COWFROLTRPEUSRD
This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished
the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GENERAL IKIDULE
REP- through section S.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC HODDLEREP~~G~IHPOR-
HATION and Section S-03.02 RECALIRRATIOB, SYSTBN COLD STARTS
ANDROARDLEVELCOLDSTARTS.

Remove the 10 pin ribbon cable attached to the CLC boards's

P2.
Remove the CLC board from the TRP motherboard.
Jumper the new board to match the old board.
Install the new CLC into the slot the old CLC came from.
Attach the 10 pin ribbon cable removed above to the new CLC
board at P2.
Verify that the new CLC has the following LEDs lit:
LED1 (top) (12 VDC present).
LED2 (middle) (5 VDC being produced on board).
LED3 (bottom) (-12 VDC present).
Verify the original problem has been repaired.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section S.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
dure.

PRELININARY RELEWE 9/89 s-59 REPAIR

 T
i HARTIN-D~TBCHNICALHANUAL
+-------------------------------------------
I SPBCTRDH 1000 SYST.m I TwlOllI
--------------------+

5.03.23 PCB34OA-01; RS232 TRP BOARD

Board Level Coid Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: Replacement will not shut down the Signal Conditioner
or the Display Panel but will interrupt the flow of data to
Prism 1000.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? Yes.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? No.
PROCEDmEP0RREPLACINGTHERS232TRPBoARD
This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished
the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GENERAL NDDULE
REPLAC- through section 5.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC zy)DIJLgRBPLACPXEBPRocEwaEsG~IHF0R-
HATION and Section 5.03.02 REfALIBRATIOJB, SYSTm COLD STARTS
ANDRoARDLEvELcoLDsTARTs.
RS232 TRPROARDREP-:
Remove the 10 pin ribbon cable attached to the RS232 TRP
boards's P2.
Remove the RS232 TRP board from the TRP motherboard.
Jumper the new board to match the old board.
Install the new RS232 TRP into the slot the old RS232 TRP
came from.
Attach the 10 pin ribbon cable removed above to the new
RS232 TRP board at P2.
Observe the operation of Prism 1000. It should be receiving
data normally.
Verify the original problem has been repaired.
If these checks are within, specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacerent Proce-
dure.

REPAIR PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

+--S----P ---------------------------------------------*

1 MARTIN-DEcggRTlERUICALHANlJAL 1 SPECTRUH 1000 SmTm I !m011~

5.03.24 PCR290A; CURRENTLOOPTRPKMRD

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: Replacement will not shut down the Signal Conditioner
but will interrupt the flow of data to one link of the Display
Panel. The Display Panel will still operate from the good
link. Prism 1000 will still operate normally.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? Yes.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? No.
PmxEDoRB FOR RBPLAcIffi TnB CDRRRWF~PTRPBOARD
This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished
the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GENERAL HODDLB
REP- through section 5.02,Ol.OS and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC HODULE REP~PRWELWRBG~INPKBR-
MATION and Section 5.03.02 RECALIEiRATIOIti, SYSTRI COLD STARTS
ANDROARDLEVELCOLDSTARTS.
cmRRERTTAwlPTRPmARDREP~
Remove the 10 pin ribbon cable attached to the CL TRP
boards's P2.
Remove the CL TRP board from the TRP motherboard.
Jumper the new board to match the old board.
Install the new CL TRP into the slot the old CL TRP came
from.
Attach the 10 pin ribbon cable removed above to the new CL
TRP board at P2.
Verify that the new CL TRP board has the following LEDs lit:
LED1 (top) (+12 Isolated VDC present; produced on board).
LED2 (middle) (+12 VDC present).
LED3 (bottom) (-12 VDC present).
Verify the original problem has been repaired.

PRELIMINARY RELEASE 9/89 S-61 REPAIR

+--------------------------------------- -------------+
~HARTIH-DECKERTgcB#ICALHARDAL 1 sPBcTRDn 1000 SY- 1 Twl011~

If these checks are within specifications then return to

Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
dure.

REPAIR 5-62 PRELIHIBIARY RELEASB 9/89

+----------------------- ------ ----------~~~~~~~-~~~-+
1 HARTIN-DEcILIB1 TECRNICALHANUAL 1 SPEcTRtRl 1000 SYsTEn I !mlOll(
+---- --------------_-~---__ -----------------------+

5.03.25 HlZOlOA; ISHI LULSTER Ly)IMLE

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: This is based on how the System's AC Power is routed.
Normally the output of the AC Power Regulator goes to a junc-
tion box where it then routes to both the Signal Conditioner
and the IS Power Supply. If this routing is used then replace-
ment of the ISMI Master Module will take the entire System out
of service for a short period of time.
If an alternate routing was used that allows the safe isola-
tion of the Mains power to only the IS Power Supply then only
the Display Panel will be taken out of service. The Signal
Conditioner would continue to operate and therefore Prism 1000
(if used) would continue to operate.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? No.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? No.
paocEDllREmRREPLAcINGTEBISHInASTERmDuLB
This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished
the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GENH?AL LYHWJLE
REP- through section 5.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC mDuLEREPIAclmmTP~~I#poB-
HATION and Section S-03.02 REALIRRATIOIW, SYSTHN COLD STARTS
A19)--rnLow.

To remove the Master Module from service the Intrinsically

Safe Power Supply must be turn off first:
Take the required steps to isolate the mains voltage from
the input to the Intrinsically Safe Power Supply:
If wired to an AC Power breaker turn off the breaker and
tag it.
If wired directly into the AC Regulator simple pull the
associated output plug.
Label the 7 cable assemblies which attach to the Master
Module.
Remove the 7 cables assemblies from the Master Module.

PRELIMINARY RBLE&SE 9/89 5-63 RBPAIR

 _--~~
T------

I W IIU-DEKKRTECHBlIcAcLu#o[Bc
+---------------------------------------------------*
1 SPY- 1000 s~sl~gn I m 0lli

Rem ove the 4 4-40 nuts and washers which attach the M aster
M odule to the Display Panel and rem ove the M aster M odule.
Place the new M aster M odule over the m ounting studs and
secure with the 4 4-40 nuts and washers rem oved above.
Plug the 7 cables assem blies rem oved above into the M aster
M odule.
Apply the m ains AC power to the Intrinsically Safe Power
SuPPlY*
Observe each display which attaches to the M aster M odule.
(Those which connect to J5, 56 and J7.) They should be lit
and num bers should be changing. Follow the cable from 58 and
observe that the displays which are powered from the first
Slave M odule encountered are also functioning.
Rem ove 52 from the M aster M odule. This should cause the Link
Status indicator to flash for approxim ately 30 seconds.
During this tim e the Hand Held Term inal's Status M enu will
show a few link errors until the link switches. Once the
link has switched the errors will stop.
Reconnect J2 and rem ove J3. The sam e effects as noted in the
preceding paragraph should take place.
Replace 53.
Press the "1" key on the keyboard. The Keyboard Code window
should display a "1". (Press the CLR (clear key) to clear
the keyboard entry.)
Verify the original problem has been repaired.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5,02.01.07 and com plete the General Replacem ent Proce-
dure.

REPAIR
+--e-------m -------I--------__--------------I-_ +
~HARTIIV-DBCKBRTECENICl4LHAI4UAL 1 sPBcTRml 1000 SYSTEn I !mlOllI
. T

5.03.26 Rl2009A; ISHI SLAVE WlXJI.E

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: This is based on how the System's AC Power is routed.
Normally the output of the AC Power Regulator goes to a junc-
tion box where it then routes to both the Signal Conditioner
and the IS Power Supply. If this routing is used then replace-
ment of the ISMI Slave Module will take the entire System out
of service for a short period of time.
If an alternate routing was used that allows the safe isola-
tion of the Mains power to only the IS Power Supply then only
the Display Panel will be taken out of service. The Signal
Conditioner would continue to operate and therefore Prism 1000
(if used) would continue to operate.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? No.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? No.
PRGGxwREmRBBPLAcINGTBgIsmIsIdvBmDuLB
This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished
the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GENERAL m
REP- through section 5.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPXCIPIC nMwJLERRP~~GBBJBRALI#poB-
HATI- and Section S-03.02 RECALIBRATIW. SYS!CR4 COLD STAR!rS
duancmm-rnm~~.

To remove the Slave Module from service the Intrinsically

Safe Power Supply must be turn off first:
Take the required steps to isolate the mains voltage from
the input to the Intrinsically Safe Power Supply:
If wired to an AC Power breaker turn off the breaker and
tag it.
If wired directly into the AC Regulator simple pull the
associated output plug.
Label the 7 cable assemblies which attach to the Slave
Module.
Remove the 7 cables assemblies from the Slave Module.

PRELIHIHABP RELEASE 9/89 5-65 REPAIR

+---em----- --------m---w- --_I ---em- -----------+

~ L u R T Ib F D E C K E R T E C E N I C A L ~ 1 sPEcTlUln 1000 S Y M I TulO llI

+ -------- -v----------------- ---------------+

R e m o v e th e 4 4 - 4 0 n u ts a n d washers which a tta c h th e S lave

M o d u l e to th e Display P a n e l a n d r e m o v e th e S lave M o d u l e .
P lace th e n e w S lave M o d u l e over th e m o u n tin g studs a n d
secure with th e 4 4 - 4 0 n u ts a n d washers r e m o v e d a b o v e .
P lug th e 7 cables assemblies r e m o v e d a b o v e into th e S lave
Module.
A p p l y th e m a ins A C p o w e r to th e In trinsically S a fe P o w e r
S U P P lY .
O b s e r v e e a c h display which a tta c h e s to th e S lave M o d u l e .
(Those which c o n n e c t to J5, 5 6 a n d 5 7 .) T h e y should b e lit
a n d n u m b e r s should b e c h a n g i n g . Follow th e cable from 5 8 a n d
observe th a t th e displays which a r e p o w e r e d from th e first
S lave M o d u l e e n c o u n te r e d a r e also fu n c tio n i n g .
R e m o v e J2 from th e M a s ter M o d u l e . This should c a u s e th e Link
S ta tus indicator to fla s h for a p p r o x i m a tely 3 0 seconds.
During this tim e th e H a n d H e l d Terminal's S ta tus M e n u will
s h o w a fe w link errors u n til th e link switches. O n c e th e
link h a s switched th e errors will stop.
Reconnect 5 2 a n d r e m o v e 5 3 . T h e s a m e e ffects as n o te d in th e
preceding p a r a g r a p h should ta k e place.
Replace 53.
V e r i fy th e original problem h a s b e e n repaired.
If th e s e checks a r e within specifications th e n retu r n to
S e c tio n 5 .0 2 .0 1 .0 7 a n d c o m p l e te th e G e n e r a l R e p l a c e m e n t P roce-
dure.

R E P A IR 5-66 P R P Z IHIM R Y R B L B A S E 9 /8 9
1 HARTIN-DECKER TBCRNICAL MANDAL 1 SPECTRIJH 1000 SYSTRl 1 TUlOlli
+------m-----p ------------------------------------------+

5.03.27 PCl3295A; DISPLAY coN!FRoLLERBoARD

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: Replacement will affect only the associated LCD
display board.
Note: The Communications Link is controller by Display Con-
troller board DCl. If DC1 is removed then the system will
indicate Link errors while DC1 is out of service.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? Yes.
Software needs to be transferred? Yes.
Is this module further repairable on site? No.
PROCEDDREF0RREPLACIbK;TREDISPIAY coN!moLLERmARD
This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished
the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GENEEUL H0DDL.E
REP- through section 5.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC H0DULEREPLERUttWP~G~I~-
JUiTION and Section 5.03.02 RECALIBRATION. SYSTI# COLD STARTS
~BoARDLwELmu3sTBRTs.
DISPLAY comRoLLRRmARDREP-:
Remove the cable attached to TBl.
If the Display Controller being changed has a cable attached
to 52 remove this cable now. This Display Controller is DCl.
Remove the 3 nylon screws which attach the Display Control-
ler to the Display board.
The Display Controller is mated to it's Display board by a
connector attached to the solder side of the Display Con-
troller board. Carefully pull the Display Controller board
off the Display board.
Transfer the software from the old board to the new board
per the instructions in Section 5.06 Software Only Replace-
ment Procedures. This is the device in socket U5.
Careful1.y mate the new board onto the connector of the
Display board.

PRELININARY RELEASN 9/89 5-67 REPAIR

+-W--VW---------V- ----------m -----------------

ILIARTIN-DFZKER!CBCRBlIcALHANDAL 1 SPECTRUN 1000 SYsTm I TmOlli

+---------------------------------------------------------+

Install the 3 nylon screws removed above and secure.

Connect the cable remove from TBl above. Connect the key-
board cable to 52 if this Display Controller is DCl.
Set the SW1 switch on the new board so SW1 l-4 are all
closed. This activates the Display Controller board's test
program.
Observe the associated Display board for the following
activity:
All LCD segments will turn on (show dark);
then all segments will be turned off (not visible);
Each LCD segment number will have its top most segment
turned on and each Bar Graph Display will show 8 individ-
ual bars (spaced evenly over the height of the Bar Graph
Display) turned on. These segments will be turned off and
the next segment to the right (for numbers) will turn on:
the Bar Graph will have the first set of 8 bars turned
off and then turn on the next set of 8. (These will be
the segments one segment above the old set.)
The above marquee effect will continue until all segments
have been displayed.
Next just the decimal points and the colons will be on.
Then all segments will blink on and off.
The above cycle will then repeat itself. It takes about 30
seconds for the test cycle to complete.
Set the SW1 switch to match the switch setting on the Dis-
play Controller board which was just removed.
Note: The test cycle will continue till the start of its
cycle. At that time "live" data will be displayed.
Note: If the Display Controller being changed was DC1 per-
form the keyboard test below:
Press the '*ltU key on the keyboard. The Keyboard Code
window should display a "1". (Press the CLR (clear key)
to clear the keyboard entry.)
Verify the original problem has been repaired.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacerent Proce-
dure.

REPAIR 5-68 PRm,xNINARY RELEASE 9/89

+------------------------------ -----------------------+
1 MARTIN-DECKER TECRNICAL ItANDAL 1 SPBCTRUN 1000 SYm I lOllI
+------------------------ ----------e---m --------+

S-03.28 PCB287A; DISPLAY RCWRD - VERTICAL

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: Replacement will affect only the associated LCD
Display board.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? No.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? Yes.
PROCgDURg FORREPLUXNGTREDISPLAPBOARD-VBRTICAL
This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished
the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GKNERAL MOIXILE
mm through section 5.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIPIC mDDLE RlW~PROCHBRESG~INl?0R-
IIATION and Section 5.03.02 RECALIRRATION, SYSTR4 CC&D STARTS
SblDBoARD~muuwurrs.

Complete the removal of the Display Board Controller as

outline in Section 5.03.27 PCB295A; DISPLAY coNTRaLLmRoARD
above.
Remove the 4 screws (6-32) and their fiber washers which
attach the Display Board to the enclosure. Be careful that
the gaskets (one top, one bottom) between the Display Board
and the enclosure are not damaged.
Note: Since the Spectrum 1000 Display Board arrangement is
highly configurable it is possible that the board is mounted
with both screws and standoffs. If it is remove the stand-
offs and their associated hardware at this time. Generally
the standoff secures one or more cable clamps. The hardware
is composed of screw, flat washer, cable holder, cable
holder, washer, standoff, fiber washer, PC board, gasket and
then the panel bracket.
The Display Board is further repairable. The individual LCDs
can be changed. See Section 5.05.03 PCB287A; DISPLaY RCMRD -
VERTICAL for the repair procedure.

PRELININARY RELEASN 9/89 5-69

 T
i MARTIN-DECKER TECENICAL HANDAL 1 SPECTRDH
+--------------------e---------p
1000 SYsTEn I lulOllI
---e-m- ---------+

Mount the new Display board to the enclosure. Ensure the

gaskets are in place. Secure with the 4 screws and washers
removed above (and/or standoff assemblies). A minor amount
of adjustment has been allowed for in this mounting. Ensure
the display "lines up" with the Panel Lens before tightening
the screws.
Return to Section 5.03.27 PCR295A; DISPLAY mN!rRoLLERmARD
above and reinstall the Display Controller board as out-
lined.
Complete the tests as described in Section 5.03.27 PCJ3295A;
DISPLAY CONTROLLER BOARD.
Verify the original problem has been repaired.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
dure.

RRPAIR S-70 PRNLININARY RELEASE 9/89

I HARTIBED~TBCRNICALHAHUAL
+--m--m- --------m
1 SPA
----------------------------+
1000 SPSTIP~ 1 m0lli

5.03.29 PCB288A-02; DISPLAY ROARD - EORIXOHTAL

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: Replacement will affect only the associated LCD
display board.
Note: The Communications Link is controller by Display Con-
troller board DCl. If DC1 is removed then the system will
indicate Link errors while DC1 is out of service.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? No.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? Yes.

This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished

the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GERlERAL MHXILE
REP- through section 5.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC MODULE REP- pRocgDuREs GBBWRAL INPOR-
HATION and Section 5.03.02 RECALIRRATION, SYSTm COLD STARTS
ANDmARDLEvELmLD STARTS.
EtORIZOWCAL DISPLAY B0?iRD REP-:
Complete the removal of the Display Board Controller as
outline in Section 5.03.27 PCB295A; DISPLAY CoNTRoLLNRmARD
above.
Remove the 6 screws (6-32) and their fiber washers which
attach the Display Board to the enclosure. Be careful that
the gaskets (one top, one bottom) between the Display Board
and the enclosure are not damaged.
Note: Since the Spectrum 1000 Display Board arrangement is
highly configurable it is possible that the board is mounted
with both screws and standoffs. If it is remove the stand-
offs and their associated hardware at this time. Generally
the standoff secures one or more cable clamps. The hardware
is composed of screw, flat washer, cable holder, cable
holder, washer, standoff, fiber washer, PC board, gasket and
then the panel bracket.
The Display Board is further repairable. The individual LCDs
can be changed. See Section 5.05.04 PCB288A-02; DIspLAY
NCMARD- Horizontal for the repair procedure.

PRELININhRY RELEASE 9/89 5-71 REPAIR

+--------------a--- -------------------------------+
1 HARTIN-DE5BRTECHHICALHUUAL 1 SPECTRUH 1000 SYsTEn I TulOllI
+-----------------------------------------~---~-----------+

Mount the new Display Board to the enclosure. Ensure the

gaskets are in place. Secure with the 6 screws and washers
removed above (and/or standoff assemblies). A minor amount
of adjustment has been allowed for in this mounting. Ensure
the display "lines up" with the Panel Lens before tightening
the screws.
Return to Section 5.03.27 PCB295A: DISPLAY CON!CROLLERROARD
above and reinstall the Display Controller board as out-
lined.
Complete the tests as described in Section 5.03.27 PCB295A;
DISPLAYCON!L'ROLLERRMRD.
Verify the original problem has been repaired.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
dure.

RKPAIR 5-72 PRELININARY BELEASE 9/89

l ------------------------ ---e-w --------------a--------+
1 MARTIN-D~TECENICALHANUAL I SPETRDH 1000 SYSTm I TulOllI

S-03.30 PCB289A; DISPLAY B0ARD - CIRCULAR XETER

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: Replacement will affect only the associated LCD
display board.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? No.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
IS this module further repairable on site? Yes.
mEocEwRE F0R REPLACIm TRE CIRCDLAR HETER DISPLAY ROARD
This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished
the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GEUERAL HODDLR
REP- through section 5.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC HODDLEREP~PEEocgwBgsGEMERALIHF0R-
HATIOX and Section 5.03.02 RECALIRRATION, SYSTBH C0LD STARTS
~BoARD~muwnwrs.
CIRc[IwR m DISPLAY BOARD -UCmlENT:
Complete the removal of the Display Board Controller as
outline in Section 5.03.27 PCB295A; DISPLAY mNTR0LLBRmAR.D
above.
Remove the 6 screws (6-32) and their fiber washers which
attach the Display Board to the enclosure. Be careful that
the gaskets (one top, one bottom ) between the Display Board
and the enclosure are not damaged.
Note: Since the Spectrum 1000 Display Board arrangement is
highly configurable it is possible that the board is mounted
with both screws and standoffs. If it is remove the stand-
offs and their associated hardware at this time. Generally
the standoff secures one or more cable clamps. The hardware
is composed of screw, flat washer, cable holder, cable
holder, washer, standoff, fiber washer, PC board, gasket and
then the panel bracket.
The Display Board is further repairable. The individual LCDs
can be changed. See Section 5.05.05 PCB289A; DISPLAY R0ARD -
Circular Meter for the repair procedure.

PRBLININARY -E 9/89 5-73 REPAIR

 ----- ---------------------_ -----------------me+
i HARTIN-DWTECRUKAL~&
+-----------------------~~-------~--~~~~~
1 SPECTRIJH 1000 SYW I TulOllI
----~~~~----------+

Mount the new Display Board to the enclosure. Ensure the

gaskets are in place. Secure with the 6 screws and washers
removed above (and/or standoff assemblies). A minor amount
of adjustment has been allowed for in this mounting. Ensure
the display "lines up" with the Panel Lens before tightening
the screws.
Return to Section 5.03.27 PCB295A; DISPLAY CONTROLLER BOARD
above and reinstall the Display Controller board as out-
lined.
Complete the tests as described in Section 5.03.27 PCB295A;
DISPLAY cota!RoLLER ROARD.
Verify the original problem has been repaired.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
dure.

REPAIR 5-74 PRELININhRY RELEASE 9/89

i HARTI#D~TBCENICALnsMuL 1 SP=~ 1000 SY~ I m0lli
.

5.03.31 Hl1062A; KKYPAD XmIIJZ

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: Replacement will affect only the associated LCD
display board. Testing will require the two dedicated keys to
be activated which may cause information to change.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? No.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? No.

This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished

the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GEUKR&L Iy)DIJLE
Wm through section 5.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIPIC HODULB REP- PBocEDIlBEsG~II9FQR-
HATION and Section 5.03.02 RBCALIERATIOIQ, SYSTR# COLD S2!AR!CS
dua3-LEvKLmuuw4wrs.
KEYPADmDuLBREPLAcENmT:
Disconnect the cable from the Keypad Module to the DC1
Display Controller at J2.
Open the Keypad Module's cable clamp and move aside the
ribbon cable. Using a pair of needle nose pliers remove the
2 6-32 nuts and then remove the two standoffs with their
lock washers and flat washers.
Remove the 4 6-32 nuts, lock washers and flat washers from
the top Keypad mounting studs.
Remove the Keypad from the Display Panel.
The mounting hardware and cable clamp are part of the Keypad
Module. Remove the hardware as above from the new Keypad.
Install the new Keypad module. Secure using the supplied
hardware and cable clamp as above. Straighten and align the
module before the nuts/standqffs are tighten.
Close the cable clamp.
Connect the ribbon connector at 52 of the DC1 Display Con-
troller.

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 5-75 REPAIR

+--------------------------------,,------------------,
1 MARTIN-D- TECRNICAL HANDAL 1 SPRCTRDH 1000 SYSTlm I lwlo11i
+--------------W-- ----~---------------~-------------------+

Perform the keyboard test below:

Press the- N1" key on the keyboard. The Keyboard Code
window should display a "1". (Press the CLR (clear key)
to clear the keyboard entry.)
Repeat the above with 2-9.
Repeat the above but enter "10".
Change a set point so a channel is in alarm. Verify that
pressing the Alarm Acknowledge key silences the alarm.
Reset the set point to the original value.
Test the two special keys by performing their function.
In a drilling application this is normally Start ROP and
Zero Bit Weight.
Verify the original problem has been repaired.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
dure.

REPAIR 5-76 PREbININARY RELEASE 9/89

+-me---- -------------------------------------------------+
1 LURTIN-DEKERTECEBlICALWWDAL 1 sPEcTRDH 1000 SYSTRI I THlOll~
. T

5.03.32 PCB266A; RELAY BDARD

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: Replacement will shut down the Signal Conditioner for
a short period of time. The Display Panel and Prism 1000 will
not receive data during this time.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? Yes.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? No.

This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished

the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GENERAL XMXJLE
REP- through section 5.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC HDDDLEREP- ~GH!JERALIHpoR-
MATION and Section S-03.02 RECiJLIRRATIobl, SYSTm COLD STARTS
ABDBMRDLEVELCOLDSTARTS.
RELAY mARDREPLiu3amT:
Turn off the Signal Conditioner's AC power. Turn off the
Signal Conditioner's battery power.
Remove the Relay board from the card cage.
Note: REL-Jl goes to the Flat Cable Module (Module 1) which
is mount on the shelf.
Remove the 34 pin ribbon cable attached to the Relay board
at Jl.
Set Swl on the new board to match the old board.
Install the new Relay board into the slot the old Relay
board came from.
Turn on the Signal Conditioner's AC, Power Switch and then
the Battery Switch.
Test the Relay board as follows:
.

Press the Alarm Acknowledge key to set the relay output

to a known state; i.e. open.

PRELINIHARY RELEASE 9/89 5-73

 --------- me--------- ---m-- ---me-

HARTIN-DEKERTECHNICALHiWCIAL I S P X C T R D H1 0 0 0 S Y s T m I TulO ll~

+ ----~ ---------
i

__----------------------~ -------w-------+

N o te : P ressing th e Display P a n e l 's A l a r m A c k n o w l e d g e key

will o p e n this circuit. The channel must go out of alarm
a n d th e n back in to retrigger th e a l a r m o u tp u t.
U s e a D V M set o n O H M S a n d m e a s u r e b e tween pins 1 a n d 2 o f
Jl. W h e n n o channels a r e in a l a r m this should b e a n o p e n
circuit. W h e n a c h a n n e l is in a l a r m this should b e a d e a d
short.
C h a n g e set p o i n ts as required to c a u s e a l a r m conditio n s .
E n s u r e th e original set p o i n ts a r e r e e n te r e d a fter th e
testin g .
R e p e a t this test o n th e following Jl 3 and 4.
N o te : T h e current softw a r e closes th e following pairs
during a n a l a r m conditio n :
Jl - 1 6 2
Jl - 3 & 4
Jl - 5 6 6
Jl - 7 6 8
Jl - 9 cl0
Jl - 1 1 & I 1 2
Jl - 1 3 6 1 4
Jl - 1 5 6 1 6
O n ly Jl 1 & 2 a n d Jl 3 & 4 h a v e a relay a tta c h e d to their
o u tp u t.
A fter th e tests a r e c o m p l e te d a tta c h th e 3 4 pin ribbon
cable r e m o v e d a b o v e to th e n e w Relay b o a r d a t Jl.
V e r i fy th e original problem h a s b e e n repaired.
If th e s e checks a r e within specifications th e n retu r n to
S e c tio n 5 .0 2 .0 1 .0 7 a n d c o m p l e te th e G e n e r a l R e p l a c e m e n t P roce-
dure.

R E P A IR 5-78 P R E L IHIRMY R E L E A S E 9 /8 9
+---------------------- --------------F---p -------WV-+

1 H44RTIbFDXEERTEHblICALMAtWAL I SPEcTRtJn 1000 SYsTmI I TulOllI

+-e--M - --m ----- -s------------------ewp ----------+

5.03.33 Hl212OA-03; RAIIuoIlwT RELAY

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: This is based on how the System 's AC Power is routed.
Norm ally the output of the AC Power Regulator goes to a junc-
tion box where it then routes to both the Signal Conditioner,
the IS Power Supply, and the Alarm Relays in the Signal Condi-
tioner. If this routing is used then replacem ent of the Rail-
m ount Relay will take the entire System out of service for a
short period of tim e.
If an alternate routing was used that allows the safe isola-
tion of the M ains power to only the Alarm Relays then only the
external alarm function will be taken out of service.
Jum pers/Switches need verification? No.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this m odule further repairable on site? No.

This procedure assum es the technician has first accom plished

the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GEWERAL HUDDLE
lWPW through section 5.02.01.05 and read Section
5.03.01 SPECIFIC #lclm m xREP~PaocEDaRBsGERERALINpoR-
HATION and Section S-03.02 RECALIBRATION, SY- COLD STARTS
ARDmARDLEvELwLDsTARTs.

To rem ove the Railm ounted Relays from service the AC power
applied to the Alarm relays m ust be turned off:
Take the required steps to isolate the m ains voltage from
the Alarm Relays:
If wired to an AC Power breaker turn off the breaker and
tag it.
If wired directly into the AC Regulator sim ple pull the
associated output plug.
Ensure the external voltage has been rem oved from the Alarm
Relay by m easuring with a D V M for AC voltage, 115 VAC:
between Chassis ground and the following locations on the
Railm ounted Relay 11, 12, 14, 21 22, 24, 31, 32, 34, 41, 42,
44. If AC is present rem ove the power before continuing.

PRELIHINARY RELEASE 9/89 5-79 RKPAIR

 -------m-m-- --------------------_----------

M A R T IM - D w T E C H N I C A L H U H IA L I S P E C T R IJH1 0 0 0 S Y sTrn I m011~

+ -----~ ---~ ~ ---~ ~ ~
i

---------------------------------+

Label e a c h wire which a tta c h e s to either relay.

R e m o v e all wiring a tta c h e d to th e relay.
Insert a screw driver a t th e b a s e o f th e Relay M o d u l e a n d
g e n tly pry o ff th e o r a n g e m o u n tin g ta b to release th e m o d u l e
from th e rail.
Install th e n e w Relay M o d u l e by s e a tin g it o n th e rail and
pulling th e o r a n g e ta b u p till th e m o d u l e is locked in
position.
R e a tta c h all wires removed above.
R e s to r e th e A C p o w e r to th e A l a r m Relay ( a n d th e system if
it w a s also r e m o v e d ) .
Test th e Relay M o d u l e as follows:
P ress th e A l a r m A c k n o w l e d g e key to set th e relay o u tp u t
to a k n o w n sta te : i.e . open.
N o te : P ressing th e Display P a n e l 's A l a r m A c k n o w l e d g e key
will o p e n this circuit ( a n d th e r e fo r e s h o w a difference
in p o te n tial). T h e c h a n n e l m u s t g o o u t o f a l a r m a n d th e n
b a c k in to retrigger th e a l a r m o u tp u t (close th e circuit
a n d c a u s e little c h a n g e in p o te n tial).
N o te : T h e following test applies only if th e H o t l e a d o f
th e E xternal A l a r m device is switched. This is s h o w n as a
worst case. G e n e r a l l y th e n e u tral line w o u l d b e u s e d .
M e a s u r e with a D V M for A C voltage, 1 1 5 V A C ; b e tween th e
following:
12 & 14
W h e n n o channels are in a l a r m 1 1 5 V A C should be measured
b e tween th e m .
A lso verify th a t th e Relay's L E D is o ff. T h e external
A l a r m relay should also b e o ff.
C h a n g e set p o i n ts as required to c a u s e a l a r m conditio n s .
E n s u r e th e original set p o i n ts a r e r e e n te r e d a fter th e
testin g .
W h e n a c h a n n e l is in a l a r m th e r e should b e only a fe w
volts measured.
A lso verify th a t th e Relay's L E D is o n . T h e external
A l a r m relay should also b e o n .

R E P A IR P R E L IM IB IA R Y R E L E A S E 9 /8 9
+--------------------

IHIRARY
------a---m

/ --a-------------+
IR
1 HART 1 S P B C T R D H1 0 0 0 S Y I mno11
. .

Repea t t on t f
22 6 24 -
32 6 34
42 6 44
Veri t original problem h a s b e e n repaired
If t checks a r e within specifications t re t
Sec 5 and comple t General Replacemen P
dure

PREL RgLgAsE 9 5-81 REPA

 --P

i H A R T IH-DEcILg61!lXCHHICALHAI@ IA L 1 S P E T R D H 1 0 0 0 S Y L H
-- --- I TulO lli
+ -- ---------
------m --

--em--- -----------------------+

5 .0 3 .3 4 P C B 3 4 3 A - S E R IE S : D /A C O N V E R T E R -
B o a r d Level C o l d S tarts: N o t required.
S ystem C o l d S tart: N o t required.
C h a n n e l Recalibration: N o t required.
E ffects: R e p l a c e m e n t will s h u t d o w n th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r for
a short period o f tim e . T h e Display P a n e l a n d P rism 1 0 0 0 will
n o t receive d a ta during this tim e .
J u m p e r s /S w itches n e e d verification? Yes.
S o ftw a r e n e e d s to b e transferred? No.
Is this m o d u l e furth e r repairable o n site? No.
P R o c E w R E F O R R E P L A C Ib w ;TE B D /A WRVERTER BOARD
This p r o c e d u r e a s s u m e s th e technician h a s first accomplished
th e tasks a s described in S e c tio n 5 .0 2 .0 1 .0 1 GEH5U4L #MIDDLE
R IIP - th r o u g h section 5 .0 2 .0 1 .0 5 a n d r e a d S e c tio n
5 .0 3 .0 1 S P E C IFIC H o D u L l z ~ ~ P R o c E D u R E s ~ I~ -
H A T Io # a n d S e c tio n 5 .0 3 .0 2 R E C A L IB R A T IO B I, S Y S T IP I C 0 I.D S T A R T S
A w ) m iu u 3 r a w a m r n s w w s .

T u r n o ff th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r 's AC power. T u r n o ff th e

S ignal C o n d i tio n e r 's b a ttery power.
R e m o v e th e DAC board from th e card cage.
N o te : D A C - P 2 g o e s to th e A n a l o g O u tp u t Module (Module 2)
which is m o u n t o n th e shelf.
R e m o v e th e 2 6 pin ribbon cable a tta c h e d to th e DAC board at
P2.
S e t S W 1 o n th e new board to m a tch th e old board.
J u m p e r th e new board to m a tch th e old board.
Install th e new DAC board into th e slot th e old DAC board
c a m e from .
T u r n o n th e S ignal C o n d i tio n e r 's A C P o w e r S w itch a n d th e n
th e B a ttery S w itch.

R K P A IR P R E L IHIB U 4 R Y R E L E A S E 9 /8 9
 -----------d--m -----------------------------+

i WARTIH-DIZKHRTECHNICALHAIWAL 1 sPEcTRlm 1000 SYs!rm I ml011~

The System will reload the current channel assignments and

scale values for the DAC board during the power up warm
start. No operator action is required.
Note: R2A (A-H = DAC channel A-H) sets the channels offset.
R4A (A-H = DAC channel A-H) sets the channels gain.
These two settings require known values to be sent to the
board and are factory adjustments only. They should not be
adjusted in the field.
Test the DAC board as follows:

Note: The following test assumes the Analog Output Termi-

nation Module is fully operational:
Note: The example describes the tests for DAC channel 0.
If this channel is unassigned the first assigned channel
should be used.
Determine and record the low and high scale points for
each DAC channel.
Follow the procedure in Section 4.03 of the Spectrum 1000
User's Manual; TWlOll-IO.
Use a DVM set to measure voltage:
Verify on the Analog Termination Module's TBl; Pin 19
(Negative) and Pin 25 (Positive) 24 VDC.
Use a DVM set to measure current:
Insert the DVM in line between TBl; Pin 1 (negative) and
Pin 2 (positive) for DAC channel 0.
The following will test for 0 MADC at the low scale
factor in Engineering Units for DAC Channel 0:
Connect the appropriate simulator to the assigned
logical channel (TBXX on the TRP Mother Board) and
adjust the simulator so the Display Channel repre-
sents the low scale value in Engineering Units.
Verify the DVM reads 0.000 MADC.

PRELIMINARY RELEASE 9/89 5-83 REPAIR

+----------------------------- --a-------------------+
1 MARTIM--D~TBCRUICALHANIJAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYsTm I TmOllI
+ ----s--------s- -------- --m--s--- --------+

The following will test for 20 MADC at the high scale factor
for DAC Channel 0:
Connect the appropriate simulator to the assigned
logical channel (TBXX on the TRP Mother Board) and
adjust the simulator so the Display Channel repre-
sents the high scale value in Engineering Units.
Verify the DVM reads 20.000 MADC.
Repeat the above tests for each DAC channel that is
assigned a logical channel.
Note: The DAC Channels versus TBl pin numbers are as
follows:
DAC Channel TBl Negative CL TBl Positive CL
0 1 2
1 3 4
2 5 6
3 7 a
4 9 10
5 11 12
6 13 14
7 15 16
Note: If the DAC Channel is assigned to Logical
Channel 0 it is unassigned.
Check the calibration of the DAC board per the
calibration procedures as outline in Section 4.03 of
the Spectrum 1000 User's Manual; TUlOll-IO.
Verify the original problem has been repaired.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
dure.

5-84 PRELIHIRARY RELEASE 9/89

+----a- ------------__-------.-- ------ -~~~---------~-+
1 HARTIN-DER.ERTEEHICALHiMJAL 1 sPEcTRuH 1000 SYsTEn I TulOllI

5.03.03.33 PcB344A; WAL0GWTPDTTERHIHATIDUBQARD

Board Level Cold Starts: Not required.
System Cold Start: Not required.
Channel Recalibration: Not required.
Effects: Only the outputs from the DAC board will be out of
service. The Signal Conditioner and Display Panel will still
function. Prism 1000 will receive data during this time.
Jumpers/Switches need verification? No.
Software needs to be transferred? No.
Is this module further repairable on site? No.
PRocEDmEFoRREpLAcIlJGTHE ANALOGODTPUTTERIIINATIONBQARD
This procedure assumes the technician has first accomplished
the tasks as described in Section 5.02.01.01 GENERAL w)DIJLE
RlWm through section 5.02.01.05 and read Section
5103.01 SPECIFIC HDDDLE RJzPLAcmENTPRocmmmS~I~-
HATION and Section 5.03.02 RECALIERATION, SYSTm COLD STARTS
ARDBOARDLEVELCOLDSTARTS.

The Analog Output Termination Module is located on the

Signal Conditioner's mounting shelf in front of the Relay
Interface Module.
Disconnect the termination plug in position TB48 located on
the TRP Mother Board. This removes the 24 VDC loop power to
the Termination board.
Unplug the 26 pin connector from Jl of the Analog Output
Termination Module.
Label and then remove all wiring on the Analog Output Termi-
nation Module's TBl.
The Analog Output Termination Module is a "Snap Rail" mount.
Use a screw driver to pry against the extended lip in the
direction away from the rail to release it from the rail.
Carefully pull the end pieces, from the rail mount to expose
the PC board (PCB344A).
Reassembly the rail mount around the new PC board.
Snap the assembly onto the rail.

PRELIHIRARY RELEASE 9/89 5-85

 T

i W4RTIH-D~!l!ZZENICALWWCIAL I sPETiatJH 1000 SYsTrn I lulOllI

+----------------------------------------------------------------+

Plug in the 26 pin connector to Jl removed above.

Reattach the wiring removed above to the new module's TBl.
Plug in the termination plug removed above to the TRP Mother
Board's TB48.
Test the DAC board as follows:

Note: The example describes the tests for DAC channel 0.

If this channel is unassigned the first assigned channel
should be used.
Note: The following test assumes the DAC Board is fully
operational:
Determine and record the low and high scale points for
each DAC channel.
Follow the procedure in Section 4.03 of the Spectrum 1000
User's Hanual; !CUlOll-IO.
Use a DVM set to measure voltage:
Verify on the Analog Termination Module's TBl; Pin 19
(Negative) and Pin 25 (Positive) 24 VDC.
Use a DVM set to measure current:
Insert the DVM in line between TBl; Pin 1 (negative) and
Pin 2 (positive) for DAC channel 0.
The following will test for 0 MADC at the low scale
factor in Engineering Units for DAC Channel 0:
Connect the appropriate simulator to the assigned
logical channel (TBXX on the TRP Mother Board) and
adjust the simulator so the Display Channel repre-
sents the low scale value in Engineering Units.
Verify the DVM reads 0.000 MADC.
The following will test for 20 MADC at the high scale factor
for DAC Channel 0:
Connect the appropriate simulator to the assigned
logical channel (TBXX on the TRP Mother Board) and
adjust the simulator so the Display Channel repre-
sents the high scale value in Engineering Units.
Verify the DVM reads 20.000 MADC.

5-86 PRELIHIRARY RELEASE 9/89

 Repeat the above tests for each DAC channel that is
assigned a logical channel.
Note: The DAC Channels versus TBl pin numbers are as
follows:
DAC Channel TBl Negative CL TBl Positive CL
0 1 2
1 3 4
2 5 6
3 7 a
4 9 10
5 11 12
6 13 14
7 15 16
Note: If the DAC Channel is assigned to Logical
Channel 0 it is unassigned.
Check the calibration of the DAC board per the
calibration procedures as outline in Section 4.03 of
the Spectrum 1000 User's Hanual; TWlOll-IO.
Verify the original problem has been repaired.
If these checks are within specifications then return to
Section 5.02.01.07 and complete the General Replacement Proce-
dure.

PRELIHIHARY RELEASE 9/89 5-87 IIJPAIR

i M4RTIBl-D~!l'BCERICUHARUAL
-- -e--v-- I sPEcJ!mJn
1000 SYSTEM 1 75dl0lli--
+- +

5.04 GmIERAL UXKLBREPAIRPV

5.04.01 GENERAL -kmDLE REPAIR. Certain modules can be removed
and then further repaired on site. Table 5.3 Field Repairable
nodule List details which modules fall into this category and
what is repairable on each.
5.04.01.01 Follow the procedures in Section 5.02 General Module
Replacement Procedure and Section 5.03 Specific nodule Replace-
ment Procedures to remove the module.
5.04.01.02 Once removed follow the steps in this section and
then the specific instructions in the next section to repair the
module in question.
Note: The exception to this are fuse replacements. These are
described in the appropriate Specific Hodule Replacement Proce-
dures Section.
5.04.01.03 If Software is to be changed out refer to Section
5.06 Software Only Replacement Procedures for the correct proce-
dure.

REPAIR 5-88 PRELIHIRARY RELEASE 9/89

iHARTIN-DEXXERTECECUICISL nl4uuAL I sPBcTRtm 1000 SYSTR4 I !mlOllI
+ ----w-----w- ------------------ ------------a-----+

5.05 SPECIFIC MQDDLEREPAIRPB

5.05.01 GENERAL IRF0RlMATIDR After the faulty module is identi-
fied and the Section on General Module Replacewent Procedure has
been completed through Section 5.02.01.06; the technician fol-
lows the appropriate section below to accomplish the repair
work. Once this task is completed the remainder of the Section
on General Lbdule Replacement Procedure should be followed.

PRELIHIRARY RELEASE 9/89 5-89 RKPAIR

 ---------w---e- ------ --------------------+

M A R T IN-D- TECEHICAL M A N U A L 1 SPmTRun 1000 S Y S T R ! I m lo11I

+ ------- -I_--------- ---------~ -------~ +
i

5 .0 5 .0 2 E l1059A: A C P O W E RP A N E L
N o te : A ll orienta tio n directions n o te d b e l o w a r e m a d e with th e
A C P o w e r P a n e l , wire side u p a n d th e two external c o n n e c tors
closest to th e observer.

5 .0 5 .0 2 .0 1 Hl2072A-01; A C P o w e r Transient P rotector removal and

replaceaent
T h e A C P o w e r P rotector is th e c e n trally located square
m o d u l e with 4 screw terminal studs.
Label e a c h set o f wires which a tta c h to th e studs.
R e m o v e th e wiring.
N o te : The proper sequence of hardware is n u t, washer, termi-
nals, w a s h e r , n u t.
N o te th e orienta tio n th e A C P o w e r P rotector is m o u n te d in:
( E x a m p l e : T o p right terminal is g r o u n d .)
R e m o v e th e P rotector from th e A C P o w e r P a n e l . It is secured
by two sets o f h a r d w a r e a s s e m b l e d as follows:
S crew, nylon washer, ( m o u n tin g plate), (protector), th e n
n u t.
P lace th e n e w p o w e r p r o tector in th e s a m e orienta tio n as
n o te d a b o v e a n d secured with th e old h a r d w a r e .
N o te : D o n o t d e fo r m th e nylon w a s h e r m o r e th a n 5%.
R e a tta c h th e wiring removed above. T a k e care n o t to over-
tig h te n th e terminals.
T h e A C P o w e r P a n e l c a n n o w b e reinstalled a n d teste d p e r th e
instructions in S e c tio n 5 .0 3 .0 4 E l 1 0 5 9 A ; AC Pouer Panel.
 T
i HARTIJH-DECKERTECRNICALRARUAL
+----------------------------------
1 SPHZTRDH 1000 SYsTml
---------------•+
I mlOll(

5.05.02.02 EU1008A-05; AC Pover Filter removal and replacerent

The AC Power Filter is the rectangular module with 4 spade
terminal studs.
Label each set of wires which attach to the studs.
Remove the wiring.
Note the orientation the AC Power Filter is mounted in:
(Example: Top right terminal is Line Out - Line.)
Remove the Filter from the AC Power Panel. It is secured by
two sets of hardware assembled as follows:
Screw, nylon washer, (mounting plate), (filter), then nut.
Place the new filter in the same orientation as noted above
and secured with the old hardware.
Note: Do not deform the nylon washer more than 5%.
Reattach the wiring removed above.
The AC Power Panel can now be reinstalled and tested per the
instructions in Section 5.03.04 Rl1059A; AC Power Panel.

PRELIHIBIARY RELEUE 9/89 5-91 RKPAIR

+-------------------------------------------~ -----a---------+
1 MTIIil-D-TECEHICALHAWAL I sPEcTRtm 1000 SYsTEn 1 m1011I
.

5.05.02.03 EIl2085A; AC Power Switch removal and replacement

The AC Power Panel Switch (SWl) is located on the left side
of the AC Power Panel.
Label each wire which attaches to the switch.
Remove the wiring.
Note the orientation the AC Power Switch is mounted in:
(Example: With the toggle up the bottom two connectors are
closed)
Remove the switch from the AC Power Panel. It is secured by
hardware assembled as follows:
Nut, sealing washer, (mounting plate), washer, nut then
(switch).
Place the new switch in the same orientation as noted above
and secured with the old hardware.
Reattach the wiring removed above.
The AC Power Panel can now be reinstalled and tested per the
instructions in Section 5.03.04 EllOS9A: AC Power Panel.

REPAIR 5-92 PRELIHIHARY RELEASE 9/89

 m-
i HARTIR-DEICER TECBWICAL MANUAL 1 sPEcTRun
+ ---------- ----------------------------------------~--+
1000 SYsTgn I Tm.011~

5.05.02.04 El2085A; Battery Switch removal and replacement

The Battery Power Switch (SW2) is located on the right side
of the AC Power Panel.
Follow the instructions in Section 5.05.02.03 El2085A; AC
Power Switch removal and replacement except apply them to
the battery switch.

PRELIHIRARY RKLEhSB 9/89 5-93 REPAIR

+------VW--W--B--- -----v-------es-- ----em---

I MART ~ 1 sPEcl 1000 SYSTR I Tmo1 IR

+

5 Hl0420A A C P o w e r F u s e Holder remma and replacemen

T h e A C P o w e r - P a n e l F u s e Holder (Fl is located on t left
side o t AC Power Panel
Label e a c h wire which a t t F u s e Holder
Remove t wiring using proper desoldering t
Remove t F u s e Holder fro t AC Power Panel It is se-
cured by h a r d w a r e a s s e m b l e d as f

(Fuse Holder) "0" Ring (moun pla lock washer t

nu
I t n e w F u s e Holder a n d secured with t old hard-
ware
I a 3 A M P 250 V f in t f holder (M P
H1507-25
Rea t wiring r e m o v e d a b o v e using proper soldering
t a n d solder (60
T h e A C P o w e r P a n e l c a n n o w b e reinstalled and t per t
instructions in S e c S E AC Power Panel

REPA s-94 PREL RELEASE 9

1 HARTIN-D~TECBWICALHAUUAL 1 SPEcTmH 1000 SYSTBI~ 1 m0lli
+-------------------------- --------------------+

5.05.03 PC8287A; DISPLAY B0ARD - mTI(X,

5.05.03.01 JJl6979A; Bar Graphic LCD or 810974A-05; Humeric LCD
reroval and replacement.

Each LCD Display is very fragile. Be very careful not

to break them during extraction or insertion. If a
display is broken exercise caution that the fragments
do not cause injury. Wearing eye protection is recm-
mended.
In general segment failure occurs due to a mechanical fail-
ure between the LCD Display proper and it's LCD Display pin.
This is an internal failure within the LCD Display itself.
It is relatively rare for the failure to be in the LCD
Display Pin to it's mating socket or due to the LCD Driver
IC failing.
The cause of the internal failure can be traced to stress
applied to this junction during the insertion process par-
ticularly when the pin is not precisely centered in it's
mating socket.
For this reason it is common to "fix" a missing segment by
simply pressing on the face of the LCD module. Be aware that
if the problem is an internal LCD failure the segment will
become intermittent again. Repeated failure of the same
segment requires the LCD be replaced.
The technique for extraction and insertion for the 3 types
of LCDs is the same.
EXTRACTION. Using a pliable pry bar such as a popsicle stick
or tongue depressor pry each corner of the LCD Display up.
Start on one corner then move around the LCD. Continue in
this manner till the device is free.
INSERTION. If a new device is used check to see if the pins
need to be bent before inserting. If they do bend them per
normal IC techniques.
If an old display is used check for bent or misaligned pins
and correct these now.

PRELIWIRARY RELEASE 9/89 5-95 REPAIR

i
+ --
MARTIN-DEXERTBCEHICALHABlUAL
-----------
1 spmm 1000 spi5~Iiti4 1 m0lli
-W-W--------------+

Ensure the LCD Display is properly oriented:

The Numeric display has two rows of 25 pins each. It has
several decimal points. Use these to determine orienta-
tion. The decimal points should be on the bottom of the
display.
The LCD Bar Graphic Display has two rows of 33 pins each.
This display will function irregardless of how the pins
are oriented. It does not matter.
The LCD Circular Bar Graphic Display has two rows of 64
pins each. This display has an arc which goes toward the
top of its Display Module.
Place the LCD display so it rests on its mating socket. Once
the LCD pins are in the generally correct position apply a
circular movement to the entire LCD display to "drop" the
pins into the screw machine sockets. Verify that all pins
are correctly centered in their socket and then apply a
uniform pressure to press the pins into their sockets.
Ensure that all pins have been properly seated.
The Vertical Display Board can now be reinstalled and tested
per the instructions in Section 5.03.28; FCB287A: Display
Board Vertical.

5-96 PRELIHINARY RELEASE 9/89

 T
i
+
HARTIR-DEKERTECBNICALHARtJAL
-----em --v--------
1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYSTm
------------------+
I lrmo11I

5.05.04 PCB288A-02; DISPLAY BOARD - RORIZONTAL

5.05.04.01 Hl6979A; Dar Graphic ED or RlO974A-05; Ehmeric LCD
removal and replacement.
Observe the WARNIIUZ and follow the procedure described in
Section 5-05.03 PCB287A; Display Board - Vertical.
The Horizontal Display Board can now be reinstalled and tested
per the instructions in Section 5.03.29; PCR288A-02; Display
Board Horizontal.

PRELIHIW4RY RELEhSE 9/89 5-97 REPAIR

 T
i MARTIN-DEKERTECHRICALHANUAL
+----------~----
1 SPEcTRan 1000 SYSTEH I mo11I
--------------------------~-------~~~+

5.05.05 PCR289A; DISPLAY BOARD - Circular Heter

5.05.05.01 Hl6975A-01; Circular Heter LCD
Observe the WING and follow the procedure described in
Section 5.05.03 PCR287A; Display Board - Vertical.
The Circular Meter Display Board can now be reinstalled and
tested per the instructions in Section 5.03.30: PCH289A;
Display Board Horizontal.

REPAIR 5-98 PRELIWIWARY RELEASE 9/89

+------------------------------------------ -----------------+
1 HARTIN-DECKERTECHNICALHANUAL 1 SPEcTRm 1000 SYSTEU I !mlOll[
+-------------------------------------------- -------+

5.06 SOFTWARE oNLYREP-PRocEDDREs

5.06.01 GENKRAb IHWRHATIOJ!J There are 3 types of software used
in the Spectrum 1000 system:
EPROMs - Electrically Programmable Read Only Memory. EPROMS con-
tain the program. A programmed EPROM is also referred to as
firmware. EPROMS can be erased and then reprogrammed in an EPROM
programmer. They can not have their programmed changed while
installed in the Spectrum 1000 system.
The Spectrum 1000 has the following Board Level EPROMS:
PCB282A; ADC Board
PCB270A; PIB Board
Board Level EPROMS contain the instructions to allow these
boards to perform their specific functions.
The Spectrum 1000 has the following System Level EPROMS:
PCB327A-02; CPU Board
PCB295A; Display Controller Board
H10980A; HHT (Hand Held Terminal)
System Level EPROMS contain the instructions which make the
hardware perform as a System.
With the exception of the HHT all spare boards are shipped with-
out EPROMS installed.
When software is upgraded either or both the Board Level and
System software may be changed.

PROMS - Programmable Read Only Memory. A PROM once programmed

can not be erased and reprogrammed like an EPROM. It is program-
mable only once.
The Spectrum 1000 has the following Board Level PROM:
PCB327A-02; CPU Board
The PROM is shipped installed on spare boards. It might be
changed as part of a System Level software upgrade.

PRELIHIWARY RELEASE 9/89 s-99

 r
i HARTIN-D~T.ECRRICALR44UUAL 1 SPECTRDH 1000 SYs!rEm I lrnlOllI

PALS - Programmable Array Logic. These devices allow logical

devices to be created to solve specific hardware requirements.
Like an PROM they can be programmed only once.
The Spectrum 1000 has the following Board Level PALS:
PCB282A; ADC Board
PCB270A; PIB Board
PCB327A-02; CPU Board
PCB309A; MATS Board
The PALS are shipped installed on spare boards. They might be
changed as part of a System Level or Board Level software up-
grade.

REPAIR S-100 PRELIWIWARY RELEASE 9/89

i MARTIN-DEKER TECRRIUL HANUAL 1 SP-~ 1000 SYST~W I ~n01li

5.06.02 Device Replacement Procedure The following applies to

EPROMS, PROMS and PALS. They will be referred to as programmable
devices:
Read and observe the CADTION contained in Section 5.01.02 ORGAN-
IZATION dealing with the static sensitivity of the PC boards
used in the Spectrum 1000. This caution also applies to each
programmable device: EPROM, PROM and PAL.
Ensure any static charge has been removed before handling the
programmable devices.
Programmable device extraction. Note the socket location of the
devices to be removed and their specific orientation within
their sockets. This is especially important if the devices do
not use all pins of the sockets.
Note: All programmable devices are socketed.
Place the old board which contains the software to be removed on
a flat, slightly padded work surface. Place the new board in the
same orientation next to the old board.
Using a thin blade screw driver pry the device up (away) from
it's socket: alternate prying at each end. Perform this prying
slowly so the device pins are not damaged.
Once the device is free examine each pin and straighten it as
required.
Programmable device insertion. If this change is part of a
software upgrade then new devices may have been supplied. These
will need to have their pins bent so they align with their
sockets. This is done by placing the device on its side on a
hard surface and rolling the device till its pins are perpendic-
ular to the body of the device. EPROMS are easy to do. PROMS and
PALS are more difficult as they are smaller. Once the pins are
straight proceed.
Orient the device in it's socket and then wiggle it so all pins
properly seat. Then press on the device till it seats fully.
Inspect the socket to ensure all pins have seated properly.

PRELIHIRARY RELEASE 9/89 s-101 REPAIR

+-M----------B----- ------v ------------- --------~~~~+

1 HART TECHN HA 1 S P E C T R U W1 0 0 0 S Y M I !
+ ------------------

5 So Dpgrades F r o m ti t ti t syste a n d or
B o a r d Level so will be changed t fix " b u g s " a n d t a d d
addi f or m o d i channels or
modi S De
E a c h u p g r a d e so kit will include specific instructions
which m a y m o d i t infor below If n o instructions are
provided f t procedure below
Labels A Mar programmable devices h a v e a labels.
The f infor is included
Label on bo o device:
So Par number D a s h n u m b e r a n d 4 digit Checksum
Label on t o t device:
So program par n u m b e r (Always XNNNNNA) and dash number
The dash number con t So revision infor
E X10382A-PR19V2 means t is d a s h n u m b e r 1 9 revi-
sion 2
I addi t t label will have t initials o t board
and t socket number where t so is t b e installed.
E P U3
S o m e labels f E P R O M Swill also h a v e t copywrite year and
t da t E P R O Mw a s p r o g r a m m e d
S t label iden where t device g o e s si f
t ex a n d insertion directions in S e c 5
DEV
If t infor b e l o w or in t instructions t w e r e sup-
plied with t so u p g r a d e indicate a S Cold S or
a B o a r d Level C o l d S (either A D C or P will b e required
t record t infor as listed in S e c 5
The f rules apply t E P R O M Sonly:
If S Level so is changed a S Cold S is
required
Re t Sec 5 RECAL SYSTR OOLD STARTS AB
WURD m COLD STARTS f a comple explana o when
Board and S Level C o l d S a r e required

5-102 PREL RELEASE 9

 .
i HARTIN-DKXER TECHNICAL HANUAL 1 SPFXXRDM
+--------------------------------------------------------------*
1000SYSTEM 1 TWlOlli

SECTION 6.0
DRAWINGSANDPARTS LISTS

6.01 List of Drawings

The following 4 drawings and parts lists are
included in this section;

H12056A-SERIES Signal Conditioner exploded view

H12056A-SERIES Signal Conditioner front view
H12055A-SERIES Display Panel outside view
H12055A-SERIES Display Panel inside view

PRKLIHINARY RELEASE 9/89 6-l JXUWIffisAI!mPARTsLIsTs

 . .
.,q. .- z c.
 SIGH&L C0blDITIONER
H12056A-SERIES
EXPLDDEDVIEW
LIST OF w3DoTiEs
WOO QTY PARTrammER DESCRIPTIOlii
-----------------------------------------------------------------
1 1 A11377A TOP HEAT SINK
2 1 B10440A HEAT SINK GASKET
3 1 A11179A-02 SIGNAL CONDITIONER ENCLOSURE
4 1 B10418A POWER SUPPLY GASKET
* H11066A POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY W/HEAT SINK
A 1 H11070A-01 POWER SUPPLY 220W
(5) 1 A11274A POWER SUPPLY HEAT SINK
6 1 A11253A AC POWER PANEL COVER
7 1 B10417A AC POWER PANEL GASKET
8 1 H11059A AC POWER PANEL
9 1 H1689-8S AC POWER CONNECTOR
10 1 H1689-9S BATTERY CONNECTOR
11 1 A11399A BOTTOM PLATE ASSEMBLY
12 1 B10419A BOTTOM PLATE GASKET
13 1 A11414A SHELF MOUNTING BRACKET
14 1 A11421A-01 SHELF HINGE BRACKET
15 1 A11420A SHELF PLATE
16 1 A11393A HAND HELD TERMINAL BRACKET
17 1 H10980A HAND HELD TEMINAL
18 1 H12120A-03 24V DPDT RAILMOUNT RELAY
19 1 Hl212lA ANALOG OUTPUT TERMINATION MODULE
20 1 H12083A-06 ALARM/RELAY TERMINATION MODULE
21 1 A11421A-02 SHELF HINGE BRACKET
22 1 PCB345A TRP MOTHERBOARDASSEMBLY
23 1 A11414A SHELF MONTING BRACKET
24 1 H10953A STD BUS CARD CAGE ASSEMBLY
25 1 PCB293A SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
26 1 H12188A-01 DUAL FAN ASSEMBLY
27 1 A11412A SIGNAL CONDITIONER SERVICE PANEL
 SIGNAL amDI!J!IObTER
El2056A-SERIES
ImoN!z VIBU
LIST OF WwwJLEs
. No. QTY PARTumBRl DESCRIPTIOU
-----------------------------------------------------------------
11 Hl2188A-01 DUAL FAN ASSEMBLY
2 1 H10953A STD BUS CARD CAGE ASSEMBLY
* H11066A POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY W/HEAT SINK
A 1 H11070A-01 POWER SUPPLY 220W
(;I 1 A11274A POWER SUPPLY HEAT SINK
1 H11059A AC POWER PANEL
PCB296A-SERIES TRP POWER MODULE
(:, A;R PCB296A-01 12VDC TRP POWER MODULE
(5) A/R PCB296A-02 24VDC TRP POWER MODULE
PCB291A-SERIES SENSOR TRP MODULE (ANALOG SENSORS)
(iii) A;R PCB291A-01 24VDC ANALOG SENSOR TRP MODULE
(6j A/R PCB291A-02 12VDC ANALOG SENSOR TRP MODULE
(6) A/R PCB291A-03 1OVDC ANALOG SENSOR TRP MODULE
(6) A/R PCB291A-04 5VDC ANALOG SENSOR TRP MODULE
7 A/R PCB290A CURRENT LOOP TRP MODULE
8 '1 PCB313A CURRENT LOOP CONTROL TRP MODULE
PCB291A-SERIES SENSOR TRP MODULE (PULSE SENSORS)
(;) A;R PCB291A-05 12VDC NPN PULSE SENSOR TRP MODULE
(9) A/R PCB291A-06 NPN PULSE SENSOR TRP MODULE
(9) A/R PCB291A-07 PNP PULSE SENSOR TRP MODULE
(9) A/R PCB291A-08 12VDC PNP PULSE SENSOR TRP MODULE
10 1 H12046A COMMUNICATION CABLE ASSEMBLY
11 1 PCB345A TRP MOTHERBOARDASSEMBLY
12 1 PCB293A SENSOR POWER SUUPLY ASSEMBLY
13 1 PCB266A RELAY BOARD ASSEMBLY
14 1 PCB343A-01 DAC BOARD ASSEMBLY (8 CH. 0-20MA)
15 1 PCB328A-02 RTC BOARD ASSEMBLY
16 1 PCB309A MATS BOARD ASSEMBLY
17 1 PCB270A PIB BOARD ASSEMBLY
18 1 PCB282A ADC BOARD ASSEMBLY
19 1 PCB341A-02 DSIO BOARD ASSEMBLY
20 2 PCB327A-02 CPU BOARD ASSEMBLY
21 1 PCB32.6A CPI BOARD ASSEMBLY
22 A/R PCB275A AMP/MUX BOARD ASSEMBLY
 DISPLAY PAMEL
H12OSsA-smuEs
ODTSIDE VIZBW
LIST OF M m tJLEs

No- Q(nrr PAR!?- DESCRIPTIOIY

------e-m

1 1 B10446A M A R T IN-DECKER NAMEPLATE

2 1 B10445A SPECTRUM 1000 NAMEPLATE
3 1 Al1269A BEZEL ASSEMBLY
4 1 H11062A KEYPAD ASSEMBLY
2 1 B10448A KEYPAD NAMEPLATE
B10447A INSTRUCTION NAMEPLATE
7 1 B10521A WARNING NAMEPLATE
8 ------- CERTIFICATION NAMEPLATE
t 9 A/R AllZlZA-SERIES LENS ASSEMBLY
10 A/R J10481A-02 .75 INCH CONDUIT HUB
11 1 A11310A LATCH ASSEMBLY
 06
/
-07
/
/
-08
\\
 DISPLAY PANEL
EU2055A-SERIES
INSIDE VIEn
LIST OF nDDDLES
No. QTY PARTNmBER DESCRIP!l!ION
-----------------------------------------------------------------
1 1 H11062A KEYPAD ASSEMBLY
2 1 H12010A ISMI MASTER MODULE ASSEMBLY
3 A/R PCB288A-02 DISPLAY BOARD TYPE 2
4 A/R PCB295A DISPLAY CONTROLLER BOARD ASSEMBLY
5. A/R H12009A ISMI SLAVE MODULE ASSEMBLY
6 A/R PCB289A DISPLAY BOARD TYPE 3
7 A/R A11270A 5 DISPLAY BOARD MOUNTING FRAME
8 A/R PCB287A DISPLAY BOARD TYPE 1
9 A/R J10481A-02 .75 INCH CONDUIT HUB
10 1 HlZlOlA TERMINAL BLOCK ASSEMBLY
11 1 A11310A LATCH ASSEMBLY
+--------------------- ----------------------a----+

1 HARTIN-DBCKEEtTECEHICALHAND& 1 SPECTRUH 1000 SYSTEn 1 lrnlOllI

DRAm#GsANDPARTSLISTS 6-2 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

1 HAWl!IM-DEcIcEBTECEHICALHAbiD&L 1 SPECTRDM 1000 SYSTRl 1 !JWlOll~
+---- ------- ---Fme----- ----------------------am--+

PRELI!4IwmY RELEASE 9/89 6-3 DBAwIblGSArilDPARTSLISTS

 -------I----------- ----------------- ------mma--a-------+

i HARTIN-DEKERTECBIYICALHANUAL 1 SPBCTRDH 1000 SYsTrn I !lwlOll~

DwwINGsAmTDPARTsLIsTs 6-4 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

1 HARTIN-DEKER TECHNICAL MANUAL 1 SPECTRUN 1000 SYsTgn I lwlo11~
+----- -I---_----------------- -----------------------+

PRELIMINARY RELEASE 9/89 6-5 DRAmNGsANDPARTsLIsTs

 1 HARTIN-DEICER TECHNICAL HANDAL 1 SPECTRIJH 1000 SYsTEn I !m011~
*------------------------------------------------~-~-----+

DRmIRxxANDPARTsLIsTs 6-6 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

I-IN-DlECKERT~ICALL(AMIIAL I SPBCTRDH 1000 SYsTEn I TulOlli
+--------------------------------------- --w--------+

PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89 6-7

1 HARTIN-DEKER TEHNICAL HANIJAL I SPECTRDX 1000 SYsTml I TulOlli
+------- ------------------------------------------------+

DEtmINGsANDPAuTsLIsTs 6-8 PRELININARY RELEASE 9/89

+--------------- --------------------------------------------*
I HARTIN-DECKERTEENICALUNUAL 1 SPETmJH 1000 SYs!rE# I !l!ul011~

PRELININARY RBLEASB 9/89 6-9 DRAmNGsAuDPARTsLxsTs

+ b
IlwmHmnm(weenorcAL~ I SP- 1000 STsTRa I TulOll~

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DimmaGsysDP~LIsTs 6-10 mmmmaRY - 9/89